BID PROPOSAL FOR THE TOWN CREEK CROSSING # 2 BRIDGE IMPROVEMENTS KERB COUNTY, TEXAS APRIL 2006 F `'`" ,. ` "1) -~ , ~) Prepared By: ~,1j1 HEARN ENGINEERING, INC. ~ ~ ~ ~ ~~ ~~ 2 ] O1 N. Mays Round Rock, Texas 78664 (512) 310-0176 TABLE OF CONTENTS BIDDING REQUIREMENTS: PAGE: NOTICE TO BIDDERS ....................................................... NB-1 (of 1) INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS ................................................. IB-1 (of 6) BID PROPOSAL ............................................................ BP-1 (of 4) BID BOND ................................................................ BB-1 (of l) NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT ............................................... NC-1 (of 1) PROHIBITED ACTS STATEMENT ............................................ PA-1 (of 1) STATEMENT OF BIDDERS QUALIFICATIONS ................................. BQ-1 (of 3) CONTRACT FORMS AND OTHER DOCUMENTS: NOTICE OF AWARD ....................................................... NW-1 (of 1) OWNER-CONTRACTOR AGREEMENT ........................................ OC-1 (of 3) PERFORMANCE BOND ..................................................... PB-1 (of 2) PAYMENT BOND .......................................................... PT-1 (of 2) NOTICE TO CONTRACTOR OF TAX EXEMPT STATUS ......................... TX-1 (of 1) NOTICE TO PROCEED ...................................................... NP-1 (of 1) -- INDEX TO GENERAL CONDITIONS GC-IND-1 (of 1) ...................................... GENERAL CONDITIONS ................................................... GC-1 (of 42) SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS ............................................ SC-1 (of 4) TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS NOTICE TO BIDDERS Sealed Bids addressed to the County of Kerr, Texas for: TOWN CREEK CROSSING # 2 BRIDGE IMPROVEMENTS, in accordance with the plans and specifications prepared by Hearn Engineering, Inc. will be accepted and received by the County of Kerr, Texas, in the Office of the County Clerk of Kerr County, 700 Main St., Kerrville, Texas 78028 until S:OOpm. on Friday, May 5, 2006. Any Bid received after closing time will be returned unopened. The Bids shall be publicly opened and read aloud in the County Commissioners Court, Monday, May 8, 2006 at 10:00am. The award will be made Monday, May 22, 2006, at 10:00a.m. in Ken County Commissioners Court. Plans, specifications and other Contract Documents may be examined at the following locations: Hearn Engineering, Inc., (512) 310-0176; F. W. Dodge Room, (512) 458-5692; A G C Plan Room, (512) 442-7887; and AGC of Texas, (512) 478-4691; Kerr County Road & Bridge office (830)257-2993. Copies of plans, specifications and other Contract Documents may be obtained from Hearn Engineering, Inc. for $25.00, non-refundable. -- The County Corrunissioners reserve the right to reject any and all bids, and to waive any and all defects in the bid documents received. NB-1 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 1. INTRODUCTION These Contract Documents include a complete set of bidding and contract forms which are for the convenience of Bidders. Complete all of the included Bid Forms and submit the completed Documents as your Bid. Copies of the Contract Documents may be obtained from the Kerr County Road & Bridge office located at 4010 San Antonio Hwy., Kerrville, TX or Hearn Engineering, Inc. located at 2101 N. Mays, "°` Round Rock, TX upon a payment of $25.00 per set. All pronoun references in these Contract Documents to a particular gender are for convenience only and are to be construed and interpreted as being in the appropriate gender. 2. BID FORM AND SIGNATURE: - All Bids must be submitted on forms supplied by OWNER and shall be subject to all requirements of the Contract Documents. Blank spaces in the Bid must be properly filled in ink. Any unauthorized conditions, limitations, interlineations, or provisions attached to a Bid will be liable to _., render it informal and may cause its rejection. Alterations by erasure or interlineation or other changes in the Bids must be explained or noted in the Bid over the signature of the Bidder. Each Bidder shall include in the Bid the following information: Principals Names Social Security Numbers Home addresses, including City, State & Zip Code - Firm Name Tax ID Number Address City, State & Zip Code If the Bid is made by an individual, it must be signed with the full name of the Bidder, whose address must be given; if it is made by a partnership it must be signed with the partnership name by - members of the partnership, and the name and full addresses of each member must be given; and if it is made by a corporation, it must be signed by a properly authorized officer in the corporate name, properly attested and sealed. Bidders shall properly acknowledge receipt of all addenda in the spaces provided therefor on the bid form. Bid Documents including the Bid, the Bid Security, the Non-Collusion Affidavit, Prohibited Acts Statement, the Statement of Bidder's Qualifications, and a copy of the most recent annual financial statement of each Bidder shall be enclosed in envelopes (outer and inner), both of which shall be sealed IB-1 and clearly labeled with the words "Do not open in mail room. Bid for TOWN CREEK CROSSING # 2 BRIDGE IMPROVEMENTS. To be opened at the County Comnussioner's Court Meeting at 10:00am on Monday, May 22, 2006 and the name of Bidder in order to guard against premature opening of the Bid. The OWNER may consider as irregular any Bid on which there is an alteration of or departure from the Bid form hereto attached and at its option may reject the same. Revised Bids submitted before [he opening of Bids, whether forwarded by mail or telegram, if representing an increase of the original Bid, must have the Bid Bond adjusted accordingly; otherwise, the Bid will not be considered. Bids maybe withdrawn on written or telegraphic request dispatched by the Bidder in time for 4 delivery in the normal course of business up to the time fixed for opening; provided, that written confirmation of any telegraphic withdrawal with the signature of the Bidder is placed in the mail and postmazked prior to the time set for Bid opening. The Bid Bond of any Bidder withdrawing its Bid in accordance with the foregoing conditions will be returned promptly. Bidders are cautioned that, while telegraphic modifications of Bids maybe received as provided above, such modifications, if not explicit and if in any sense subject to misinterpretation, shall make the " Bid so modified or amended, subject to rejection. Bids received prior to the advertised hour of opening will be securely kept and remain sealed. The officer whose duty it is to open them will decide when the specified time has arrived, and no Bid received thereafter will be considered. 3. INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA: No oral interpretation will be made to any Bidder as to the meaning of the Contract Documents ... or any part thereof. Every reauest for an intemretation shall be made in writine to the ENGINEER Anv inquiry received ten or more calendar days prior to the date fixed for openine of Bids will be eiven consideration. Every interpretation made to a bidder will be in the form of an Addendum to [he Contract ,,, Documents, and when issued, will be on file in the office of the ENGINEER at least five calendar days before Bids are opened. In addition, all Addenda will be mailed or delivered to each person [o whom a set of Contract Documents has been furnished, but it shall be the Bidder's responsibility to make inquiry as to the Addenda issued. All such Addenda will become part of the Contract and all Bidders shall be bound by such Addenda, whether or not received by the Bidders. The unit prices for any unit price items in the Bid of each Bidder shall include their prorate share of overhead so that the sum of the products obtained by multiplying the quantity shown for each item by the unit price Bid, together with any lump sum amounts contained in the Bid represents the total Bid. Any Bid not confomung to this requirement may be rejected as informal. Payment to the CONTRACTOR will be made as detemuned by the provision of the General Conditions of the contract documents and as amended by the Supplementary "' Conditions, and it is understood that the quantities may be increased or decreased as provided in the contract documents without in any way invalidating the unit bid prices except as provided in the General Conditions. No alternative Bids will be considered unless a]ternative Bids are specifically requested in the IB-2 .~ CONTRACTOR'S Bid form. 4. BID SECURITY The Bid must be accompanied by a Bid guaranty which shall be a minimum of five percent (5%) of the total bid amount. At the option of the Bidder the guaranty may be a certified check, bank draft, negotiable U.S. Government Bonds (at par value), or a Bid Bond underwritten by a surety authorized to do business in Texas, and satisfactory to OWNER in the form attached. Cash deposits will not be accepted. The Bid guaranty shall ensure furnishing of surety bonds by the successful Bidder and the execution of [he Agreement, all as required by the Contract Documents, within fourteen (14) calendar days following the date of issuance of the Notice of Award. The Bid securities accompanying the Bids maybe retained by the OWNER until the contract is awarded and the successful Bidder furnishes the required bonds and executes the contract, after which they will be returned to the Bidders upon Bidders' written request. Certified checks or bank drafts, or and equivalent thereof, Bid Bonds and negotiable U.S Government bonds of unsuccessful Bidders will be returned as soon as practical after the opening of the Bids upon Bidders' written request. 5. BID OPENING: ,_ At the time and place fixed for the opening of Bids, OWNER will cause to be opened and publicly read aloud every Bid received within the time set for receiving Bids, irrespective of any irregularities therein. Bidders and other persons properly interested may be present, in person or by a representative. 6. CAUSES FOR REJECTION; QUALIFICATION The OWNER reserves the right to reject any and all Bids and to waive any and all informalities and irregularities in bids received whenever such rejection or waiver is in its interest. Bids containing any omission, alteration of form, additions or conditions not called for, incomplete bids or bids otherwise regular which are not accompanied by acceptable bid guaranty will be considered irregular and may be rejected. In any case of ambiguity or lack of clarity in stating the prices in the bid, the OWNER reserves the right to consider the most advantageous construction thereof, or to reject the bid. Unreasonable or unbalanced unit bid prices will be cause to reject any bid. The following are some additional causes which may be considered as sufficient for the disqualification of a Bidder and the rejection of its bid: 1. More than one bid for the same work fTOm an individual, firm, partnership or corporation. 1. Evidence of collusion among bidders. 3. Poor performance in the execution of work under previous contracts, including work as a subcontractor on previous contracts. 4. For being in arrears on existing coutracts, in litigation with an OWNER, or having defaulted on a previous contract. IB-3 The OWNER also reserves the right to determine which Bidder is the lowest, responsible Bidder and to award the Contract on this basis, as well as the right to know how much of the work will be performed with the Bidder's own forces for use in evaluating the bids received. 7. NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT: Each Bid must include the Non-Collusion Affidavit of the Bidder in the form supplied herein. Any Bid not accompanied by or in violation thereof, will not be considered. If the Bidder is a corporation, the affidavit shall be signed by a duly authorized officer of the corporation. Any Bidder making a false affidavit will be subject to criminal prosecution and maybe excluded from future bidding. 8. COUNTY HOLIDAYS: New Years Day Jan. 2, 2006 MLK Day Jan. 16, 2006 Washington's Birthday Feb. 20, 2006 Easter April 14, 2006 '-- Memorial Day May 29, 2006 Independence Day July 4, 2006 Labor Day September 4, 2006 The CONTRACTOR shall be required to observe all County Holidays. No work on the Contract shall be performed by the CONTRACTOR or by any Subcontractor on any of the previously listed days except in cases of extreme emergency and then only with the written permission of the OWNER: If any holiday occurs on Saturday, it will be observed the preceding Friday. If the holiday occurs on ,_ Sunday, it will be observed the following Monday. 9. EXISTING CONDITIONS Each Bidder shall fully acquaint itself with conditions relating to the scope and restrictions attending the execution of the work under the Contract. Bidders shall thoroughly examine and be familiar with [he Specifications. It is also expected that the Bidder will obtain information concerning the conditions at locations that may affect its work. The failure or omission of any Bidder to receive or examine any form, instrument, addendum or other document, or to acquaint itself with existing conditions, shall in no way relieve it of any obligations with ~-- respect to his Proposal or to the Contract. The County shall make all such documents available to the Bidders through the Engineer for review and observation. -- The Bidder shall make its own deternrination as to conditions and shall assume all risk and responsibility and shall complete the work in and under conditions it may encounter or create without extra cost [o the County. The Bidder's attention is directed to the fact that all applicable Federal and State laws, local and municipal ordinances, and the rules and regulations of all authorities having jurisdiction over the work to IB-4 be performed shall apply to the Contract throughout, and they will be deemed to be included in the Contract as though written out in full in the Contract. - l0. INSURANCE: State law requires workers' compensation insurance to be carried covering all persons engaged in ~~ work on this project. CONTRACTOR shall provide acceptable evidence of Workers' Compensation Insurance and Insurance Certificates for General Liability Insurance as required in Section 5.3 of the General Conditions. 11. EXECUTION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: The OWNER shall issue the Notice of Award and provide CONTRACTOR with copies of the OWNER-CONTRACTOR Agreements within ten (10) calendar days following the date of award. The CONTRACTOR shall execute and deliver to the OWNER the Notice of Award, the OWNER-CONTRACTOR Agreements, and required bonds within fourteen (14) calendar days of the date on the Notice of Award. The Administrator of Roads and Bridges shall execute the OWNER-CONTRACTOR Agreements and the OWNER shall return one fully executed agreement to the CONTRACTOR for CONTRACTOR'S use, along with the Notice to Proceed. 12. PERFORMANCE BOND: ""' The CONTRACTOR shall furnish the OWNER with a Performance Bond and Labor and Materials Payment Bond, in accordance with the General Conditions. The CONTRACTOR shall deliver these bonds to the OWNER within fourteen (14) calendar days following OWNER'S issuance of the - Notice of Award. Such bond shall be in the form included in the Contract Documents, shall be underwritten by a surety authorized to do business in Texas, shall bear a date prior to that of the OWNER-CONTRACTOR Agreement and shall extend for a period of one year beyond the date of the - written acceptance of the work by OWNER to cover the Correction Period as set forth in the Contract Documents. The current power of attorney for the person who signs for any surety company shall be attached to each of the bonds. The bonds shall be with a surety satisfactory to OWNER. - The failure of the successful Bidder to supply the required bonds in a form approved by OWNER, or failure to execute the OWNER-CONTRACTOR Agreement or other documents required by ,_ the Contract Documents within the time period set forth herein above, or within such extended period as the OWNER may grant based upon reasons detennined'sufficient by the OWNER, shall constitute a default, and the OWNER may either award the Contract to the next lowest responsible Bidder or readvertise for Bids, and may charge against the defaulting Bidder the difference between the amount of - the Bid and the amount for which a Contract for the work is subsequently executed, irrespective of whether the amount thus due exceeds the amount of the Bid security, or, a[ the option of OWNER, the defaulting Bidder shall forfeit its Bid security as liquidated damages. If a more favorable Bid is received ~- by readvertising, the defaulting Bidder shall have no claim against the OWNER for a refund. A performance and payment bond may be provided for the entire Work and projected contract term, or a separate performance and a separate payment bond may be provided annually for the Work to be performed in that year. "' 13. MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS: All incidental work or material required to complete the items specified shall be included in the IB-5 Bid or furnished at no added cost to the OWNER. Insofar as practical, the CONTRACTOR will be expected to give preference to the employment of local labor. Attention of Bidders is particularly called to the requirement for ensuring that employees and applicants for employment are not discriminated against because of their race, religion, national origin, -- sex, color, or age and that qualified persons are not discriminated against in employment practices because of disabilities. _. Attention of Bidders is also particularly called to the provisions of the General Conditions requiring the CONTRACTOR to furnish an unqualified affidavit that all subcontractors, material suppliers, and claims have been fully paid prior to CONTRACTOR receiving final payment. r The County of Kerr is governed by the provisions of the Public Information Act, Chapter 552 of the Texas Government Code. All information submitted by prospective bidders during the bidding process is subject to release under this Act. The CONTRACTOR shall start work not more than ten (10) calendar days after receipt of a _ Notice To Proceed and shall fully complete all work within the number of calendar days stated in the Bid. Failure of the CONTRACTOR to complete the Project within the time established in these Contract Documents shall subject the CONTRACTOR to the payment of liquidated damages. The reckoning of time for completion will commence on and include the day following the date established in the Notice '~ To Proceed issued by OWNER to CONTRACTOR. Bids. No Bid maybe withdrawn by the Bidder until forty-five (45) calendar days afrer the opening of In case of a difference in written words and figures in a Bid, the amount stated in written words -- shall govern. IB-6 BID PROPOSAL County Judge Proposal of Allen Keller Company Pat Tinley P.O. Box 393 700 Main St. Fredericksburg, Tx, 78624 Kerr County Courthouse Tax ID Number 74-2995196 Kerrville, TX 78028 To Mr.Tinley: The undersigned, in comp liance with your Notice To Bidders for the Town Creek Crossing # 2 Bridge Improvements, hereby proposes to complete the work for the unit prices for work in place for the following items and quantities: SCHEDULE: Item Es[. Unit Total ~-- No. Qty. Unit Description Price Bid 1 155 CY Excavation for Roadway and Channel -- com ete in place Lu,ewJ7"~ " D h P ~ dollars and , O cents per CY. _ , /~~ ~~_ G' C 2 91 CY Embanlanent, Type A complete in place _ Fc~ i ree_ ~" dollars and ~ cents per CY. ~.~. l~~ , ~~ 3 588 SY Furnish and install 1 1/z" HMAC Pavement including sub grade preparation and base com lete ' n place ~D~ _ Ly~ dollars and p cents per SY. ~~-~ ~ IA, ~ 4 38 LF Fumish and install Concrete Box Culvert, 6'x 3' cast in pla ~~L)2A1 F~F~ , _. dollars and L^ cents per LF. 7.5~; ©~ ~L1~s, ® ~ BP-1 5 2 EA Furnish and install Concrete Headwall and W~gwall, com lete in place even ~®vr -- dollars and ~ cents per EA. ~~y !.~ r~~. ~~ _1~~(',~, O~ 6 889 SY Revegitation with Broadcast seeding (Perm), -m Rural ,Clay soil complete in place ir1l~ dollars and __ ~ o cents per SY. Z,Ob f~gDC7 7 3 EA Installation of signs (Wl-1L, Wl-1R with advisory speed plate), including support, .__ compl~te in plac _ /'/ V d r dollars and _ ~ cents per EA.. .~DD.v~ ~ soQ, 00 °' 8 5 EA Installation of signs (WI-8 left and right, both sides of post), including support, complecse in pla e ~ ,_ UiY i~2 `/V2 dollars and -cents per EA.. , ~r[~ ~j.j (1L~, ®~ „.. 9 2 EA Installation of staff gauge as shown on pl comple in p1~ce u~ ~uKelv~~ dollars and _ ~ cents per EA.. ,sd ~ ~a 6~d~ L'~Ca TOTAL PROJECT BgID PRICE: /~ The Sum of _~~J1~TC1 ~(9Y~fe~IOuSGc~ ~Y! ~ /7LH~b- ~, ~~y~ '~+~rS dollars and _ cents. $ 81. ly Z ~oo BP-2 The unit and lump sum prices shown shall include all labor, materials, overhead, profit, insurance, etc. to cover the finished work as indicated. It is the intent that the items listed in the CONTRACTOR'S Bid Form shall constitute the items of work which will be measured for payment. However, all other specified items contained in the Technical Specifications or in the other contract documents and any and all work incidental to any specifically-required items and any work which may be reasonably inferred from the contract documents ~- shall be performed and is required to be performed by the CONTRACTOR at no additional cost to OWNER. m Bidder acknowledges receipt of the following addendum (addenda): The Bidder will perform ~% of the work with its own forces. This information is provided to the OWNER for its use in evaluating this bid. Substantial Completion of the Work shall be within ninety (90) calendaz days of the Work Commencement Date. Final completion of the Work shall be accomplished as soon as commercially practicable after Substantial Completion. OWNER and CONTRACTOR recognize that time is of the essence in this Agreement and the OWNER will suffer financial loss if the Work is not substantially complete within the time specified above, plus any extensions thereof allowed in accordance with Article 12 of the General Conditions. They also "' recognize the delays, expense and difficulties involved in proving in a legal proceeding the actual loss suffered by OWNER if the Work is not substantially complete on time. Accordingly, instead of requiring any such proof, OWNER and CONTRACTOR agree that as liquidated damages for delay (but not as a penalty) CONTRACTOR shall pay OWNER Five Hundred Dollazs ($500.00) for each day that expires after the time specified above for substantial completion, until the Work is substantially complete. _- Upon receipt of written notice of the award of this Bid, the Bidder will immediately enter into an agreement with OWNER in the form included in the Contract Documents and as specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents and will submit and furnish approved bonds and other documents required by the Contract Documents. The undersigned Bidder also agrees to provide all services within the contract time as specified. Bidder understands and accepts the provisions of the Contract Documents relating to liquidated damages in the event of failure to complete the work on time. Enclosed with this Bid are (1) Bid Security, (2) Non-Collusion Affidavit, (3) Prohibited Acts Statement, (4) Statement of Bidder's Qualifications, (5) Most recent Annual Financial Statement, and, (6) Certificates of Insurance as required, all in accordance with the Instructions to Bidders. In submitting this bid, the undersigned Bidder represents that it: 1) has examined, read and understands the Contract Documents; 2) is familiar with the nature and extent of the Contract Documents, the site, and all local conditions and laws and regulations that in any manner may affect cost, progress, or performance of the work; and 3) has given ENGINEER written notice of all conflicts, omissions, errors or discrepancies discovered in the Contract Documents and the written response or resolution thereof by ENGINEER is acceptable to BP-3 the Bidder. -- Bidder certifies that it is familiar with the statutory obligation to provide workers' compensation insurance coverage for all employees engaged in work on the Project, and further certifies that, if awazded the Contract, Bidder will maintain this coverage in full force and effect for all of its employees -- engaged in work on this Project, and will require this coverage to be provided by all subcontractors engaged in work on the Project, and will provide certificates of insurance for all coverages to the OWNER. The undersigned Bidder certifies that the bid prices contained in this Bid: (1) have been carefully checked and aze submitted as correct and final; (2) are bid as good and valid for forty-five (45) days from the date bids are opened. The undersigned Bidder acknowledges that time is of the essence and that OWNER will be damaged if -.. the Project is not completed timely and in accordance with the Contract Documents. NOTE: Unit and lump sum prices must be shown in words and figures for each item in this Bid, and in ,_ the event of discrepancy, the words shall control. Respectfully submitted, ._ A~l~h X 11 ~- d~~ ~ti~; Name of individ r entity S' ure /~ ~~T ~l /~ E/~E F' Printed Name J ~Y~t.s~d tv~'~ Title Attest: Printed Name ~ (SEALS) (IF CORPORATION) BP-4 I.C.W. GROUP ® INSURANCE COMPANY OF THE WEST ^ EXPLORER INSURANCE COMPANY '° ^ INDEPENDENCE CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY 11455 EL CAMINO REAL, SAN DIEGO, CA 92130-2045 P.O. BOX 85563, SAN DIEGO, CA 92186-5563 (858) 350-2400 FAX (858) 350-2707 -~- www.icwgroup.com BID OR PROPOSAL BOND KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That we, Allen Keller Companv. P.O. Box 393, Fredericksburg. Texas, (hereinafter called the Principal), and Insurance Company of the West, a corporation organized and doing business under and by virtue of the laws of the State of California, and duly licensed for the purpose of making, guazanteeing or becoming sole surety upon bonds or undertakings required or authorized by the laws of the State of Texas, as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto Kerr County. Texas (hereinafter called the obligee) in the just and full sum of Five Percent (5%1 of Maximum Amount Bid Dollazs ($ ~ lawfill money of the United States of America, for the payment of which, well and truly to be made, we „~ hereby bind ourselves and our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. ._ THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH THAT WHEREAS, the above bounden Principal as aforesaid, is about to hand in and submit to the obligee a bid or proposal dated MaY 5, 2006 for Bridee hnprovements in accordance with the plans and specifications filed in the office of the obligee and under the notice inviting proposals therefor. NOW, THEREFORE, if the bid or proposal of said principal shall be accepted, and the contract for such work be awarded to the principal thereupon by the said obligee, and said principal shall enter into a contract and bond for the completion of said work as required by law, then this obligation to be null and void, otherwise to be and remain in full force and effect. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, said principal and said Surety have caused these presents to be duly signed and sealed this 5th day of Mav 2006. Allen Keller Company By: Insurance Company of the West By Jamie Harris Attorney-In-Fact Tx-tcw t9s (sioo> No. 0004655 ICW GROUP Power of Attorney Insurance Company of the W est Explorer Insurance Company Independence Casualty and Surety Company KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That Insurance Company of the West, a Corporation duly organized minder the laws of the State of California, Explorer Insurance Company, a Corporation duly organized under the laws of dine State of California, and Independence Casualty and Surety Company, a Corpomtion duly organized under Ste laws of the State of Texas, (collectively referred to as the "Companies', do hereby appoint .t JAMIE HARRIS, BII.LY RAY JINKS, DONALD N. JORDAN, GREG LEJUNE, RICHARD WAGNER, RYAN RAILSBACK their true and lawful Attorney(s)-in-Fact with authority to date, execute, sign, seat, and deliver on behalf of the Companies, fidelity and surety bonds, undertakings, and other similaz contracts of suretyship, azid any related documents. Tn witness whereof the Companies have caused these presents to be executed by its duly authorized officers this 1st day of November, 2005. ''~ `'~.~ pyTr- , pOMMANY ~~sO~tN~ a;, o ~Oa~ INSURANCE COMPANY OF THE WEST p Ff ~~Q•~PeRq\F'+' t35 j ~ponraMrep a m o° Tmo}1 cq v. -1 ~ EXPLORER INSURANCE COMPANY _ O z (i o~ SEAL _s 1~ 'a r > INDEPENDENCE CASUALTY AND SURETY z roxni r,+~'' tl o\'p ~ s•abI? ° a ~` COMPANY ~~ ?~ ~U Je%ey D. Sweeney, Assistant Secretary State of California tt County of San Diego S ss. ~~~ Jolm L. Hannum, Ezecutive Vice President On November 1, 2005, before me, Francis Fafaul, Notary Public, personally appeared John L. Hannum and Jeffrey D. Sweeney, personally known m me to be the persons whose names are subscribed to the within instmment, and acknowledged to me that they executed the same in rhea authorized capacities, and that by their signatures on the instmment, the entity upon behalf ofwhich the persons acted, executed the instrument. FRANCIS FAFAUL ~~~iii COMM. #11471794 I~o7nRr RIBUC-CN.IFOF91u1 SAN DIEGO 000N'1Y MPEBR . W imess my hand and o%cial seal. Cj~~~~~ Francis Fafaul, Notary Public RESOLUTIONS This Power of Attorney is Granted and is signed, sealed and notazized with facsimile signatures and seals under au5motity of the following resolutions adopted by the respective Boazds of Directors of each of the Companies: "RESOLVED: Tlrat the President, an Executive or Senior Vice President of the Company, together with the Secretary or any Assistant Secretary, aze hereby authorized to execute Powers of Attorney appointing the person(s) named as Attorney(s)-in-Fact to date, execute, sign, seal, and deliver on behalf of the Company, fidelity and surety bonds, undertakings, and other similaz contracts of suretyship, and any related documents. RESOLVED FURTHER: That the signatures of the officers tnaking the appointment, and the signature of any officer certifying the validity and current stains of the appointment, may be facsimile representa5ons of those signatures; and the signature and seal of any notary, and the seal of the Compang may be facsimile representations of those signatures and seals, and such facsimile representations shall have the same force and effect as if marmally affixed. The facsimile representations refereed to herein may be affixed by stamping, printing, typing, or photocopying." CERTIFICATE C the undersigned, Assistant Secretazy of Insurance Company of the West, Explorer Insurance Company, and Independence Casualty and Surety Company, do hereby certify that the foregoing Power of Attorney is in full force and effect, and has not been revoked, and that the above resolutions were duly adopted by the respective Boazds ofDirectors ofthe Companies, and ar~e/now in full force. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, I have set, my hand this y~ ~' day of _, ~O l0 . ~~ Jeffrey D. Sweeney, Assistant Secretary To verify the authenticity of this Power of Attorney you may call 1-800-877-] 111 and ask for the Surety Division. Please refer to the Power of Attorney Number, the above named individual(s) and details of the bond to wltich the power is attached. For information or Sling clainvs, please contact Surety Claims, ICW Group, 11455 El Camhio Real, San Diego, CA 92130-2045 or cal] (858) 350~~2400. NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT STATE OF e 5 COUNTY OF ~-~"s'~-`~ Xe~ ~~ KQ J~Q ~ ,being first duly sworn, deposes and says that: ,._ 1. (,SjHe is fully informed respecting the preparation and contents of the attached Bid and of all pertinent circumstances respecting such Bid; 2. Such bid is genuine and is not a collusive or sham Bid; 3. Neither the Bidder nor anyone acting on behalf of the Bidder, including this affiant, has in any way colluded, conspired, connived or agreed, directly or indirectly with any other Bidder, firm or person to ~"- submit a collusive or sham Bid in connection with the Contract for which the attached bid has been submitted or to refrain from bidding in connection with such Contract, or has in any manner, directly or indirectly, sought by agreement or collusion or communication or conference with any other Bidder, firm "~ or person to fix the price or prices in the attached Bid or of any other Bidder, or to fix any overhead, profit or cost element of the Bid price or the Bid price of any other Bidder, or to secure through any collusion, conspiracy, connivance or unlawful agreement any advantage against the County of Kerr, Texas or any person interested in the proposed Contract; and, 4. The price or prices quoted in the attached Bid aze fair and proper and are not tainted by any collusion, }, conspiracy, connivance or unlawful agreement on the part of the 'dder or an ne acting on its behalf. S~ e p ~i`ei~ ke~jer - / res~~ea~ Title/Printed Name Subscribed and Sworn to before me this _Jr~ day of ~ti~., ___, 20 Ofo . ~r JA1dES 6f. BRAHBEkBERGER )\ ~~~ * * Notary Pwtalk ~ J~/'V_"VIYM-pr~~.c.,_ Notary Sta ~~ STATE OF TEXAS N public, State of Teuc~ MY Comm. Exp. 04/14/200B NC-1 PROHIBITED ACTS STATEMENT STATE OF ~e;~ s W COUNTY OF !~- '~i.p .. I hereby affurn that I am awaze of the provisions of the Texas Penal Code Sections 36.02, 36.08, 36.09, and 36.10, dealing with Bribery and Gifts to Public Servants. I further affirm that I will adhere to such rules and instruct and require all agents, employees, and subcontractors to do the same. I am further aware that any violation of these rules subjects this agreement to termination, my removal from bid lists, prohibiting future contract/subcontract work, revocation of permits, and prosecution. Attest (if corporation) Date PA-1 STATEMENT OF BIDDER'S QUALIFICATIONS _ All questions must be answered and the data given must be clear and comprehensive. This statement must be notarized. If necessary, questions maybe answered on sepazate attached sheets. The .- Bidder may submit any additional information it desires. 1. Names of Bidder: Allen Keller Co I, LLC dba Allen Keller Company 2. A permanent main office address: ~ ~ ~~ ~~ re u ~ t,ay t ~ c~„rt, , Fredericksburg, Tx 78624 rM 'i' g - v,p Bos 343 FrA,ror;~ti~~,,,,-o TX vstF24) 3. Date organized: Allen Keller Co I, LLC -January ] 8, 2001 „~, Allen Keller Company - 1946 N/A 4. If a corporation, where and when incorporated: ._ 5. Do you operate under an assumed names?). If so please list. 6. How many yeazs engaged in the contracting business under present firm or trade name? Give former names of firm or trade names, with dates of operation under each: Allen Keller Co I LLC - 4 nears Allen Keller Company - 55 years 7. Generalchazacterofworkperformedbyyourcompany: re.,P al Con arro s - eet ~3$5~3~ h d'c'c'~ d~a G a d' a'rger tc 8. Have you ever failed to complete any work awarded to you? If so, where and why. Give name of OWNER and ENGINEER: No 9. Have you ever defaulted on a contract? If so, where and why. Give name of OWNER and ENGINEER: No -- 10. Evidence that the firm has a minimum of two years experience in the construction of similar type projects (list project name, contact name, and telephone number: Real County - RM 337 Lewis Nowlin, Texas Department of Transportation 325 446-2413 11. List the names of all OWNERS for whom you/your business have/has provided service (in excess of •-. $50,000.00) within the preceding 24 months: Texas Department of Transportation, Texas Department of Transportation ~ Aviation Division, Rick Hoerster BQ-1 12. Background and experience of the principal members of your organization, including the officers: Keith A. Keller - 48 years experience -- Kory A. Keller - 9 years experience 13. Have you ever been terminated by the OWNER of a prof ect? If so, where and why? Give name of OWNER: No 14. List any enforcement actions taken against fum or principals by the State of Texas within the last five years: None I5. List any lifigation in the State of Texas that the firm has been involved in during the preceding five ,~ years: None 16. Give bank references: Security State Bank & Trust P.0. Box 471 __ F~edericYsburg, Tx ?R.61i 830, 997-7575 '~ 17. Will you, upon request, fill out a detailed financial statement and furnish any other pertinent information that may be required by the County of Kerr, Texas? Yes "' 18. The County of Kerr may require additional information proving that your firm has the experience, managerial support, staff, equipment, and financial resources to adequately provide the services required under this Agreement. 19. The undersigned hereby authorizes and requests any persons, firms or corporations to furnish any infonmation requested by the County of Kerr, Texas, in verification of the recitals comprising this ~°- Statement of Bidder's Qualifications. BQ-2 r Dated on this s~ day of~___, 12j0 ~('o /j Al/en ~e(/er r as CONTRACTOR v. Title: ~terrd%ex_1 State of ~Q~ca s ~~ County of ~~; ~'~ese;~ ~- "~ b %}~g dul sworn deposes and says that he/she is hts; a of 2n ica_ll er ~~w+'IA x u and that the answers to the foregoing questions and all statements therein contained aze true an correct. Subscribed and Sworn to before me this .~~ day of ~rr c c~_, 20~. sar~'~~ JADES !d. BRAftDE~BE6GEft ~ * Notary P~Qe n srarE of Texas SYi~ {~9 ~" r~or ~ 04/14~2N6 Nary Public, State of ~e~ c BQ-3 Texas Department of Transportation ~° DEWITT C. GREEK STATE HIGHWAY BLDG. • 125 E. 11TH STREET • AUSTIN, TEXAS 78701-2483 • (512) 463-6585 __ January 3, 2006 Allen Keller Company -- P.O. Box 393 Fredericksburg, Texas 78624 Dear Contractor: Your prequalification statement as of September 30, 2005 is satisfactory and qualifies you to bid on all classes of Texas Department of Transportation work through September 30, 2006. Your bidding capacity has been set at $41,589,000.00. You may request and receive bidding proposals for projects on which the engineer's estimate does not exceed this amount, less any uncompleted work under contract. If we may be of further assistance, please contact us at 512-416-2540. Sincerely, Frank Huerta, III Prequalification and Proposal Issuance Construction Division TxDOT Vendor Code #: 10549 An Equal Opportunity Employer County of Kerr -, 4010 San Antonio Hwy Kerrville , TX 78028 STATE OF TEXAS COUNTY OF KERB NOTICE OF AWARD THIS CONTRACT AWARD made this 22" d day of May 2006 by the COUNTY OF KERB, hereinafter called the OWNER, Allen Keller Company.. hereinafter called the CONTRACTOR, is for the completion of a certain project described as: THE TOWN CREEK CROSSING # 2 BRIDGE IMPROVEMENTS, the use and benefit of OWNER as described in the specifications as prepazed by Hearn Engineering, Inc. The consideration to be paid by the OWNER to the CONTRACTOR for completion of the Project in accordance with the contract documents. OWNER: COUNTY OF KERB Aclmowledgment of Receipt Awazd by CONTRACTOR: J~~LLdL41CG~(f., V -)y'~//IN N- Title Printed Name DATE: ~ z ~ /d ~ NW-1 OWNER-CONTRACTOR AGREEMENT STATE OF TEXAS COUNTY OF KERB This Agreement made this ~ day of ~r~ n z , 2006, by and between The County of Kerr, Kerrville Texas, acting through its County Judge, Pat Tinley, hereinafter "OWNER," and ~~~en ~.e l~e C^ ~ ~~N _,acting through its , hereinafterinafter "CO TRACTC~t," WITNESSETH: That for and in consideration of the payments and agreements hereinafter mentioned, to be made and performed by OWNER, and under the conditions expressed in the Performance Bond included within the Contract Documents, CONTRACTOR hereby agrees with OWNER as follows: I. CONTRACTOR shall commence and complete the work in connection with and incidental to TOWN CREEK CROSSING # 2 BRIDGE IMPROVEMENTS, in accordance with the Contract Documents. II. OWNER agrees to pay CONTRACTOR for the satisfactory performance of the Agreement in --~ current funds in accordance with the prices stated in the CONTRACTOR'S Bid and the Notice of Award and at the times and in accordance with the payment procedures stated in the General and Supplementary Conditions of the Contract. Should any conflict exist between the CONTRACTOR'S Bid and the Notice of Award, the total reflected in the Notice of Award shall govern; however, the unit prices, if any, reflected in the CONTRACTOR'S Bid shall not be nullified but shall remain applicable to this Contract in case of subsequent quantity adjustments for work items. III. The executed contract documents shall consist of the following: This Agreement "' Addenda Modifications Instructions To Bidders •- Notice To Bidders Performance Bond Notice of Award OC-1 ` CONTRACTOR'S Bid, Bid Security, Non-Collusion Affidavit, Prohibited Acts Statement, Statement of Bidder's Qualifications, Insurance Certificates and any and all financial statements required by the Contract Documents Supplementary Conditions General Requirements General Conditions Provisions of teclurical society specifications and manuals referenced in the Technical Specifications Special Provisions (if any) Notice To Contractor of Tax Exempt Status of Owner Notice To Proceed Appendices (if any) This Agreement, together with the other documents enumerated in Article III, which said other documents are as fully a par[ of the Contract as if hereto attached or herein repeated, forms the Contract between the parties hereto. IV. CONTRACTOR hereby agrees to complete services within the specified time. The parties hereto -- acknowledge that time is of the essence of this Agreement and that OWNER will be damaged unless CONTRACTOR completes this project timely and in accordance with the Contract Documents. CONTRACTOR hereby certifies that it provides workers' compensation insurance coverage for all employees of the CONTRACTOR to be employed on the Project. OC-2 V. The OWNER and the CONTRACTOR, respectively, bind themselves, their partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives to the other party to this Agreement and to the partners, successors, assigns and ,._ legal representatives of such other party with respect to all covenants of this Agreement. Neither the OWNER nor the CONTRACTOR shall assign, sublet or transfer any interest in this Agreement without the written consent of the other. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have caused this Agreement to be executed in original copies on the day and in the year first written above. OWNER: The County of Kerr, Texas ~/ ~ f ~. C~-~ r~L Attest. ~ ti Co ty Secretary ~'` Id9" ~ ] C~c ge ~ Mr. Pat Tinley CONTRACTOR: BY~ -- NTI~I QC 1 's Signature eiTn Ie CONTR!jCTOR's Printed Name ~res ~~f s ~~'~" CONTRACTOR'S Title OC-3 PERFORMANCE BOND STATE OF J~ K c1 S f x?9~I~ # '~ ~ ~ 3~l COUNTY OF C, ~I~sniy T KNOW ALL PER ONS~~ THESE PRESENTS: That T! /~r' h ~ ~1 F r ~o ~n a~~_, of the City of F , ~- -~ ufc ,County of cs ,and St ~te of ~g~ S , as y PRINCIPAL, and as SURETY, authorized to do business in TEXAS, are held nil firmly ~o d_ tqq t~h~ UNTY OF KERB, as OWNER, in the penal sum o -6~ rwe ::c.,~ ~ ~ r 7 LLARS ($ ~/ Z.O ~ for the payment whereof, the said Principal and Surety bind themselves y and t eir heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, by these presents: WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written Contract with the OWNER dated the ~s`~" day of ~~.,.a- , 20 c3 ~ ,for the TOWN CREEK CROSSING # 2 BRIDGE IMPROVEMENTS, which Contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein. NOW, THEREFORE, the condition of this obligation is such, Chat if the Principal shall faithfully and promptly perform the Contract and shall in all respects duly, faithfully and promptly observe and perform all and singular the covenants, conditions and agreements in the Contract agreed and covenanted by the Principal to be observed and performed, and according to the true intent and meaning of the Contract and the plans and specifications and other Contract Documents hereto annexed, then this obligation shall be satisfied, otherwise to remain in full force and effect; Provide however, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Chapter 2253 of the Texas Government Code and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions thereof to the same extent as if it were copies at length herein. Whenever Principal is declared by OWNER to be in default under the Contract, the Surety may promptly remedy the default, or shall faithfully and promptly perform and complete the Contract in accordance with its terms and conditions. Surety, for value received, stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Contract, or to the work performed thereunder, or the plans, specifications, drawings or other Contract Documents accompanying the same, shall in anyway affect its obligation on this bond, and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration or addition. PROVIDED, that if any legal action be filed upon this bond, venue shall lie in Ken County, State of Texas. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Principal and Surety have signed and sealed this instrument this 51" day of _~i,rp ,~0 yV PB-1 ._ ,~//en ~CPI~~. ~v~nG.,~.-, rndP~ndF~tcP CtiSu~/~v~~ Sum-~ly Q~rn~XrA(/~ Principal Surety )~~ ~ ~ J By: }~ I LL f By: 1l~iysw~ 14"4/JTfw•Y Title: /~ a; ~/. /~~~'Fr - ~+r's 1CI c.~~- Title: f} ROf /1 f tl~f i~ ~! TGC Addres~: ., G? . o- 3 3 Address: GATTO & CATTO, LLP r-~ •,;:_ s u.-. e k 5 T HOUSTON ST., SUITE 100 E L SAN ANTONIO, T ~~~ ~loaaa~al~~ (SEAL) (SEAL) ' ~- The name and address of the Resident Agent of Surety is: NOTE: ATTACH ORIGINAL POWER OF ATTORNEY FOR THE SURETY'S REPRESENTATIVE TO THIS BOND. PB-2 PAYMENT BOND ~r~ '~ a l'~ 3 ~ /~ STATE OF ~ eyt~ S COUNTY OF C ~ ~~.a sp i p -~ ~.+. n , (CONTRACTOR'S name), of , a~ pri' ~~r~ (Address), w os , County, as PRINCIPAL, and ._ ~~ UP ' as S TY, authorized to do business in TEXAS, are hel and f y ouj~d nto he~COiR TY O K as OWNER, in the penal sum of E,S~ ~h~ /~>,~ L„o }/,;,,!(„~ ~: ~ =T~~ DOLLARS ($~ ~/ Z . L~ O )for the payment of which the said Principal and Surety bind themselves and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, by this bond. The Principal has entered into a Contract with the Owner dated for the construction of THE TOWN CREEK CROSSING # 2 BRIDGE IMPROVEMENTS, which is fully incorporated into this bond by reference. ` The condition of this obligation is that if the Principal pays all persons who supply public work labor or material for the Project, then this obligation will be satisfied; otherwise this bond will remain in full force and effect. This bond is provided under the provisions of Chapter ?253 of the Texas Government Code, as amended and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of that .-. statute to the same extent as if it were copied at length in this document. The Surety, for value received, stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Contract, or the plans, specifications, drawings or other Contract Documents, or to the work performed under the Contract Documents, shall in any way affect its obligation on this bond, and the Surety waives notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration or addition. The Surety certifies that it is authorized and admitted to write surety bonds in Texas. If this bond exceeds $100,000.00 the surety certifies that it either 1) holds a certificate of authority from the United States Secretary of the Treasury to qualify as a surety on obligations permitted or required under federal law, or 2) has obtained qualified reinsurance for any liability in excess of $100,000.00 from a reinsurer that is authorized and admitted as a reinsurer in the State of Texas, and is the holder of a certificate of "- authority from the united States Secretary of the Treasury to quality as a surety or reinsurer on obligations permitted or required under federal law. "" Mandatory venue for any legal action filed upon this bond is in Kerr County, Texas. PT-1 Executed and sealed by the Principal and Surety on --.T6 n ~. / ,20~_ ~Tndrn~l~dPn(P UaSUG l~t~ ~ Sure-F~j ~ver~ngp~ J T .r By: ~ t 1~`OJ~ rn~'c' pis Title: R arnP -r`n~-~+~ CAT"f & CATTO, LLP Address: 217 EAST NO!_~3TON ST SUITE 100 SAN ANTONIO, TEXA5 78205.1801 Telephone Number: ~(0 o)da d Ila I Facsimile Number: ~/~~ ,~ „/ (SEAL) The name and address of the Resident Agent of Surety is: (SEAL) ~ ~_ NOTE ATTACH ORIGINAL POWER OF ATTORNEY FOR THE SURETY'S REPRESENTATIVE TO THIS BOND. PT-? A_ddr ss: ~ _~c 3~3 h ~F ~ ~vrc ~;. . ~cz NOTICE TO CONTRACTOR OF TAX EXEMPT STATUS OF OWNER ~- This contract is for improvements to realty for a governmental entity exempt from the payment of state and local sales, excise and use taxes under section 151.309 of the Texas Tax Code. Items sold, leased or rented to, or stored, used or consumed by the County of Kerr are exempted from state and local sales, excise and use taxes. In the event that any sales, excise and use tax applies to the CONTRACTOR'S performance under this contract, the CONTRACTOR is solely responsible for payment of the tax. TX-1 No. 0004655 ICW CROUP ~~nQ -f'(- IX~I~~urAO Power of Attorney u Insurance Company of the W eat Explorer Insurance Company Independence Casualty and Surety Cumpany KNOW ALL MEN BS 'THESE PRESENTS: That Insurance C'ompanv of the West, a C'.orporatiou duly organized under the laws of the State of Califomia, Explorer Insurance Company, a Corporation duly organized tinder the laws of the ,State of Califomia, and hrdeperrdence Casualty aztd Surety Cumpany, a Corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Texas, tcollectively referred to xs the "Companies"), du hereby appoint JAMIE ILA I2R IS, BILLY RAY' JIN 1{S, DONALD N. JORDA 9, CREC LEJUNR, RICHARD N'ACh ER, RYAN RAILSBACK their tine and Lawful Afiume~y(s)-in-Fact with auileority to date, execute, sign, seal, and deliver on hehalfof Hre Compwies, fidelity and surety bonds, undertakings, and other similar contracts of snretyshiq and any related documents'. In witness whorco r; the Companies have caused these presents to be executed by its duly authorized officers this 1st day of November, 20(15. 4poapxxyoA i ~ ~cOPrOMlF~ f b+xcx r, ofi ~4xoMN ~? pp ua.tr~ ~~ o „SEAL'; a °1~'^'oxwr8 sfx° ~~~ly 'r°.~o~yrr ,N,O I Vml ~k .BG~ I _>f_ - 1 ~tic...lL ~'u-.O __ i INSURANCE COMPANY OF TI{E WEST EXPLORER INSURANCE COMPANY INDEPENDENCE CASUALTY AND SURETV C'OMPAN'Y leffi ey D Sweaiey, Assrstant $ecreC+ry State of Califomia I ss. County of San Diego John L. liarmum, Executive Vice President (ht November I, 5005, before me, Francis Fafaul, Notary Public, personally appeared John L Hamuun and Jeffiey D. Sweeney, personally knower to me to be the persons whose names are subscribed to the within matnurrent and acknowledged to me that they executed the same in Chair authorized capacities, and that by then yignahires on the instmment the entity upon behalf ofwhich the persons acted, execaied the instmment. W lhreSS my hand and official seal. PRANGS FAFAUL GJMM.IR1471 ~ (~~~~0 ii y~S~M~1 DIE~IC-C lJ FEB~RIlAR9a Frances Fafaul, Notary Public RESOLU'ITONS This Power of Attumey is granted and is 5igued, sealed and notarized with facsimile signatures and seals tinder authority o(the following resolutions adopted by the respective Bomds oC Directors of sash of the Companies: "RESOLVED: 'that the President, an Executive or Senior Vice President of the Company, together with the Secretary or any Assistant Secretary, are hereby authorized w execute Powers of Attorney appointing the person(s) named as Attorney) sl-in-Pact to date, execute, sigr, seal, and dehvrr on behalf of the Company, fidelity and surety bonds, undertakings, and other mnnlar comracts of suretyshiq and any related documents. RESOLVED FURTHER: That the signatures of the otTcers making the appointment, and the atignafine of any officer certifying the validiTy and current stamp of the appointment may be tacmmile reprevantshons' ofthose signatures; and the signature and seal of mry notary, and the seal of the Clrnnpmry, n+ay be tbcsimile represerr[atinns ofthose signatures and seals, and such facsimile representations shall have the score force and effect as rf manually affixecL The facsemde representations referred to herein may be affixed by stamping, printing, typing, or photocopying." CERTIFICATE 1, the undersigned, Assrstant Secretary of hesurance Company of the West, Explorer Insurance Company, and Independence Casualty and Surety Company, ~do hereby certify that the foregoing Power of Attumey is in frill force and effect, and has nut been revoked, and that the above resplutimrs were drily adopted by flee respective Boards of Directors of the Companies, and are now in fiell force. - IN W 1TNESS W HERE!)F, 1 have set my hand this ~ day of JU n ~ _ r~~~. (\ Jeffrey D. Sweeney, Assrstant Secretary To verify the authenticiry of this Power of Attumey you Wray call 1-7100-3t79-1111 and ask fur the Surety Division. Please refer to the Power of Attorney Number, the above named individuals s) and details of the bond to which the power is attached_ Fu; information or filing alarms, please contact Surety Claims, ICW Group, L745S EI Camino Real, San Diegq CA 92130-2045 or call (858) i_'+0 ?400. NOTICE TO PROCEED TO: Allen Keller Company DATE: i'`I '1pt~ P.O. Box 393 Fredericksburg, Texas 78624 `° PROJECT: TOWN CREEK CROSSING # 2 BRIDGE IMPROVEMENTS You are hereby notified to commence work in accordance with the Agreement dated 1 'ZL~ ,not more than ten (10) calendaz days after your rec ipt of this Notice To ceed issued by the OWNER. Contract Time will begin to run on ~~~_~.~'~~_S ~~Y_oo (10 calendaz days after this notice is issued). Work initiated in a budget year musfbe compl~ m;n;m~ of 21 calendaz days prior to the end of that budget year. Failure of the CONTRACTOR to complete the Project within the time established in these Contract Documents shall subject the CONTRACTOR to the payment of liquidated damages The CONTRACTOR is reminded of its obligation under State law to file a certificate of workers' compensation insurance with the COUNTY for each SUBCONTRACTOR to perforni " work at the Project site prior to commencement of work by the SUBCONTRACTOR. COUNTY OF ACCEPTANCE OF NOTICE: Receipt of the above NOTICE TO PROCEED is hereby acknowledged by: Allen Keller Comnanv " this t'± da/y of ~UIJe ,20 UG ~" (Signature) /Cc~2u f-1 ~~FIIC-~2 (Printe--__ d nan?e)~ . "` U/CE f~(1 S~t7~,yf (Title) BY: Mr. Leonaz~m Jr. NP-1 TABLE OF CONTENTS OF GENERAL CONDITIONS Article Number Title Page 1. Definitions ......................................................... ... 1 2. Preliminary Matters .................................................. ... 3 3. Contract Documents: Intent, Amending and Reuse ......................... .... 5 4. Availability of Lands; Physical Conditions; Reference Points ................ .... 6 5. Bonds and Insurance ................................................ .... 9 6. Contractor's Responsibilities .......................................... ... 15 7. Other Work ....................................................... ... 22 8. Owner's Responsibilities ............................................. ... 23 9. Engineer's Status During Construction .................................. ... 24 ]0. Changes in the Work ................................................ ... 26 11. Change of Contract Price ............................................. ... 27 12. Change of Contract Time ............................................. ... 32 13. Warranty and Guarantee; Tests and Inspections; Correction, Removal or Acceptance of Defective Work ...................................... ... 32 14. Payments to Contractor and Completion ................................. ... 35 15. Suspension of Work and Termination ................................... ... 40 16. Arbitration ........................................................ ... 42 17. Miscellaneous ..................................................... ... 42 GC-IND-1 GENERAL CONDITIONS ARTICLE 1--DEFINITIONS Wherever used in these General Conditions or in the other Contract Documents the Following terms have the meanings indicated which are applicable to both the singular and plural thereof: '~' Addenda - Written or graphic instruments issued prior to the opening of Bids which clarify, correct or change the bidding documents or the Contract Documents. Agreement -The written agreement between OWNER and CONTRACTOR covering the Work to he performed; other Contract Documents are attached to the Agreement and made a part thereof as provided therein. Aaolication for Pam -The form accepted by ENGINEER which is to be used by CONTRACTOR in requesting progress or final payments and which is to include such supporting documentation as is required -- by the Contract Documents. Bid -The offer or proposal of the bidder submitted on the prescribed form setting forth the prices for the Work to be performed. Bonds -Bid, performance and payment bonds and other instruments of security. Chance Order - A document recommended by ENGINEER, which is signed by CONTRACTOR and OWNER and authorizes an addition, deletion or revision in the Work, or an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Time, issued on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement. Contract Documents - The Agreement, Addenda (which pertain to the Contract Documents), CONTRACTOR'S Bid (including documentation accompanying the Bid and any post-Bid documentation submitted prior to the Notice of Award) when attached as an exhibit to the Agreement, the Bonds, these General Conditions, the Supplementary Conditions, the Specifications and the Drawings as the same are more specifically identified in the Agreement, together with all amendments, modifications and supplements issued pursuant to paragraphs 3.4 and 3.5 on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement. Contract Price -The moneys payable by OWNER to CONTRACTOR under the Contract Documents as ~- stated in the Agreement (subject to the provisions of paragraph 11.9.1 in the case of Unit Price Work). Contract Time -The number of days (computed as provided in paragraph 17.2) or the date stated in the --- Agreement for the completion of the Work. CONTRACTOR -The person, firm or corporation with whom OWNER has entered into the Agreement Defective - An adjective which when modifying the word Work refers to Work that is unsatisfactory, faulty or deficient, or does not conform to the Contract Documents, or does not meet the requirements of any inspection, reference standard, test or approval referred to in the Contract Documents, or has been damaged prior to ENGINEER'S recommendation of final payment (unless responsibility for the protection thereof has been assumed by OWNER at Substantial Completion in accordance with paragraph 14.8 or 14.10). GC-1 Drawines -The drawings which show the character and scope of the Work to be performed and which have been prepared or approved by ENGINEER and are referred to in the Contract Documents. Effective Date of the Agreement -The date indicated in the Agreement on which it becomes effective, but if no such date is indicated it means the date on which the Agreement is signed and delivered by the last of the two parties to sign and deliver. ENGINEER -The person, Firm or corporation named as such in the Agreement. Field Order - A written order issued by ENGINEER which orders minor changes in the Work in accordance with paragraph 9.5 but which does not involve a change in the Contract Price or the Contract Time. General Requirements -Sections of Division 1 of the Specifications Laws and Reeulations: Laws or Re¢ulations -Laws, Hales, regulations, ordinances, codes and/or orders. Notice of Award -The written notice by OWNER to the apparent successful bidder stating that upon compliance by the apparent successful bidder with the conditions precedent enumerated therein, within the time specified, OWNER will sign and deliver the Agreement. _ Notice to Proceed - A written notice given by OWNER to CONTRACTOR (with a copy to ENGINEER) fixing the date on which the Contract Time will commence to run and on which CONTRACTOR shall start to perform CONTRACTOR'S obligations under the Contract Documents. _ OWNER - The public body or authority, corporation, association, firm or person with whom CONTRACTOR has entered into the Agreement and for whom the Work is to be provided. Partial Utilization - Placing a portion of the Work in service for the purpose for which i[ is intended (or a related purpose) before reaching Substantial Completion for all the Work. "'- Proiect -The total constmction of which the Work to be provided under the Contract Documents may be the whole, or a part as indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents. Resident Project Renresentative -The authorized representative of ENGINEER who is assigned to the site or any part thereof. Shop Drawings -All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules and other data which are specifically prepared by or for CONTRACTOR to illustrate some portion of the Work and all illustrations, brochures, standard schedules, performance charts, instmctions, diagrams and other information prepared by a Supplier ,._ and submitted by CONTRACTOR to illustrate material or equipment for some portion of the Work. Specifications -Those portions of the Contract Documents consisting of written technical descriptions of _ materials, equipment, construction systems, standards and workmanship as applied to the Work and certain administrative details applicable thereto. _ Subcontractor-An individual, firm or corporation having a direct contract with CONTRACTOR or with any other Subcontractor for the performance of a part of the Work at the site. GC-2 Substantial Comnletion -The Work (or a specified part thereot) has progressed to the point where, in the opinion of ENGINEER as evidenced by ENGINEER'S definitive certificate of Substantial Completion, it is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract Documents, so that the Work (or specified part) can be utilized For the purposes for which it is intended; or if there be no such certificate issued, when final payment is due in accordance with pazagraph 14.1.3. The terms "substantially complete" and "substantially completed" as applied to any Work refer to Substantial Completion thereof. Sunnlementarv Conditions -The part of the Contract Documents which amends or supplements these General Conditions. Supplier - A manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, distributor, materialman or vendor Underground Facilities -All pipelines, conduits, ducts, cables, wires, manholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels or other such facilities or attachments, and any encasements containing such facilities which have been installed underground to famish any of the following services or materials: electricity, gases, steam, liquid petroleum products, telephone or other communications, cable television, sewage and drainage removal, traffic or other control systems or water. Unit Price Work -Work to he paid for on the basis of unit prices. .- Work -The entire completed construction or the various separately identifiable parts thereof required to be furnished under the Contract Documents. Work is the result of performing services, famishing labor and furnishing and incorporating materials and equipment into the construction, all as required by the Contract ,_ Documents. Work Directive Change - A written directive to CONTRACTOR, issued on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement and signed by OWNER and recommended by ENGINEER, ordering an addition, deletion or revision in the Work, or responding to differing or unforeseen physical conditions under which the Work is to be performed as provided in pazagraph 4.2 or 4.3 or to emergencies under paragraph 6.22. A Work Directive Change may not change the Contract Price or the Contract Time, but is evidence that the parties expect that the change directed or documented by a Work Directive Change will be incorporated in a subse- quently issued Change Order following negotiations by the parties as to its effect, if any, on the Contract Price or Contract Time as provided in paragraph 10.2. Written Amendment - A written amendment of the Contract Documents, signed by OWNER and CONTRACTOR on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement and normally dealing with the non- ~° engineering or nontechnical rather than strictly Work-related aspects of the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 2 -PRELIMINARY MATTERS Delivery of Bonds 2.1 When CONTRACTOR delivers the executed Agreements to OWNER, CONTRACTOR shall also deliver to OWNER such Bonds as CONTRACTOR is required to furnish in accordance with paragraph 5.1 All Certificates of Insurance shall be provided to OWNER by CONTRACTOR prior to issuance of Notice of Award, as specified in the Instructions to Bidders. GC-3 Copies of Documents: "` 2.2 OWNER shall furnish to CONTRACTOR up to six copies (unless otherwise specified in the Supplementary Conditions) of the Contract Documents as are reasonably necessary for the execution of the Work. Additional copies will be furnished, upon request, at the cost of reproduction. Commencement of Contract Time: Notice to Proceed: -- 2.3 The Contract Time will commence to run on the date indicated in the Notice to Proceed. Starting the Project: 2.4 CONTRACTOR shall start to perform the Work on the date when the Contract Time commences to run, but no Work shall be done at the site prior to the date on which the Contract Time commences to mn. Before Starting Construction: 2.5 Before undertaking each part of the Work, CONTRACTOR shall carefully study and compare the Contract Documents and check and verify pertinent figures shown thereon and all applicable field measurements. CONTRACTOR shall promptly report in writing to ENGINEER any conflict, error or ,~ discrepancy which CONTRACTOR may discover and shall obtain a written interpretation or clarification from ENGINEER before preceding with any Work affected thereby; however, CONTRACTOR shall not be liable to O WNER or ENGINEER for failure to report any conflict, error or discrepancy in the Contract Docu- ments, unless CONTRACTOR had actual knowledge thereof or should reasonably have known thereof. 2.6 Within ten days after the Effective Date of the Agreement (unless otherwise specified in the General Requirements), CONTRACTOR shall submit to ENGINEER for review: 2.6.1 an estimated progress schedule indicating the starting and completion dates of the various stages of the Work; 2.6.2 a preliminary schedule of Shop Drawing submissions; and -- 2.6.3 a preliminary schedule of values for all of the Work which will include quantities and prices of items aggregating the Contract Price and will subdivide the Work into component parts in sufficient detail to serve as the basis for progress payments during constmc[ion. Such prices will ... include an appropriate amount of overhead and profit applicable to each item of Work which will be confirmed in writing by CONTRACTOR at the time of submission. ~_ 2.7 Not used. Preconstruction Conference: 2.8 Within twenty days after the Effective Date of the Agreement, but before CONTRACTOR starts the Work at the site, a conference attended by CONTRACTOR, ENGINEER and others as appropriate will be held to discuss the schedules referred to in paragraph 2.6, to discuss procedures for handling Shop Drawings and other submittals and for processing Applications for Payment, and to establish a working understanding among the parties as to the Work. GC-4 Finalizing Schedules: 2.9 At least ten days before submission of the first Application for Payment, CONTRACTOR, ENGINEER and others as appropriate will finalize the schedules submitted in accordance with paragraph 2.6. The finalized progress schedule will be acceptable to ENGINEER as providing an orderly progression of the Work to completion within the Contract Time, but such acceptance will neither impose on ENGINEER responsibility for the progress or scheduling of the Work nor relieve CONTRACTOR from full responsibility therefor. The finalized schedule of Shop Drawing submissions will be acceptable to ENGINEER as "~ providing a workable arrangement for processing the submissions. The finalized schedule of values will be acceptable to ENGINEER as to form and substance. ARTICLE 3 -CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: INTENT, AMENDING, REUSE ~~- Intent 3.1 The Contract Documents comprise the entire agreement between OWNER and CONTRACTOR _.. concerning the Work. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as binding as if called for by all. The Contract Documents will be construed in accordance with the law of the place of the Project. 3.2 1t is the intent of the Contract Documents to describe a functionally complete Project (or part thereof) to be constructed in accordance with the Contract Documents. Any Work, materials or equipment that may reasonably be inferred from the Contract Documents as being required to produce the intended result will be supplied whether or not specifically called for. When words which have a well known technical or trade meaning are used to describe Work, materials or equipment, such words shall be interpreted in accordance with that meaning. Reference to standard specifications, manuals or codes of any ._ technical society, organization or association, or to the Laws or Regulations of any governmental authority, whether such reference be specific or by implication, shall mean the latest standard specification, manual, code or Laws or Regulations in effect a[ the time of opening of Bids (or, on the Effective Date of the "' Agreement if there were no Bids), except as may be otherwise specifically stated. However, no provision of any referenced standard specification, manual or code (whether or not specifically incorporated by reference in the Contract Documents) shall be effective to change the duties and responsibilities ofOWNER, CONTRACTOR or ENGINEER, or any of their consultants, agents or employees from [hose set forth in the Contract Documents, nor shall it be effective to assign to ENGINEER, or any of ENGINEER'S consultants, agents or employees, any duty or authority to supervise or direct the furnishing or performance of the Work -- or any duty or authority to undertake responsibility contrary to the provisions of paragraph 9.15 or 9.16. Clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents shall be issued by ENGINEER as provided in paragraph 9.4. 3.3 If, during the performance of the Work, CONTRACTOR finds a conflict, error or discrepancy in the Contract Documents, CONTRACTOR shall so report to ENGINEER in writing at once and before ,_ proceeding with the Work affected thereby shall obtain a written interpretation or clarification from ENGINEER; however, CONTRACTOR shall not be liable to OWNER or ENGINEER for failure to report any conflict, error or discrepancy in the Contract Documents unless CONTRACTOR had actual knowledge thereof or should reasonably have known thereof. GGS Amending and Supplementing Contract Documents: 3.4 The Contract Documents may be amended to provide for additions, deletions and revisions in the Work or to modify the terms and conditions thereof in one or more of the following ways: 3.4.1 a formal Written Amendment, 3.4.2 a Change Order (pursuant to paragraph 10.4), or 3.4.3 a Work Directive Change (pursuant to paragraph 10.1). As indicated in paragraph 11.2 and 12.1, Contract Price and Contract Time may only be changed by a Change Order or a Written Amendment. 3.5 In addition, the requirements of the Contract Documents may be supplemented, and minor variations and deviations in the Work may be authorized, in one or more of the following ways: -- 3.5.1 a Field Order (pursuant to paragraph 9.5), 3.5.2 ENGINEER'S review of a Shop Drawings or sample (pursuant to paragraphs 6.26 and 6.27), or 3.5.3 ENGINEER'S written interpretation or clarification (pursuant to paragraph 9.4). Reuse of Documents: 3.6 Neither CONTRACTOR nor any Subcontractor or Supplier or other person or organization performing or furnishing any of the Work under a direct or indirect contract with OWNER shall have or acquire any title to or ownership rights in any of the Drawings, Specifications or other documents (or copies of any thereof) prepared by or bearing the seal of ENGINEER; and they shall not reuse any of them on "~ extensions of the Project or any other project without written consent of OWNER and ENGINEER and specific written verification or adaptation by ENGINEER. 4 -AVAILABILITY OF LANDS: PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; REFERENCE POINTS Availability of Lands: 4.1 OWNER shall furnish, as indicated in the Contract Documents, the lands upon which the Work is [o be performed, rights-of-way and easements for access thereto, and such other lands which are designated for the use of CONTRACTOR. Easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing facilities will be obtained and paid for by OWNER, unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. If CONTRACTOR believes that any delay in OWNER'S furnishing these lands, rights-of-way or easements entitles CONTRACTOR to an extension of the Contract Time, CONTRACTOR may make a claim therefor as provided in Article 12. CONTRACTOR shall provide for all additional lands and access thereto that may __ be required for temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment. GC-(~ Physical Conditions: 4.2.1 Explorations and Reports: Reference is made [o the Supplementazy Conditions for identification of those reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at the site that have been utilized by ENGINEER in preparation of the Contract Documents. CONTRACTOR may rely - upon the accuracy of the technical data contained in such reports, but not upon nontechnical data, interpretations oropinions contained therein orfor the completeness thereof for CONTRACTOR'S purposes. Except as indicated in the immediately preceding sentence and in pazagraph 4.2.6, - CONTRACTOR shall have full responsibility with respect to subsurface conditions at the site. 4.2.2 Existing Structures: Reference is made to the Supplementary Conditions for identification '-" of those drawings of physical conditions in or relating to existing surface and subsurface structures (except Underground Facilities referred to in paragraph 4.3) which are at or contiguous to the site that have been utilized by ENGINEER in preparation of the Contract Documents. CONTRACTOR "" may rely upon the accuracy of the technical data contained in such drawings, but not for the completeness thereof for CONTRACTOR'S purposes. Except as indicated in the immediately preceding sentence and in paragraph 4.2.6, CONTRACTOR shall have full responsibility with -- respect to physical conditions in or relating to such structures. 4.2.3 Report of Differing Conditions: If CONTRACTOR believes that: 4.2.3.1. any technical data on which CONTRACTOR is entitled to rely as provided in paragraphs 4.2.1 and 4.2.2 is inaccurate, or - 4.2.3.2 any physical condition uncovered or revealed at the site differs materially from that indicated, reflected or referred to in the Contract Documents, CONTRACTOR shall, promptly after becoming aware thereof and before performing any Work in connection therewith (except in an emergency as permitted by paragraph 6.22), notify OWNER and ENGINEER in writing about the inaccuracy or difference. 4:2.4 ENGINEER'S Review: ENGINEER will promptly review the pertinent conditions, determine the necessity of obtaining additional explorations or tests with respect thereto and advise "" OWNER in writing (with a copy to CONTRACTOR) of ENGINEER'S finding and conclusions. 4.2.5 Possible Document Change: If ENGINEER concludes that there is a material error in the - Contract Documents or that because of newly discovered conditions a change in the Contract Documents is required, a Work Directive Change or a Change Order will be issued as provided in Article 10 to reflect and document the consequences of the inaccuracy or difference. 4.2.6 Possible Price and Time Adjustments: In each such case, an increase or decrease in the Contract Price or an extension or shortening of the Contract Time, or any combination thereof, will -- be allowable to the extent that these are attributable to any such inaccuracy or difference. If OWNER and CONTRACTOR are unable to agree as to the amount or length thereof, a claim may he made therefor as provided in Articles 1 I and 12. GC-7 4.3 Physical Conditions - Underround Facilities: ~~ 4.3.1 Shown or Indicated: The information and data shown or indicated in the Contract Documents with respect to existing Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the site is based on information and data furnished to OWNER or ENGINEER by the owners of such Underground Facilities or by others. Unless it is otherwise expressly provided in the Supplementary Conditions: 4.3.1.1 OWNER and ENGINEER shall not be responsible for the accuracy or completeness '"" of any such information or data; and, 4.3.1.2 CONTRACTOR shall have full responsibility for reviewing and checking all such information and data, for locating all Underground Facilities shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, for coordination of the Work with the owners of such Underground Facilities during construction, for the safety and protection thereof as provided in paragraph -- 6.20 and repairing any damage thereto resulting from the W ork, the cost of all of which will be considered as having been included in the Contract Price. 4.3.2 Not Shown or Indicated: If an Underground Facility is uncovered or revealed at or contiguous to the site which was not shown or indicated in the Contract Documents and which CONTRACTOR could not reasonably have been expected to be aware of, CONTRACTOR shall, promptly after becoming aware thereof and before performing any Work affected thereby (except in an emergency as permitted by paragraph 6.22), identify the owner of such Underground Facility and give written notice thereof to that owner and to OWNER and ENGINEER. ENGINEER will promptly review the Underground Facility to determine the extent to which the Contract Documents should be modified to reflect and document the consequences of the existence of the Underground Facility, and the Contract Documents will be amended or supplemented to the extent necessary. During such time, CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the safety and protection of such Underground Facility as provided in paragraph 6.20. CONTRACTOR shall be allowed an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Time, or both, to the extent that they are attributable to the existence of any Underground Facility that was not shown or indicated in the Contract Documents and which CONTRACTOR could not reasonably have been expected to be aware of. If the parties are unable to agree as to the amount or length thereof, CONTRACTOR may make a claim therefor as provided in Articles I 1 and 12. Reference Points: -- 4.4 OWNER shall provide engineering surveys to establish reference points for construction which in ENGINEER'S judgment are necessary to enable CONTRACTOR to proceed with the Work. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for laying out [he Work (unless otherwise specified in the General ,_ Requirements), shall protect and reserve the established reference points and shall make no changes or relocations without the prior written approval of OWNER. CONTRACTOR shall report to ENGINEER whenever any reference point is lost or destroyed or requires relocation because of necessary changes in ,_ grades or locations, and shall be responsible for the accurate replacement or relocation of such reference points by professionally qualified personnel. GC-8 ARTICLE 5 -BONDS AND INSURANCE Performance and Other Bonds: 5.1 CONTRACTOR shall furnish performance and payments Bonds, each in an amount at least equal to the Contract Price as security for the faithful performance and payment of all CONTRACTORS obligations under the Contract Documents. These Bonds shall remain in effect at least until one year after the date when final payment becomes due, except as otherwise provided by Law or Regulation or by the Contract Documents. CONTRACTOR shall also furnish such other Bonds as are required by the Supplementary Conditions. All Bonds shall be in the form prescribed by Law or Regulation or by the Contract Documents and be executed by such sureties as are named in the current of "Companies Holding "" Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as Acceptable Reinsuring Companies" as published in Circular 570 (amended) by the Audit Staff Bureau of Accounts, U.S. Treasury Department. All Bonds signed by an agent must be accompanied by a certified copy of the authority to act. 5.2 If the surety on any Bond furnished by CONTRACTOR is declared abankmpt or becomes insolvent or its right to do business is terminated in any state where any part of the Project is located or its ceases to meet the requirements of paragraph 5.3, CONTRACTOR shall within five days thereafter substitute another Bond and Surety, both of which must be acceptable to OWNER. z- CONTRACTOR'S Liability Insurance: 5.3 The CONTRACTOR shall not commence work under this contract until he has obtained at this expense all insurance required under this section of the General Conditions and by the contract documents, and such insurance has been approved by the OWNER, nor shall CONTRACTOR allow any subcontractor to commence work on any subcontract until all similar insurance required of the subcontractor has been so obtained and approved. Such insurance shall remain in full force and effect on all phases of the work, whether or not the work is occupied or utilized by the OWNER, until all work under the contract is completed and has been accepted by the OWNER. Nothing contained in the insurance requirements shall be construed as limiting the extend of the CONTRACTOR'S responsibility for payment of damages resulting from his operations under the contract. Any insurance bearing an adequacy of performance will be maintained after completion of the project for the full guarantee period. The Contractor shall obtain and maintain for the full period of the contract the following types of insurance in the form, minimum limits and amounts herein specified or as may be otherwise required in the contract documents. The CONTRACTOR shall automatically renew any policy which expires during the -- performance of his contract and notify the OWNER and ENGINEER of such renewal period to expiration date. 5.3.1. Workmen's Compensation Insurance Coverage. 1. Definitions: A. Certificate of coverage ("Certificate")-A copyofacertificateofinsurance,acertificate of authority to self-insure issued by the commission, or a coverage agreement (TWCC- GC ~) 81, TWCC-82, TWCC-83, or TWCC-84), showing statutory worker's compensation _, insurance coverage for the person's or entity's employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project. B. Duration of the project -includes the time from the beginning of the work on the project until the CONTRACTOR'S/person's work on the project has been completed and accepted by the governmental agency. C. Persons providing services on the project ("subcontractor" in Section 406.096) - includes all persons or entities performing all or part of [he services the CONTRACTOR has undertaken to perform on the project, regardless of whether that '"` person has employees. This includes, without limitation, independent CONTRACTORS, subcontractors, leasing companies, motor carriers, owner-operators, employees of any such entity, or employees of any entity which furnishes persons to provide services on the project. "Services" include, without limitation, providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor, transportation, or other service related to a project. "Services" does not include activities unrelated to the -- project, such as food/beverage venders, office supply deliveries, and delivery of portable toilets. 2. The CONTRACTOR Shall provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all employees of the ,_ CONTRACTOR providing services on the project, for the duration of the project. 3. The CONTRACTOR must provide a certificate of coverage to the governmental entity prior to being awarded the contract. 4. If the coverage period shown on the CONTRACTOR' S current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project, the CONTRACTOR must, prior to the end of the coverage period, file a new certificate of coverage with the governmental entity showing that coverage has been extended. '°' S. The CONTRACTOR shall obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the governmental entity: a: a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the project; and -- b. no later than seven (7) days after receipt by the CONTRACTOR, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project. 6. The CONTRACTOR shall retain all required certificates of coverage for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter. 7. The CONTRACTOR shall notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the CONTRACTOR knew or should have known, GC-10 of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project. "` 8. The CONTRACTOR shall post on each project site a notice, in the form and manner prescribed by the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission, informing all persons providing services on the project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify coverage and report lack of coverage. 9. The CONTRACTOR shall contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project, to: a. provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts -- and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; b. provide to the CONTRACTOR, propr to that person beginning work on the project, a certificate of coverage showing that coverage is being provided for all employees of the ,_ person providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; c. provide the CONTRACTOR, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; d. obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the CONTRACTOR: i. a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; '~ and ii, anew certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, prior to the end of the coverage period, if the coverage period sown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; _ e. retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; ,, f. notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the person knew of, should have known of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and y g. contractually require each person with whom it contracts, to perform as required by paragraphs (1) - (7), with the certificates of coverage to be provided to the person for _ whom they are providing services. 10. By signing this contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the CONTRACTOR is representing to the governmental entity that all employees of the CONTRACTOR who will provide services on the project will be covered by workers' compensation coverage for the duration of the project, that the coverage will be based on GC-1 1 proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all coverage agreements will be files with the appropriate insurance carrier or, in the case of a self- ° insured, with the commission's Division of Self-Insurance Regulation. Providing false or misleading information may subject the CONTRACTOR to administrative penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties, or other civil actions. 11. The CONTRACTOR'S failure to comply with any of these provisions is a breach of contract by the CONTRACTOR which entitles the govemmental entity to declare the contract void if the CONTRACTOR does not remedy the breach within ten days after receipt of notice of breach from the governmental entity. 5.3.2 Commercial General Liability -CONTRACTOR shall have or purchase and shall maintain in force for the duration of the Work, Commercial General liability coverage including the coverage for the hazard of explosion, collapse and underground. Coverage for independent contractor's ._ liability, contractual liability, products/completed operations liability, personal injury and broad form property damage shall also be included. Completed operations liability shall be kept in force for at least one (1) year after the date of final completion. Coverages shall have at least the following limits: Genera] Aggregate $1,000,000 Products & Completed Operations Aggregate $1,000,000 Personal and Advertising Injury $ 500,000 Each Occurrence $ 500,000 Fire Damage (Any One Fire) $ 50,000 '~ Medical Expense (Any One Person) $ 1,000 5.3.3. OWNER's and CONTRACTOR'S protective liability insurance policy naming Kerr County -~° Texas. as insured. Coverage shall be on an "occurrence" basis, and the policy shall be issued by the same insurance company that carries the CONTRACTOR' S liability insurance. Minimum limits of liability shall be as follows: Per Occurrence $ 500,000 Aggregate $1,000,000 5.3.4 Automobile liability Insurance for all owned, non-owned and hired vehicles with minimum limits for Bodily Injury of $250,000 for each person and $500,000 for each occurrence and Property _ Damage limits of $100,000 or a Combined Single Limit of $600,000. 5.3.5 On all new or remodeling building projects, All Risk Builders Risk Insurance for insurable .W, building projects shall be insured in the amount of the contract price for such improvements. The and CONTRACTOR waive all rights against each other for damages caused by fire or other perils to the extent covered by Builders Risk Insurance required under this section, except as to such rights as they may have in the proceeds of such insurance. CONTRACTORS shall require similar waivers by Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors. If insurance policies are not written for amount specified, CONTRACTOR is required to carry an Excess liability Insurance Policy for any difference in amounts specified. '° GC-] 2 CONTRACTORS shall be responsible for deductibles and self-insured retentions, if any, stated in policies. Any self-insured retention shall not exceed ten percent (10%) of minimum required limits. All •~ deductibles or self-insured retentions shall be disclosed on Certificate of Insurance required above. CONTRACTOR shall not commence work at site under this Contract until he has obtained required .- insurance and until such insurance has been reviewed by the OWNER's Project Manager. CONTRACTOR shall not allow any Subcontractor to commence work until insurance required has been obtained and approved. Approval of insurance by the OWNER shall not relieve or decrease liability of .. CONTRACTOR hereunder. Insurance to be written by a company licensed to do business in the State of Texas at the time policy was ~, issued and acceptable to the OWNER. CONTRACTOR shall produce an endorsement to each affected policy: 1. Naming Kerr County Texas., and Heam Engineering, Inc., as additional insured (except Workers' Compensation and Builders Risk). 2. That obligates the insurance company to notify the Engineer, that no policies will be canceled or reduced, restricted or limited until thirty (30) days after the OWNER has received written notice as evidenced by return receipt of registered or certified letter. CONTRACTOR shall not cause any insurance to be canceled nor permit any insurance to lapse during the term of this Contract or as required in the Contract. If CONTRACTOR is underwritten on a claim-made basis, the retroactive date shall be prior to, or coincident with, the date of this Contract and [he Certificate of Insurance shall state that coverage is claims made and also the retroactive date. CONTRACTOR shall maintain coverage for the duration of this Contract. CONTRACTOR shall provide the OWNER annually a Certificate of insurance as evidence of such insurance. It is further agreed that CONTRACTOR shall provide the OWNER a 30-day notice of aggregate erosion, an advance of the retroactive date, cancellation and/or renewal. It is also agreed that CONTRACTOR will invoke the tail option of the OWNER and that Extended Reporting period (EPR) premium shall be paid by the CONTRACTOR. The OWNER reserved the right to review and renegotiate the insurance requirements of this section during the effective period of the Contract and to make reasonable adjustments to insurance and their limits when deemed necessary and prudent by the OWNER based upon changes in statutory law, court decisions or the claims history of the industry as well as CONTRACTOR. The OWNER shall be entitled, upon request, and without expense, to receive copies of policies and all endorsements thereto and may make any reasonable requests for deletion or revision or modification of particular policy terms, conditions, limitations or exclusions, except where policy provisions are '° established by law or regulation binding upon either of the parties hereto or the underwriter on any of such policies. °'° Actual losses not covered by insurance as required by this section shall be paid by CONTRACTOR. GC-13 5.4 Through 5.7 Not Used Receipt and Application of Proceeds: 5.8 Any insured loss under the policies of insurance required will be adjusted with OWNER and made payable to OWNER as trustee for the insureds, as their interests may appear, subject to the requirements of any applicable mortgage clause and of paragraph 5.6. OWNER shall deposit in a separate account any money so received, and shall distribute it in accordance with such agreement as the parties in interest may reach. If no other special agreement is reached the damaged Work shall be repaired or replaced, the moneys so received applied on account thereof and the Work and the cost thereof covered by an appropriate Change Order or Written Amendment. 5.9 OWNER as trustee shall have power to adjust and settle any loss with the insurers unless one of the parties in interest shall object in writing within fifteen days after the occurrence of loss to OWNER's exercise of this power. If such objection be made, OWNER as trustee shall make settlement with the insurers in accordance with such agreement as the parties in interest may reach. If required in writing by any party in "~ interest, OWNER as trustee shall, upon the occurrence of an insured loss, give bond for the proper performance of such duties. '~ Acceptance of Insurance: 5.10 If OWNER has any objection to the coverage afforded by or other provisions of the insurance °~- required to be purchased and maintained by CONTRACTOR in accordance with pazagraphs 5.1 and 5.2 on the basis of its not complying with the Contract Documents, OWNER shall notify CONTRACTOR in writing thereof within ten days of the date of delivery of such certificates [o OWNER in accordance with paragraph 2.7. If CONTRACTOR has any objection to the coverage afforded by or other provisions of the policies of insurance required to be purchased and maintained by OWNER on the basis of their not complying with the Contract Documents, CONTRACTOR shall notify OWNER in writing thereof within ten days of the date _, of delivery of such certificates to CONTRACTOR in accordance with paragraph 2.7. OWNER and CONTRACTOR shall each provide to the other such additional information in respect of insurance provided by each as the other may reasonably request. Failure by OWNER or CONTRACTOR to give any such notice of objection within the time provided shall constitute acceptance of such insurance purchased by the other as complying with the Contract Documents. Partial Utilization -Property Insurance: 5.11 If OWNER finds it necessary to occupy or use a portion or portions of the Work prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work, such use or occupancy may be accomplished in accordance with paragraph "- 14.10; provided that no such use or occupancy shall commence before the insurers providing the property insurance have acknowledged notice thereof and in writing effected the changes in coverage necessitated thereby. The insurers providing the property insurance shall consent by endorsement on the policy or "' policies, but the property insurance shall not be canceled or lapse on account of any such partial use or occupancy. GC-14 ARTICLE 6 -CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES -- Suuervision and Superintendence: 6.1 CONTRACTOR shall supervise and direct the Work competently and efficiently, devoting such •-. attention thereto and applying such skills and expertise as may be necessary to perform [he Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. CONTRACTOR shall be solely responsible for the means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction, but CONTRACTOR shall not be responsible for the negligence of others in the design or selection of a specific means, method, technique, sequence or procedure of construction which is indicated in and required by the Contract Documents. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible to see that the finished Work complies accurately with the Contract Documents. 6.2 CONTRACTOR shall keep on the Work at all times during its progress a competent resident superintendent, who shall not be replaced without written notice to OWNER and ENGINEER except under extraordinary circumstances. The superintendent will be CONTRACTOR'S representative at the site and shall have authority [o act on behalf of CONTRACTOR. All communications given to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to CONTRACTOR. Labor, Materials and E ui ment: 6.3 CONTRACTOR shall provide competent, suitable qualified personnel [o survey and lay out the '~ Work and perform construction as required by the Contract Documents. CONTRACTOR shall at all times maintain good discipline and order at the site. -- 6.4 Unless otherwise specified in the General Requirements, CONTRACTOR shall furnish and assume full responsibility for all materials, equipment, labor, transportation, construction equipment and machinery, tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone, water, sanitary facilities, temporary facilities and all ..- other facilities and incidentals necessary for the furnishing, performance, testing, start-up and completion of the Work. ..,. 6.5 All materials and equipment shall be of good quality and new, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. If required by ENGINEER, CONTRACTOR shall famish satisfactory evidence (including reports of required tests) as to the kind and quality of materials and equipment. All materials and equipment shall be applied, installed, connected, erected, used, cleaned and conditioned in accordance with the instructions of the applicable Supplier except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents; but no provision of any such instructions will be effective to assign to ENGINEER, or any of ENGINEER'S consultants, agents or employees, any duty or authority to supervise or direct the furnishing or performance of the Work or any duty or authority to undertake responsibility contrary to the provisions of paragraph 9.15 to 9.16. Adiusting Progress Schedule: 6.6 CONTRACTOR shall submit to ENGINEER for acceptance (to the extent indicated in paragraph "" 2.9) adjustments in the progress schedule to reflect the impact thereon of new developments; these will conform generally to the progress schedule then in effect and additionally will comply with any provisions of the General Requirements applicable thereto. GC- I S Substitutes or "Or-Equal" Items: '"' 6.7.1 Whenever materials or equipment are specified or described in the Contract Documents by using the name of a proprietary item or the name of a particular Supplier the naming of the item is intended to establish the type, Function and quality required. Unless the name is followed by words indicating that no substitution is permitted, materials or equipment of other Suppliers may be accepted by ENGINEER if sufficient information is submitted by CONTRACTOR to allow ENGINEER to determine that the material or equipment proposed is equivalent or equal to that °- named. The procedure for review by ENGINEER will include the following as supplemented in the General Requirements. Requests for review of substitute items of material and equipment will not be accepted by ENGINEER from anyone other than CONTRACTOR. If CONTRACTOR wishes »- [o furnish or use a substitute item of material or equipment, CONTRACTOR shall make written application to ENGINEER for acceptance thereof, certifying that the proposed substitute will perform adequately the functions and achieve the results called for by the general design, be similar and of equal substance to that specified and be suited to the same use as that specified. The applica- tion will state that the evaluation and acceptance of the proposed substitute will not prejudice CONTRACTOR'S achievement of Substantial Completion on time, whether or not acceptance of the substitute for use in the Work will require a change in any of the Contract Documents (or in the provisions of any other direct contract with OWNER for work on the Project) to adapt the design to the proposed substitute and whether or not incorporation or use of the substitute in connection with the Work is subject to payment of any license fee or royalty." All variations of the proposed substitute from that specified will be identified in the application and available maintenance, repair and replacement service will be indicated. The application will also contain an itemized estimate of all costs that will result directly or indirectly from acceptance of such substitute, including costs "` of redesign and claims of other contractors affected by the resulting change, all of which shall be considered by ENGINEER in evaluating the proposed substitute. ENGINEER may require CONTRACTOR to furnish at CONTRACTOR'S expense additional data about the proposed substi- "" tote. 6.7.2 If a specific means, method, technique, sequence or procedure of constmction is indicated in or required by the Contract Documents, CONTRACTOR may furnish or utilize a substitute means, method, sequence, technique or procedure of construction acceptable to ENGINEER, if CONTRACTOR submits sufficient information to allow ENGINEER to determine that the substitute proposed is equivalent [o that indicated or required by the Contract Documents. The procedure for review by ENGINEER will be similar to that provided in paragraph 6.7.1 as applied by ENGINEER and as may be supplemented in the General Requirements. 6.7.3 ENGINEER will be allowed a reasonable time within which to evaluate each proposed substitute. ENGINEER will be the sole judge of acceptability, and no substitute will be ordered, _, installed or util ized without ENGINEER's prior written acceptance which will be evidenced by either a Change Order or a reviewed Shop Drawing. OWNER may require CONTRACTOR to famish at CONTRACTOR'S expense a special performance guarantee or other surety with respect to any substitute. ENGINEER will record time required by ENGINEER and ENGINEER'S consultants in evaluating substitutions proposed by CONTRACTOR and in making changes in the Contract Documents occasioned thereby. Whether or not ENGINEER accepts a proposed substitute, _ CONTRACTOR shall reimburse OWNER for the charges of ENGINEER and ENGINEER'sconsul- tants for evaluating each proposed substitute. GC-16 Concernine Subcontractors. Supuliers and Others: 6.8.1 CONTRACTOR shall not employ any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization (including those acceptable to OWNER and ENGINEER as indicated in paragraph 6.8.2), whether °- initially or as a substitute, against whom OWNER or ENGINEER may have reasonable objection. CONTRACTOR shall not be required to employ any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization to furnish or perform any of the Work against whom CONTRACTOR has reasonable •-- objection. 6.8.2 If the Supplementary Conditions require the identity of certain Subcontractors, Suppliers or other persons or organizations (including those who are to furnish the principal items of materials and equipment) to be submitted to OWNER in advance of the specified date prior to the Effective Date of the Agreement for acceptance by OWNER and ENGINEER and if CONTRACTOR has ,_ submitted a list thereof in accordance with the Supplementary Conditions, OWNER's or ENGINEER'S acceptance (either in writing or by failing to make written objection thereto by the date indicated for acceptance or objection in the bidding documents or the Contract Documents) of any ,_ such Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization so identified may be revoked on the basis of reasonable objection after due investigation, in which case CONTRACTOR shall submit an acceptable substitute, the Contract Price will be increased by the difference in the cost occasioned _ by such substitution and an appropriate Change Order will be issued or Written Amendment signed. No acceptance by OWNER or ENGINEER of any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization shall constitute a waiver of any right of OWNER or ENGINEER to reject defective Work. 6.9 CONTRACTOR shall be fully responsible to OWNER and ENGINEER for all acts and omissions of the Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons and organizations performing or furnishing any of the Work under a direct or indirect contract with CONTRACTOR just as CONTRACTOR is responsible for CONTRACTOR'S own acts and omissions. Nothing in the Contract Documents shall create any contractual relationship between OWNER or ENGINEER and any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization, nor shall it create any obligation on the part of OWNER or ENGINEER to pay or to see to the payment of any moneys due any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization except as may otherwise be required by Laws and Regulations. 6.10 The divisions and sections of the Specifications and the identifications of any Drawings shall not control CONTRACTOR in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or Suppliers or delineating the Work ._ to be performed by any specific trade. 6.11 All Work performed for CONTRACTOR by a Subcontractor will be pursuant to an appropriate _ agreement between CONTRACTOR and the Subcontractor which specifically binds the Subcontractor to the applicable terms and conditions of the Contract Documents for the benefit of OWNER and ENGINEER and contains waiver provisions as required by paragraph 6.8. CONTRACTOR shall pay each Subcontractor _ ajust share of any insurance moneys received by CONTRACTOR on account of losses under policies issued pursuant to paragraph 5.4 and 5.5. Patent Fees and Royalties: 6.12 CONTRACTOR shall pay all license fees and royalties and assume all costs incident to the use in GC-17 the performance of the Work or the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product or device which is the subject of patent rights or copyrights held by others. If a particular invention, design, '"` process, product or device is specified in the Contract Documents for use in the performance of the Work and if to the actual knowledge of OWNER or ENGINEER its use is subject to patent rights or copyrights calling for the payment of any license fee or royalty to others, the existence of such rights shall be disclosed '° by OWNER in the Contract Documents. CONTRACTOR shall indemnify and hold harmless OWNER and ENGINEER and anyone directly or indirectly employed by either of them from and against all claims, damages, losses and expenses (including attorneys' fees and court and arbitration costs) arising out of any °~- infringement of patent rights or copyrights incident to the use in the performance of the Work or resulting from the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product or device not specified in the Contract Documents, and shall defend all such claims in connection with any alleged infringement of such rights. Permits: 6.13 Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, CONTRACTOR shall obtain and pay for all construction permits and licenses. OWNER shall assist CONTRACTOR, when necessary, in r obtaining such permits and licenses. CONTRACTOR shall pay all governmental charges and inspection fees necessary for the prosecution of the Work, which are applicable at the time of opening of Bids, or if there are no Bids on the Effective Date of the Agreement. CONTRACTOR shall pay all charges of utility owners for connections to the Work, and OWNER shall pay all charges of such utility owners for capital costs related thereto. Laws and Regulations: 6.14.1 CONTRACTOR shall give all notices and comply with all Laws and Regulations applicable to furnishing and performance of the Work. Except where otherwise expressly required by applicable Laws and Regulations, neither OWNER nor ENGINEER shall be responsible for monitor- ing CONTRACTOR'S compliance with any Laws or Regulations. 6.14.2 If CONTRACTOR observes that the Specifications or Drawings are at variance with any Laws or Regulations, CONTRACTOR shall give ENGINEER prompt written notice thereof, and any necessary changes will be authorized by one of the methods indicated in paragraph 3.4. If -- CONTRACTOR performs any Work knowing or having reason to know that it is contrary to such Laws or Regulations, and without such notice to ENGINEER, CONTRACTOR shall bear all costs arising therefrom; however, it shall not be CONTRACTOR'S primary responsibility to make certain .._ that the Specifications and Drawings are in accordance with such Laws and Regulations. Taxes• 6.15 CONTRACTOR shall pay all sales, consumer, use and other similar taxes required to be paid by CONTRACTOR in accordance with the Laws and Regulations of the place of the Project which are applicable during the performance of the Work. Uses of Premises: W' 6.16 CONTRACTOR shall confine construction equipment, the storage of materials and equipment and the operations of workers to the Project site and land and areas identified in and permitted by the Contract GC-18 Documents and other land and areas permitted by Laws and Regulations, rights-of-way, permits and ease- ments, and shall no[ unreasonably encumber the premises with constmction equipment or other materials or ' - equipment. CONTRACTOR shall assume full responsibility for any damage to any such land or area, or to the owner or occupant thereof or of any land or areas contiguous thereto, resulting from the performance of the Work. Should any claim be made against OWNER or ENGINEER by any such owner or occupant -° because of the performance of the Work, CONTRACTOR shall promptly attempt to settle with such other party by agreement or otherwise resolve the claim by arbitration or at law. CONTRACTOR shall, to the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, indemnify and hold OWNER and ENGINEER harmless -- from and against all claims, damages, losses and expenses (including, but not limited to, fees of engineers, architects, attorneys and other professionals and court and arbitration costs) arising directly, indirectly or consequentially out of any action, legal or equitable, brought by any such other party against OWNER or .,_ ENGINEER to the extent based on a claim arising out of CONTRACTOR'S performance of the Work. 6.17 During the progress of the Work, CONTRACTOR shall keep the premises free from accumulations of waste materials, mbbish and other debris resulting from the Work. At the completion of the Work CONTRACTOR shall remove all waste materials, mbbish and debris from and about the premises as well as all tools, appliances, constmction equipment and machinery, and surplus materials, and shall leave the site clean and ready for occupancy by OWNER. CONTRACTOR shall restore to original condition all property not designated for alteration by the Contract Documents. 6.18 CONTRACTOR shall not load nor permit any part of any stmcture to be loaded in any manner that will endanger the stmcture, nor shall CONTRACTOR subject any part of the Work or adjacent property to stresses or pressures that will endanger it. Record Documents: 6.19 CONTRACTOR shall maintain in a safe place at the site one record copy of all Drawings, Specifi- cations,Addenda, Written Amendments, Change Orders, Work Directive Changes, Field Orders and written interpretations and clarifications (issued pursuant to pazagraph 9.4) in good order and annotated to show all changes made during constmction. These record documents together with all approved samples and a counterpart of all reviewed Shop Drawings wil I be available to ENGINEER for reference. Upon completion of the Work, these record documents, samples and Shop Drawings will be delivered to ENGINEER for OWNER. Safetv and Protection: _, 6.20 CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work. CONTRACTOR shall take all necessazy precautions for the safety of, and shall provide the necessary protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to: 6.20.1 all employees on the Work and other persons and organizations who may be affected thereby; 6.20.2 all the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the site; and 6.20.3 other property at the site or adjacent thereto, including trees, shmbs, lawns, walks, "` pavements, roadways, stmctures, utilities and Underground Facilities not designated for removal, relocation or replacement in the course of construction. GC- ] 9 CONTRACTOR shall comply with all applicable Laws and Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction for the safety of persons or property or to protect them from damage, injury or loss; and shall "" erect and maintain all necessary safeguards for such safety and protection. CONTRACTOR shall notify owners of adjacent property and of Underground Facilities and utility owners when prosecution of the Work may affect them, and shall cooperate with them in the protection, removal, relocation and replacement of their property. All damage, injury or loss to any property referred to in paragraph 6.20.2 or 6.20.3 caused, directly or indirectly, in whole or in part, by CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor, Supplier or any other person or organization directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the Work -- or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, shall be remedied by CONTRACTOR (except damage or loss attributable to the fault of Drawings or Specifications or to the acts or omissions of OWNER or ENGINEER or anyone employed by either of them or anyone for whose acts either of them may be liable, and not attributable, directly or indirectly, in whole or in part, to the fault or negligence of CONTRACTOR). CONTRACTOR'S duties and responsibilities for the safety and protection of the Work shall continue until such time as all the Work is completed and ENGINEER has issued a notice to OWNER and CONTRACTOR ... in accordance with paragraph 14.13 that the Work is acceptable (except as otherwise expressly provided in connection with Substantial Completion). 6.21 CONTRACTOR shall designate a responsible representative at the site whose duty shall be the prevention of accidents. This person shall be CONTRACTOR'S superintendent unless otherwise designated in writing by CONTRACTOR to OWNER. Emergencies• 6.22 In emergencies affecting the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the site or adjacent thereto, CONTRACTOR, without special instruction or authorization from ENGINEER or OWNER, is obligated to act to prevent threatened damage, injury or loss. CONTRACTOR shall give ENGINEER prompt written notice if CONTRACTOR believes that any significant changes in the Work or °- variations from the Contract Documents have been caused thereby. If ENGINEER determines that a change in the Contract Documents is required because of the action taken in response to an emergency, a Work Directive Change or Change Order will be issued to document the consequences of the changes or variations. Shou Drawings and Samples: 6.23 After checking and verifying all field measurements and after complying with applicable procedures specified in the General Requirements, CONTRACTOR shall submit to ENGINEER for review in accordance with the accepted schedule of Shop Drawing submissions (see paragraph 2.9), or for other appropriate action if so indicated in the Supplementary Conditions, three copies plus the number of copies required by the CONTRACTOR (unless otherwise specified in the General Requirements) of all Shop Drawings, which will bear a stamp or specific written indication that CONTRACTOR has satisfied r CONTRACTOR'S responsibilities under the Contract Documents with respect to the review of the submission. All submissions will be identified as ENGINEER may require. The data shown on the Shop Drawings will be complete with respect to quantities, dimensions, specified performance and design criteria, materials and similar data to enable ENGINEER to review the information as required. 6.24 CONTRACTOR shall also submit to ENGINEER for review with such promptness as to cause no delay in Work, all samples required by the Contract Documents. All samples will have been checked by and GC-20 accompanied by a specific written indication that CONTRACTOR has satisfied CONTRACTOR'S responsibilities under the Contract Documents with respect to the review of the submission and will be identified cleazly as to material, Supplier, pertinent data such as catalog numbers and the use for which intended. 6.25.1 Before submission of each Shop Drawing or sample CONTRACTOR shall have determined and verified all quantities, dimensions, specified performance criteria, installation requirements, materials, catalog numbers and similar data with respect thereto and review or coordinated each Shop Drawing or sample with other Shop Drawings and samples and with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents. 6.25.2 At the time of each submission, CONTRACTOR shall give ENGINEER specific written notice of each variation that the Shop Drawings or samples may have from the requirements of the Contract Documents, and, in addition, shall cause a specific notation to be made on each Shop -~ Drawing submitted [o ENGINEER for review of each such variation. 6.26 ENGINEER will review with reasonable promptness Shop Drawings and samples, but ENGINEER'S __ review will be only for conformance with the design concept of the Project and for compliance with the information given in the Contract Documents and shall not extend to means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction (except where a specific means, method, technique, sequence or procedure of construction is indicated in or required by the Contract Documents) or to safety precautions or programs incident thereto. The review of a separate item as such will not indicate approval of the assembly in which the item functions. CONTRACTOR shall make corrections required by ENGINEER, and shall return the µ required number of corrected copies of Shop Drawings and submit as required new samples for review. CONTRACTOR shall direct specific attention in writing to revisions other than the corrections called for by ENGINEER on previous submittals. "' 6.27 ENGINEER'S review of Shop Drawings or samples shall not relieve CONTRACTOR from responsibility for any variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents unless CONTRACTOR has in writing called ENGINEER'S attention to each such variation at the time of submission as required by paragraph 6.25.2 and ENGINEER has given written approval of each such variation by a specific written notation thereof incorporated in or accompanying the Shop Drawing or sample approval; nor will any review by ENGINEER relieve CONTRACTOR from responsibility for errors or omissions in the Shop Drawings or from responsibility for having complied with the provisions of paragraph 6.25.1. 6.28 Where a Shop Drawing or sample is required by the Specifications, any related Work performed prior to ENGINEER'S review of the pertinent submission will be the sole expense and responsibility of CONTRACTOR. ,_ Continuing the Work: 6.29 CONTRACTOR shall carry on the Work and adhere to the progress schedule during all disputes or disagreements with OWNER. No Work shall be delayed or postponed pending resolution of any disputes or disagreements, except as permitted by paragraph 15.5 or as Contractor and OWNER may otherwise agree in writing. Indemnification: GC-21 6.30 To the extent permitted by law, the CONTRACTOR shall indemnify and hold harmless OWNER, ENGINEER, ENGINEERS consultants and agents and employees of any of themfrom and against all claims, ~' losses, damages and expenses, including but not limited to attorneys' fees, arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work, provided that such claim, damage, loss or expense is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself) "` including loss of use resulting therefrom, but only to the extent caused in whole or in part by negligent acts or omissions of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable. Such obligation shall not be construed to negate, abridge, or reduce other "'~ rights or obligations of indemnity which would otherwise exist as to a party or person described in this Paragraph 6.30. ~- 6.31 In any and all claims against OWNER or ENGINEER or any of their consultants, agents or em- ployees by any employee of CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor, any person or organization directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the Work or anyone for whose acts any of ~- them may be liable, the indemnification obligation under paragraph 6.30 shall not be limited in any way by any limitation on the amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for CONTRACTOR or any such Subcontractor or other person or organization under workers' or workmen's _ compensation acts, disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts. 6.32 The obligations of CONTRACTOR under paragraph 6.30 shall not extend to the liability of ,,,. ENGINEER, ENGINEER'S consultants, agents or employees arising out of the preparation or approval of maps, drawings, opinions, reports, surveys, Change Orders, designs or specifications. ARTICLE 7 -OTHER WORK Related Work at Site: 7.1 OWNER may perform other work related to the Project at the site by OWNER'S own forces, have other work performed by utility owners or let other direct contracts therefor which shall contain General "" Conditions similar to these. If the fact that such other work is to be performed was not noted in the Contract Documents, written notice thereof will be given to CONTRACTOR prior to starting any such other work; and, if CONTRACTOR believes that such performance will involve additional expense to CONTRACTOR or requires additional time and the parties are unable to agree as to the extent thereof, CONTRACTOR may make a claim therefor as provided in Articles 11 and 12. -- 7.2 CONTRACTOR shall afford each utility owner and other contractor who is a party to such a direct contract (or OWNER, if OWNER is performing the additional work with OWNER'S employees) proper and safe access to the site and a reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of materials and ,.,, equipment and the execution of such work, and shall properly connect and coordinate the Work with theirs. CONTRACTOR shall do all cutting, fitting and patching of the Work that may be required to make its several parts come together properly and integrate with such other work. CONTRACTOR shall not endanger any work of others by cutting, excavating or otherwise altering their work and will only cut or alter their work with the written consent of ENGINEER and the others whose work will be affected. The duties and responsibilities of CONTRACTOR under this paragraph are for the benefit of such utility owners and other contractors to the extent that there are comparable provisions for the benefit of CONTRACTOR in said direct contracts between OWNER and such utility owners and other contractors. GC-22 7.3 If any part of the CONTRACTOR'S Work depends for proper execution or results upon the work of any such other contractor or utility owner (or OWNER), CONTRACTOR shall inspect and promptly report to ENGINEER in writing any delays, defects or deficiencies in such work that render it unavailable or unsuitable for such proper execution and results. CONTRACTOR'S failure so to report will constitute an acceptance of [he other work as fit and proper for integration with CONTRACTOR'S Work except for latent '- or nonappazen[ defects and deficiencies in the other work. Coordination: 7.4 If OWNER contracts with others for the performance of other work on the Project at [he site, the person or organization who will have authority and responsibility for coordination of the activities among -° the various prime contractors will be identified in the Supplementary Conditions, and the specific matters to be covered by such authority and responsibility will be itemized, and the extent of such authority and responsibilities will be provided, in the Supplementary Conditions. Unless otherwise provided in the Supple- mentary Conditions, neither OWNER nor ENGINEER shall have any authority or responsibility in respect of such coordination. ARTICLE S -OWNER'S RESPONSIBILITIES 8.1 OWNER shall issue all communications to CONTRACTOR through ENGINEER. 8.2 Incase of termination of the employment of ENGINEER, OWNER shall appoint an engineer against whom CONTRACTOR makes no reasonable objection, whose status under the Contract Documents shall be that of the former ENGINEER. Any dispute in connection with such appointment shall be subject to arbitration. 8.3 OWNER shall furnish the data required of OWNER under the Contract Documents promptly and shall make payments to CONTRACTOR promptly after they are due as provided in paragraphs 14.4 and 14.13. 8.4 OWNER'S duties in respect of providing lands and easements and providing engineering surveys to establish reference points are set forth in paragraphs 4.1 and 4.4. Paragraph 4.2 refers to OWNER'S identifying and making available to CONTRACTOR copies of reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at the site and in existing structures which have been utilized by ENGINEER in preparing the Drawings and Specifications. 8.5 OWNER'S responsibilities in respect of purchasing and maintaining liability and property insurance are set forth in paragraphs 5.3. 8.6 OWNER is obligated to execute Change Orders as indicated in paragraph 10.4. 8.7 OWNER'S responsibility in respectof certain inspections, tests and approvals is set forth in paragraph 13.4. 8.8 In connection with OWNER'S right to stop Work or suspend Work, see paragraphs 13.10 and 15.1. Paragraph 15.2 deals with OWNER'S right to terminate services of CONTRACTOR under certain circumstances. GC-23 ARTICLE 9 -ENGINEER'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION OWNER's Renresentative: '° 9.1 ENGINEER will be GWNER's representative during [he construction period. The duties and re- sponsibilitiesand the limitations of authority of ENGINEER as O WNER's representative during construction aze set forth in the Contract Documents and shall not be extended without written consent of OWNER and ENGINEER. Visits to Site: 9.2 ENGINEER will make visits to the site at intervals appropriate to the various stages of construction to observe the progress and quality of the executed Work and to determine, in general, if the Work is .- proceeding in accordance with the Contract Documents. ENGINEER will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work. ENGINEER'S efforts will be directed toward providing for OWNER a greater degree of confidence that the completed ,._ Work will conform to the Contract Documents. On the basis of such visits and on-site observations as an experienced and qualified design professional, ENGINEER will keep OWNER informed of the progress of the Work and will endeavor to guard OWNER against defects and deficiencies in the Work. Proiect Representation: 9.3 If OWNER and ENGINEER agree, ENGINEER will furnish a Resident Project Representative to assist ENGINEER in observing the performance of the Work. The duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of any such Resident Project Representative and assistants will be as provided in the Supplementary Conditions. If OWNER designates another agent to represent OWNER at the site who is not ENGINEER'S agent or employee, the duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of such other person will be as provided in the Supplementary Conditions. °` Clarifications and Interuretations: 9.4 ENGINEER will issue with reasonable promptness such written clazifications or interpretations of the requirements of the Contract Documents (in the form of Drawings or otherwise) as ENGINEER may determine necessary, which shall be consistent with or reasonably inferable from the overall intent of the Contract Documents. If CONTRACTOR believes that a written clarification or interpretation justifies an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Time and the parties are unable to agree to the amount or extent thereof, CONTRACTOR may make a claim therefor as provided in Article 11 or Article 12. Authorized Variations in Work: 9.5 ENGINEER may authorize minor variations in the Work from the requirements of the Contract Docu- ments which do not involve an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Time and are consistent with the overall intent of the Contract Documents. These may be accomplished by a Field Order and will be binding on OWNER, and also on CONTRACTOR who shall perform the Work involved promptly. If CONTRACTOR believes that a Field Order justifies an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Time and the parties are unable to agree as to the amount or extent thereof, CONTRACTOR may GC-24 make a claim therefor as provided in Article 11 or 12. Reiectina Defective Work: 9.6 ENGINEER will have authority to disapprove or reject Work which ENGINEER believes to be defective, and will also have authority to require special inspection or testing of the Work as provided in paragraph 13.9, whether or not the Work is fabricated, installed or completed. `~ Shop Drawings. Change Orders and Payments: 9.7 In connection with ENGINEER'S responsibility for Shop Drawings and samples, see paragraph 6.23 ~' through 6.29 inclusive. 9.8 In connection with ENGINEER'S responsibilities as to Change Orders, see Articles 10, 11 and 12. 14. 9.9 In connection with ENGIIVEER's responsibilities in respect of Application for Payment, see Article Determinations for Unit Prices: .._ 9.10 ENGINEER will determine the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by CONTRACTOR. ENGINEER will review with CONTRACTOR ENGINEER'S preliminary determinations on such matters before rendering a written decision thereon (by recommendation of an Application for Payment or otherwise). ENGINEER'S written decisions thereon will be final and binding upon OWNER and CONTRACTOR, unless, within ten days after the date of any such decision, either OWNER or CONTRACTOR delivers to the other party to the Agreement and to ENGINEER written notice of intention to appeal from such a decision. Decisions on Disputes: 9.11 ENGINEER will be the initial interpreter of the requirements of the Contract Documents and judge of the acceptability of the Work thereunder. Claims, disputes and other matters relating to the acceptability of the Work or the interpretation of the requirements of the Contract Documents pertaining to the performance and furnishing of the Work and claims under Articles I1 and 12 in respect of changes in the Contract Price or Contract Time will be referred initially to ENGINEER in writing with a request for a -~ formal decision in accordance with this paragraph, which ENGINEER will render in writing within a reasonable time. Written notice of each such claim, dispute and other matter will be delivered by the claimant to ENGINEER and the other party to the Agreement promptly (but in no event later than thirty days) -- after The occurrence of the event giving rise thereto, and written supporting data will be submitted to ENGINEER and the other party within sixty days after such occurrence unless ENGINEER allows an additional period of time to ascertain more accurate data in support of the claim. 9.12 When functioning as interpreter and judge under paragraphs 9.10 and 9.11, ENGINEER will not show partiality to OWNER or CONTRACTOR and will not be liable in connection with any interpretation or decision rendered in good faith in such capacity. The rendering of a decision by ENGINEER pursuant to paragraphs 9.10 and 9.11 with respect to any such claim, dispute or other matter (except any which have been waived by the making or acceptance of final payment aS provided in paragraph 14.16) will be a GC-25 condition precedent to any exercise by OWNER or CONTRACTOR of such rights or remedies as either may otherwise have under the Contract Documents or by Laws or Regulations in respect of any such claim, "" dispute or other matter. - Limitations on ENGINEER'S Responsibilities: 9.13 Neither ENGINEER'S authority to act under this Article 9 or elsewhere in the Contract Documents -- nor any decision made by ENGINEER in good faith either to exercise or not exercise such authority shall give rise to any duty or responsibility of ENGIIVEER to CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or any other person or organization performing any of the Work, or to any surety for any of them. 9.14 Whenever in the Contract Documents the terms "as ordered", "as directed", "as required", "as allowed", "as approved" or terms of like effect or import are used, or the adjectives "reasonable", "suitable", "acceptable", "proper" or "satisfactory" or adjectives of like effect or import are used to describe a requirement, direction, review or judgment of ENGINEER as to the Work, it is intended that such requirement, direction, review or judgment will be solely to evaluate the Work for compliance with the ,._ Contract Documents (unless there is a specific statement indicating otherwise). The use of any such term or adjective shall not be effective to assign to ENGINEER any duty or authority to supervise or direct the furnishing or performance of the Work or any duty or authority to undertake responsibility contrary to the provisions of paragraph 9.15 or 9.16. 9.15 ENGINEER will not be responsible for CONTRACTOR'S means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, and ENGINEER will not be responsible for CONTRACTOR'S failure to perform or furnish the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 9.16 ENGINEER will not be responsible for the acts or omissions of CONTRACTOR or of any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or of any other person or organization performing or furnishing any of the Work. ARTICLE 10 -CHANGES IN THE WORK 10.1 Without invalidating the Agreement and without notice to any surety, OWNER may, at any time or from time to time, order additions, deletions or revisions in the Work; these will be authorized by a Written .. Amendment, a Change Order, or a Work Directive Change. Upon receipt of any such document, CONTRACTOR shall promptly proceed with the Work involved which will be performed under the applicable conditions of the Contract Documents (except as otherwise specifically provided). 10.2 If OWNER and CONTRACTOR are unable to agree as to the extent, if any, of an increase or decrease in the Contract Price or an extension or shortening of the Contract Time that should be allowed as a result of a Work Directive Change, a claim may he made therefor as provided in Article 11 or Article 12. 10.3 CONTRACTOR shall not be entitled to an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Time with respect to any Work performed that is not required by the Contract Documents as amended, modified and supplemented as provided in paragraphs 3.4 and 3.5, except in the case of an emergency as provided in paragraph 6.22 and except in the case of uncovering Work as provided in GC-26 paragraph 13.9. 10.4 OWNER and CONTRACTOR shall execute appropriate Change Orders (or Written Amendments) covering: ~' 10.4.1 changes in the Work which are ordered by OWNER pursuant to paragraph 10.1, are required because of acceptance of defective Work under paragraph 13.13 or correcting defective Work under paragraph 13.14, or are agreed to by the parties; 10.4.2 changes in the Contract Price or Contract Time which are agreed to by the parties; and 10.4.3 changes in the Contract Price or Contract time which embody the substance of any written decision rendered by ENGINEER pursuant to paragraph 9.11; provided that, in lieu of executing any such Change Order, an appeal may be taken from any such decision in accordance with the provisions of the Contract Documents and applicable Laws and Regulations, but during any such appeal, CONTRACTOR shall carry on the Work and adhere to the progress schedule as -- provided in paragraph 6.29. 10.5 If notice of any change affecting the general scope of the Work or the provisions of the Contract ,~ Documents (including, but not limited to, Contract Price or Contract Time) is required by the provisions of any Bond to be given to a surety, the giving of any such notice will be CONTRACTOR'S responsibility, and the amount of each applicable Bond will be adjusted accordingly. ARTICLE Il -CHANGE OF CONTRACT PRICE 11.1 The Contract Price constitutes the total compensation (subject to authorized adjustments) payable to CONTRACTOR for performing the Work. All duties, responsibilities and obligations assigned to or undertaken by CONTRACTOR shall be at his expense without change in the Contract Price. 11.2 The Contract Price may only be changed by a Change Order or by a Written Amendment. Any claim for an increase or decrease in the Contract Price shall be based on written notice delivered by the party °" making the claim to the other party and to ENGINEER promptly (but in no event later than thirty days) after the occurrence of the event giving rise to the claim and stating the general nature of the claim. Notice of the amount of the claim with supporting data shall be delivered within sixty days after such occurrence (unless ENGINEER allows an additional period of time to ascertain more accurate data in support of the claim) and shall be accompanied by claimant's written statement that the amount claimed covers all known amounts (direct, indirect and consequential) to which the claimant is entitled as a result of the occurrence of said _. event. All claims for adjustment in the Contract Price shall be determined by ENGINEER in accordance with paragraph 9.11 if OWNER and CONTRACTOR cannot otherwise agree on the amount involved. No claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price will be valid if not submitted in accordance with this paragraph 11.2. _ l 1.3 The value of any Work covered by a Change Order or of any claim for an increase or decrease in the Contract Price shall be determined in one of the following ways: ] 1.3.1 Where the Work involved is covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by application of unit prices to the quantities of the items involved (subject to the provisions of GG27 paragraph 11.9.1 through 11.9.3 inclusive). 11.3.2 By mutual acceptance of a lump sum (which may include an allowance for overhead and profit not necessarily in accordance with paragraph 11.6.2.1). ~" 11.3.3 On the basis of the Cost of the Work (determined as provided in paragraphs 11.4 and 11.5) plus a CONTRACTOR'S Fee for overhead and profit (determined as provided in pazagraphs 11.6 and 11.7). Cost of the Work• 11.4 The term Cost of the Work means the sum of all costs necessarily incurred and paid by CONTRAC- TOR in the proper performance of the Work. Except as otherwise may be agreed to in writing by OWNER, such costs shall be in amounts no higher than those prevailing in the locality of the Project, shall include only the following items and shall not include any of the costs itemized in paragraph 11.5: 11.4.1 Payroll costs for employees in the direct employ of CONTRACTOR in the performance of -- the Work under schedules of job classifications agreed upon by OWNER and CONTRACTOR. Payroll costs for employees not employed full time on the Work shall be apportioned on the basis of their time spent on the Work. Payroll costs shall include, but not be limited to, salaries and wages plus the cost of fringe benefits which shall include social security contributions, unemployment, excise and payroll taxes, workers' or workmen's compensation, health and retirement benefits, bonuses, sick leave, vacation and holiday pay applicable thereto. Such employees shall include ._ superintendents and foremen at the site. The expenses of performing Work after regular working hours, on Saturday, Sunday or legal holidays, shall be included in the above. 11.4.2 Cost of all materials and equipment famished and incorporated in the Work, including costs of transportation and storage thereof, and Suppliers' field services required in connection therewith. All cash discounts shall accrue to CONTRACTOR unless OWNER deposits funds with CONTRACTOR with which to make payments, in which case the cash discounts shall accrue to OWNER. All trade discounts, rebates and refunds and all returns from sale of surplus materials and equipment shall accrue to OWNER, and CONTRACTOR shall make provisions so that they may '° be obtained. 11.4.3 Payments made by CONTRACTOR to the Subcontractors for Work performed by Subcon- tractors. If required by OWNER, CONTRACTOR shall obtain competitive bids from Subcon- tractors acceptable to CONTRACTOR and shall deliver such bids to OWNER who will then deter- mine, with the advice of ENGINEER, which bids will be accepted. If a subcontract provides that ~. the Subcontractor is to be paid on the basis of Cost of the Work Plus a Fee, the Subcontractor's Cost of the Work shall be determined in the same manner as CONTRACTOR'S Cost of the Work. All subcontracts shall be subj ect to the other provisions of the Contract Documents insofar as applicable. 11.4.4 Costs of special consultants (including but not limited to engineers, architects, testing laboratories, surveyors, attorneys and accountants) employed for services specifically related to the Work. 11.4.5 Supplemental costs including the following: GC-2S 11.4.5.1 The proportion of necessary transportation, travel and subsistence expenses of .~ CONTRACTOR'S employees incurred in discharge of duties connected with the Work. 11.4.5.2 Cost, including transportation and maintenance, of all materials, supplies, equipment, machinery, appliances, office and temporary facilities at the site and hand tools not owned by the workers, which are consumed in the performance of the Work, and cost less market value of such items used but not consumed which remain the property of CONTRACTOR. 11.4.5.3 Rentals of all construction equipment and machinery and the parts thereof whether rented from CONTRACTOR or others in accordance with rental agreements approved by OWNER with the advice of ENGINEER, and [he costs of transportation, loading, unloading, '°' installation, dismantling and removal thereof-all in accordance with terms of said rental agree- ments. The rental of any such equipment, machinery or parts shall cease when the use thereof is no longer necessary for the Work. 11.4.5.4 Sales, consumer, use or similar taxes related to the Work, and for which CONTRACTOR is liable, imposed by Laws and Regulations. 11.4.5.5 Deposits lost for cause other than negligence of CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor ._ or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable, and royalty payments and fees for permits and licenses. ,_ 11.4.5.6 Losses and damages (and related expenses), not compensated by insurance or otherwise, to the Work or otherwise sustained by CONTRACTOR in connection with the performance and furnishing of the Work (except losses and damages within the deductible amounts of property insurance established by OWNER in accordance with paragraph 5.6), provided they have resulted from causes other than the negligence of CONTRACTOR, and Subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of Chem may be liable. Such losses shall include settlements made with the written consent and approval of OWNER. No such losses, damages and expenses shall be included in the Cost of the Work for the purpose of determining CONTRACTOR'S Fee. If, however, any such loss or damage requires reconstruction and CONTRACTOR is placed in charge thereof, ~' CONTRACTOR shall be paid for services a fee proportionate to that stated in paragraph 11.6.2. 11.4.5.7 The cost of utilities, fuel and sanitary facilities at the site. 11.4.5.8 Minor expenses such as telegrams, long distance telephone calls, telephone service at the site, expressage and similar petty cash items in connection with the Work. 11.4.5.9 Cost of premiums for additional Bonds and insurance required because of changes in the Work and premiums for property insurance coverage within the limits of the deductible amounts established by OWNER in accordance with paragraph 5.6. 11.5 The term Cost of the Work shall not include any of the following: 11.5.1 Payroll costs and other compensation of CONTRACTOR'S officers, executives, principals (of partnership and sole proprietorships), general managers, engineers, architects, estimators, GC-29 attorneys, auditors, accountants, purchasing and contracting agents, expediters, timekeepers, clerks ,,_ and other personnel employed by CONTRACTOR whether at the site or in CONTRACTOR'S principal or a branch office for general administration of the Work and not specifically included in the agreed upon schedule of j ob classifications referred to in paragraph 11.4.1 or specifically covered by paragraph 11.4.4 all of which are to be considered administrative costs covered by the CONTRACTOR'S Fee. 11.5.2 Expenses of CONTRACTOR's principal and branch offices other than CONTRACTOR'S office at the site. 11.5.3 Any part of CONTRACTOR'S capital expenses, including interest on CONTRACTOR'S "° capital employed for the Work and charges against CONTRACTOR for delinquent payments. 11.5.4 Cost of premiums for all Bonds and for all insurance whether or not CONTRACTOR is °°- required by the Contract Documents to purchase and maintain the same (except for the cost of premiums covered by subparagraph 11.4.5.9 above). •- 11.5.5 Costs due to the negligence of CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable, including but not limited to, the correction of defective Work, disposal of materials or equipment wrongly supplied ... and making good any damage to property. 11.5.6 Other overhead or general expense costs of any kind and the costs of any item not specifically and expressly included in paragraph 11.4. CONTRACTOR's Fee: 11.6 The CONTRACTOR'S Fee allowed to CONTRACTOR for overhead and profit shall be determined as follows: '"~ 11.6.1 a mutually acceptable fixed fee; or if none can be agreed upon. 11.6.2 a fee based on the following percentages of the various portions of the Cost of the Work: 11.6.2.1 for costs incurred under paragraphs 11.4.1 and 11.4.2, the CONTRACTOR'S Fee shall be fifteen percent; 11.6.2.2 for costs incurred under paragraph 11.4.3, the CONTRACTOR'S Fee shall be five percent; and if a subcontract is on the basis of Cost of the Work Plus a Fee, the maximum allowable to CONTRACTOR on account of overhead and profit of all Subcontractors shall be fifteen percent; ._ l 1.6.2.3 no fee shall be payable on the basis of costs itemized under paragraphs 11.4.4, 11.4.5 and 11.5; 1 1.6.2.4 the amount of credit to be allowed by CONTRACTOR to OWNER for any such change which results in a net decrease in cost will be the amount of the actual net decrease plus a deduction in CONTRACTOR'S Fee by an amount equal to ten percent of the net decrease; and GC-30 11.6.2.5 when both additions and credits are involved in any one change, the adjustment in CONTRACTOR'S Fee shall be computed on the basis of the net change in accordance with pazagraphs 11.6.2.1 through 11.6.2.4, inclusive. 11.7 Whenever the cost of any Work is to be determined pursuant to paragraph 11.4 or 11.5, w CONTRACTOR will submit in form acceptable to ENGINEER an itemized cost breakdown together with supporting data. W Unit Price Work: 11.9.1 Where the Contract Documents provide that all or part of the Work is to be Unit Price Work, "" initially the Contract Price will be deemed to include for all Unit Price Work an amount equal to the sum of the established unit prices for each sepazately identified item of Unit Frice Work times the estimated quantity of each item as indicated in the Proposal. The estimated quantities of items of '- Unit Price Work are not guaranteed and are solely for the purpose of comparison of Bids and determining an initial Contract Price. Determinations of the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by CONTRACTOR will be made by ENGINEER in accordance with --- Paragraph 9.10. 11.9.2 Each unit price will be deemed to include an amount considered by CONTRACTOR to be adequate to cover CONTRACTOR'S overhead and profit for each separately identified item. 11.9.3 Where the quantity of any item of Unit Price Work performed by CONTRACTOR differs ,,_ by more than twenty-five percent from the estimated quantity of such item indicated in the Proposal and there is no corresponding adjustment with respect to any other item of Work and if CONTRACTOR believes that CONTRACTOR has incurred additional expense as a result thereof, CONTRACTOR may make a claim for an increase in the Contract Price in accordance with Article 11 if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount of any such increase. ARTICLE 12 -CHANGE OF CONTRACT TIME 12.1 The Contract Time may be changed only by a Change Order or a Written Amendment. Any claim for an extension or shortening of the Contract Time shall be based on written notice delivered by the pazty "' making the claim to the other party and to ENGINEER promptly (but in no event later than thirty days) after the occurrence of the event giving risk to the claim and stating the general nature of the claim. Notice of the extent of the claim with supporting data shall be delivered within sixty days after such occurrence (unless -- ENGINEER allows an additional period of time to ascertain more accurate data in support of the claim) and shall be accompanied by The claimant's written statement that the adjustment claimed is the entire adjustment to which Che claimant has reason to believe it is entitled as a result of the occurrence of said event. All claims ~- for adjustment in the Contract Time shall be determined by ENGINEER in accordance with paragraph 9.11 if OWNER and CONTRACTOR cannot otherwise agree. No claim for an adjustment in the Contract Time will be valid if not submitted in accordance with the requirements of this paragraph 12.1. 12.2 The Contract Time will be extended in an amount equal to time lost due to delays beyond the control of CONTRACTOR if a claim is made therefor as provided in paragraph 12.1. Such delays shall include, but ,,- not be limited to, acts of neglect by OWNER or others performing additional work as contemplated by Article 7, or to fires, floods, labor disputes, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions or acts of God. GC-31 12.3 All time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Agreement. The provisions of this Article 12 shall not exclude recovery for damages (including but not limited to fees and __ charges of engineers, architects, attorneys and other professionals and court and arbitration costs) for delay by either party. ARTICLE 13 -WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE: TESTS AND INSPECTIONS; CORRECTION. REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK Warranty and Guarantee: - 13.1 CONTRACTOR warrants and guarantees to OWNER and ENGINEER that all Work will be in accordance with the Contract Documents and will not be defective. Prompt notice of all defects shall be given to CONTRACTOR. All defective Work, whether or not in place, may be rejected, corrected or -- accepted as provided in this Article 13. Access to Work• 13.2 ENGINEER and ENGINEER'S representatives, other representatives of OWNER, testing agencies and governmental agencies with jurisdictional interests will have access [o the Work at reasonable times for „_ their observation, inspecting and testing. CONTRACTOR shall provide proper and safe conditions for such access. - Tests and Inspections: 13.3 CONTRACTOR shall give ENGINEER timely notice of readiness of the Work for all required inspections, tests or approvals. 13.4 If Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction require any Work (or part thereof) [o specifically be inspected, tested or approved, CONTRACTOR shall assume full responsibility therefor, `"` pay all costs in connection therewith and furnish ENGINEER the required certificates of inspection, testing or approval. CONTRACTOR shall also be responsible for and shall pay all costs in connection with any inspection or testing required in connection with OWNER'S or ENGINEER'S acceptance of a Supplier of ~- materials or equipment submitted for approval prior to CONTRACTOR'S purchase thereof for incorporation in the Work. The cost of all inspections, tests and approvals in addition to the above which are required by the Contract Documents shall be paid by OWNER (unless otherwise specified). 13.5 All inspections, tests or approvals other than those required by Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction shall be performed by organizations acceptable to OWNER and CONTRACTOR ._ (or by ENGINEER if so specified). 13.6 If any Work (including the work of others) that is to be inspected, tested or approved is covered .,_, without written concurrence of ENGINEER, it must, if requested by ENGINEER, be uncovered for observa- tion. Such uncovering shall be at CONTRACTOR'S expense unless CONTRACTOR has given ENGINEER timely notice of CONTRACTOR'S intention to cover the same and ENGINEER has not acted with reasonable ,_ promptness in response to such notice. 13.7 Neither observations by ENGINEER nor inspections, tests or approvals by others shall relieve GC-32 CONTRACTOR from CONTRACTOR'S obligations to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Uncoverine Work: 13.8 If any Work is covered contrary to the written request of ENGINEER, it must, if requested by ENGINEER, be uncovered for ENGINEER'S observation and replaced at CONTRACTOR'S expense. 13.9 If ENGINEER considers it necessary or advisable that covered Work be observed by ENGINEER or inspected or tested by others, CONTRACTOR, at ENGINEER'S request, shall uncover, expose or otherwise make available for observation, inspection or testing as ENGINEER may require, that portion of the Work in question, furnishing all necessary labor, material and equipment. If it is found that such Work is defective, CONTRACTOR shall bear all direct, indirect and consequential costs of such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection and testing and of satisfactory reconstruction, (including but not limited to fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys and other professionals), and OWNER shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price, and, if the parties are unable [o agree as to the amount thereof, may make a claim therefor as provided in Article 11. If, however, such Work is no[ found to be defective, CONTRACTOR shall be allowed an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Time, or both, directly attributable to such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, testing and reconstruction; and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount or extent thereof, CONTRACTOR may make a claim therefor as provided in Articles 11 and 12. OWNER Mav Stop the Work: ._~ 13.10 If the Work is defective, or CONTRACTOR fails to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment, or fails to furnish or perform the Work in such a way that the completed Work will conform to the Contract Documents. OWNER may order CONTRACTOR to stop the Work, or any portion m thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated; however, this right of OWNER to stop the Work shall not give rise to any duty on the part of OW NER to exercise this right for the benefit of CONTRACTOR or any other party. Correction or Removal of Defective Work: 13.11 If required by ENGINEER, CONTRACTOR shall promptly, as directed, either correct all defective "" Work, whether or not fabricated, installed or completed, or, if the Work has been rejected by ENGINEER, remove it from the site and replace it with nondefective Work. CONTRACTOR shall bear all direct, indirect and consequential costs of such correction or removal (including but not limited to fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys and other professionals) made necessary thereby. One Year Warranty Period: 13.12 If within one year after the date of Substantial Completion or such longer period of time as may be prescribed by Laws or Regulations or by the terms of any applicable special guarantee required by the Contract Documents or by any specific Provision of the Contract Documents, any Work is found to be defective, CONTRACTOR shall promptly, without cost to OWNER and in accordance with OWNER'S written instructions, either correct such defective Work, or if it has bean rejected by OWNER, remove it from GC-33 the site and replace it with nondefective Work. If CONTRACTOR does not promptly comply with the terms of such instructions, or in an emergency where delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage, OWNER may have the defective Work corrected or the rejected Work removed and replaced, and all direct, indirect and consequential costs of such removal and replacement (including but not limited to fees and charges of _~ engineers, architects, attorneys and other professionals) will be paid by CONTRACTOR. In special circum- stances where a particular item of equipment is placed in continuous service before Substantial Completion of all Work, the correction period for that item may start to run from an eazlier date if so provided in the Specifications or by Written Amendment. Acceutance of Defective Work: 13.13 If, instead of requiring correction or removal and replacement of defective Work, OWNER (and, priorto ENGINEER'S recommendation of final payment, also ENGINEER) prefers to accept it, OWNER may do so. CONTRACTOR shall beaz all direct, indirect and consequential costs attributable to OWNER'S "' evaluation of and detemvnation to accept such defective Work (such costs to be approved by ENGINEER as to reasonableness and to include but not be limited to fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys and other professionals). If any such acceptance occurs prior to ENGINEER'S recommendation of final "` payment, a Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work; and OWNER shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price, and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, OWNER may make a claim therefor as provided in Article 11. If the acceptance occurs after such recommendation, an appropriate amount will be paid by CONTRACTOR to OWNER. -. OWNER May correct Defective Work: 13.14 If CONTRACTOR fails within a reasonable time after written notice of ENGINEER to proceed and to correct defective Work or to remove and replace rejected Work as required by ENGINEER in accordance with paragraph 1311, or if CONTRACTOR fai]s to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, or if CONTRACTOR fails to comply with any other provision of the Contract Documents, OWNER may, after seven days' written notice to CONTRACTOR, correct and remedy any such deficiency. In exercising the rights and remedies under this paragraph OWNER shall proceed expeditiously. To the extent necessary to complete corrective and remedial action, OWNER may exclude CONTRACTOR from all or part of the site, take possession of all or part of the Work, and suspend CONTRACTOR'S services related thereto, take possession of CONTRACTOR'S tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery at the site and incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the site or for which OWNER has paid CONTRACTOR but which are stored elsewhere. CONTRACTOR shall allow OWNER, "` OWNER'S representatives, agents and employees such access to the site as may be necessary to enable OWNER to exercise the rights and remedies under this paragraph. All direct, indirect and consequential costs of OWNER in exercising such rights and remedies under this paragraph will be charged against '- CONTRACTOR in an amount approved as to reasonableness by ENGINEER, and a Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessazy revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work; and OWNER shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price, and, if the parties are unable to •- agree as to the amount thereof, OWNER may make a claim therefor as provided in Article 11. Such direct, indirect and consequential costs will include but not be limited to fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys and other professionals, all court and arbitration costs and all costs of repair and replacement of •-- work of others destroyed or damaged by correction, removal or replacement of CONTRACTOR'S defective Work. CONTRACTOR shall not be allowed an extension of the Contract Time because of any delay in performance of the Work attributable to the exercise by OWNER of OWNER'S rights and remedies GC-34 hereunder. ARTICLE 14 -PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION Schedule of Values: 14.1 The schedule of values established as provided in paragraph 2.9 will serve as the basis for progress payments and will be incorporated into a form of Application for Payment acceptable to ENGINEER. Progress payments on account of Unit Price Work will be based on the number of units completed. Application for Progress Payment: 14.2 At least fifteen days before each progress payment is scheduled (but not more often than once a month), CONTRACTOR shall submit to ENGINEER for review an Application for Payment filled out and signed by CONTRACTOR covering the Work completed as of the date of the Application and accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Contract Documents. If payment is requested on the basis of materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work but delivered and suitably stored at the site or at another location agreed to in writing, the Application for Payment shall also be accompanied by a bill of sale, invoice or other documentation warranting that OWNER has received the materials and equipment .- free and clear of all liens, charges, security interests and encumbrances (which are hereinafter in these General Conditions referred to as "Liens") and evidence that the materials and equipment are covered by appropriate property insurance and other arrangements to protect OWNER's interest therein, all of which will ._ be satisfactory to OWNER. The amount of retainage with respect to progress payments will be as stipulated in the Agreement. CONTRACTOR'S Warranty of Title: 14.3 CONTRACTOR warrants and guarantees that title to all Work, materials and equipment covered by an Application for Payment, whether incorporated in the Project or not, will pass to OWNER no later than the time of payment free and clear of all Liens. Review of Aoolications for Progress Payment: 14.4 ENGINEER will, within five days after receipt of each Application for Payment, either indicate in writing a recommendation of payment and present the Application to OWNER, or return the Application to °° CONTRACTOR indicating in writing ENGINEER'S reasons for refusing to recommend payment. In the latter case, CONTRACTOR may make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application. Ten days after presentation of the Application for Payment with ENGINEER'S recommendation, the amount recommended will (subject to the provisions of the last sentence of paragraph 14.7) become due and when due will be paid by OWNER to CONTRACTOR. --- 14.5 ENGINEER's recommendation of any payment requested in an Application for Payment will consti- tute arepresentation by ENGINEER to OWNER, based on ENGINEER'S on-site observations of the Work in progress as an experienced and qualified design professional and on ENGINEER'S review of the GC-35 Application for Payment and the accompanying data and schedules that the Work has progressed to the point indicated; that, to the best of ENGINEER'S knowledge, information and belief, the quality of the Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents (subject to an evaluation of the Work as a functioning whole prior to or upon Substantial Completion, to the results of any subsequent tests called for in the Contract Docu- __ ments, to a final determination of quantities and classifications for Unit Price Work under paragraph 9.10, and to any other qualifications stated in the recommendation); and that CONTRACTOR is entitled to payment of the amount recommended. However, by recommending any such payment ENGINEER will no[ thereby be deemed to have represented that exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections have been made to check the quality or the quantity of the Work beyond the responsibilities specifically assigned to ENGINEER in the Contract Documents or that there may not be other matters or issues between the parties that might entitle CONTRACTOR to be paid additional ly by OWNER or O WNER to withhol d payment to CONTRAC- TOR. 14.6 ENGINEER'S recommendation of final payment will constitute an additional representation by ENGINEER to OWNER that the conditions precedent to CONTRACTOR'S being entitled to final payment as set forth in paragraph 14.13 have been fulfilled. '~ 14.7 ENGINEER may refuse to recommend the whole or any part of any payment if, in ENGINEER'S opinion, it would be incorrect to make such representations to OWNER. ENGINEER may also refuse to recommend any such payment, or, because of subsequently discovered evidence or the results of subsequent ~-- inspections or tests, nullify any such payment previously recommended, to such extern as may be necessary in ENGINEER'S opinion to protect OWNER from loss because: .... 14.7.1 the Work is defective, or completed Work has been damaged requiring correction or replace- ment, 14.7.2 the Contract Price has been reduced by Written Amendment or Change Order. 14.7.3 OWNER has been required to correct defective Work or complete Work in accordance with paragraph 13.14, or 14.7.4 of ENGINEER'S actual knowledge of the occurrence of any of the events enumerated in paragraphs 15.2.1 through 15.2.9 inclusive. OWNER may refuse to make payment of the full amount recommended by ENGINEER because claims have been made against OWNER on account of CONTRACTOR'S performance or furnishing of the W ork or Liens have been filed in connection with the Work or there are other items entitling OWNER to a set-off against the amount recommended, but OWNER must give CONTRACTOR immediate written notice (with a copy to ENGINEER) stating the reasons for such action. Substantial Completion: 14.8 When CONTRACTOR considers the entire Work ready for its intended use CONTRACTOR shall notify OWNER and ENGINEER in writing that the entire Work is substantially complete (except for items specifically listed by CONTRACTOR as incomplete) and request that ENGINEER issue a certificate of Substantial Completion. Within a reasonable time thereafter, OWNER, CONTRACTOR and ENGINEER shall make an inspection of the Work to determine the status of completion. If ENGINEER does not consider the Work substantially complete, ENGINEER will notify CONTRACTOR in writing giving the reasons GC-36 therefor. If ENGINEER considers the Work substantially complete, ENGINEER will prepare and deliver ,_ to OWNER a tentative certificate of Substantial Completion which shall fix the date of Substantial Completion. There shall be attached to the certificate a tentative list of items to be completed or corrected before final payment. OWNER shall have seven days after receipt of the tentative certificate during which ,_, to make written objection to ENGINEER as to any provisions of the certificate or attached list. IF, after considering such objections, ENGINEER concludes that the Work is not substantially complete, ENGINEER will within fourteen days after submission of the tentative certificate to OWNER notify CONTRACTOR in writing, stating the reasons therefor. If, after consideration of OWNER's objections, ENGINEER considers the Work substantially complete, ENGINEER will within said fourteen days execute and deliver to OWNER and CONTRACTOR a definitive certificate of Substantial Completion (with a revised tentative list of items to be completed or corrected) reflecting such changes from the tentative certificate as ENGINEER believes justified after consideration of any objections from OWNER. At the time of delivery of the tentative certificate of Substantial Completion ENGINEER will deliver to OWNER and CONTRACTOR a written recommendation as to division of responsibilities pending final payment between OWNER and "' CONTRACTOR with respect to security, operation, safety, maintenance, heat, utilities, insurance and warranties. Unless OWNER and CONTRACTOR agree otherwise in writing and so inform ENGINEER prior to ENGINEER'S issuing the definitive certificate of Substantial Completion, ENGINEER'S aforesaid "' recommendation will be binding on OWNER and CONTRACTOR until final payment. 14.9 OWNER shall have the right to exclude CONTRACTOR from the Work after the date of Substantial -- Completion, but OWNER shall allow CONTRACTOR reasonable access to complete or correct items on the tentative list. e_ Partial Utilization: 14.10 Use by OWNER of any finished part of the Work, which has specifically been identified in the Contract Documents, or which OWNER, ENGINEER and CONTRACTOR agree constitutes a separately functioning and usable part of the Work that can be used by OWNER without significant interference with CONTRACTOR'S performance of the remainder of the Work, may be accomplished prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work subject to the Following: 14.10.1 OWNER at any time may request CONTRACTOR in writing to permit OWNER to use any such part of the Work which OWNER believes to be ready for its intended use and substantially r complete. If CONTRACTOR agrees, CONTRACTOR will certify to OWNER and ENGINEER that said part of the Work is substantially complete and request ENGINEER to issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work. CONTRACTOR at any time may notify OWNER '"° and ENGINEER in writing that CONTRACTOR considers any such part of the Work ready for its intended use and substantially complete and request ENGINEER to issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work. Within a reasonable time after either such request, OWNER, CONTRACTOR and ENGINEER shall make an inspection of that part of the W ork to determine its status of completion. If ENGINEER does not consider that part of the Work to be substantially complete, ENGINEER will notify OWNER and CONTRACTOR in writing giving the reasons therefor. If ENGINEER considers that part of the Work to be substantially complete, the provisions of paragraph 14.8 and 14.9 will apply with respect to certification of Substantial Completion of that part of the Work and the division of responsibility in respect thereof and access thereto. 14.10.2 OWNER may at any time request CONTRACTOR in writing to permit OWNER to take over operation of any such part of the Work although it is not substantially complete. A copy of GC-37 such request will be sent to ENGINEER and within a reasonable time thereafter OWNER, .~ CONTRACTOR and ENGINEER shall make an inspection of that part of the Work to determine its status of completion and will prepaze a list of the items remaining to be completed or corrected thereon before final payment. If CONTRACTOR does not object in writing to OWNER and ENGINEER that such pazt of the Work is not ready for separate operation by OWNER, ENGINEER will finalize the list of items to be completed or corrected and will deliver such list to OWNER and CONTRACTOR together with a written recommendation as to the division of responsibilities pending final payment between OWNER and CONTRACTOR with respect to security, operation, safety, maintenance, utilities, insurance, warranties and guarantees for that part of the Work which will become binding upon OWNER and CONTRACTOR at the time when OWNER takes over such operation (unless they shall have otherwise agreed in writing and so informed ENGINEER). During ~` such operation and prior to Substantial Completion of such part of the Work, OWNER shall allow CONTRACTOR reasonable access to complete or correct items on said list and to complete other related Work. 14.10.3 No occupancy or sepazate operation of part of the Work will be accomplished prior to compliance with the requirements of paragraph 5.11 in respect of property insurance. Final Inspection: 14.11 Upon written notice from CONTRACTOR that the entire Work or an agreed portion thereof is complete, ENGINEER will make a final inspection with OWNER and CONTRACTOR and will notify CONTRACTOR in writing of all particulars in which this inspection reveals that the Work is incomplete or ,_ defective. CONTRACTOR shall immediately take such measures as are necessary [o remedy such defi- ciencies. Final Application for Payment: 14.12 After CONTRACTOR has completed all such corrections to the satisfaction of ENGINEER and delivered all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, Bonds, certificates of inspection, marked-up record documents (as provided in paragraph 6.19) and other documents -all as required by the Contract Documents, and after ENGINEER has indicated that the Work is acceptable (subject to the provisions of pazagraph 14.16), CONTRACTOR may make application for final payment following the procedure for progress payments. The final Application for Payment shall be accompanied by all documentation called for in the Contract Documents, together with complete and legally effective releases or waivers (satisfactory to OWNER) of all Liens arising out of or filed in connection with the Work. In lieu '- thereof and as approved by OWNER, CONTRACTOR may furnish receipts or releases in full; an affidavit of CONTRACTOR that the releases and receipts include all labor, services, material and equipment For which a Lien could be filed, and that all payrolls, material and equipment bills, and other indebtedness -- connected with the Work for which OWNER or OWNER's property might in any way be responsible, have been paid or otherwise satisfied; and consent of the surety, if any, to final payment. If any Subcontractor or Supplier fails to furnish a release or receipt in full, CONTRACTOR may furnish a Bond or other collateral -- satisfactory to OWNER to indemnify OWNER against any Lien. Final Payment and Acceptance: 14.13 If, on the basis of ENGINEER'S observation of the Work during construction and final inspection, and ENGINEER'S review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation -all as GC-38 required by the Contract Documents, ENGINEER is satisfied that the Work has been completed and CONTRACTOR'S other obligations under the Contract Documents have been fulfilled, ENGINEER will, within ten days afer receipt of the Final Application for Payment, indicate in writing ENGINEER'S recommendation of payment and present the Application to OWNER for payment. Thereupon ENGINEER will give written notice to OWNER and CONTRACTOR that the Work is acceptable subject Co the provisions of paragraph 14.16. Otherwise, ENGINEER will return the Application to CONTRACTOR, indicating in writing the reasons for refusing to recommend final payment, in which case CONTRACTOR ,_ shall make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application. Thirty days after presentation to OWNER of the Application and accompanying documentation, in appropriate form and substance, and with ENGINEER'S recommendation and notice of acceptability, the amount recommended by ENGINEER will become due and will be paid by OWNER to CONTRACTOR. 14.14 If, through no fault of CONTRACTOR, final completion of the Work is significantly delayed and if ENGINEER so confirms, OWNER shall, upon receipt of CONTRACTOR'S final Application for Payment and recommendation of ENGINEER, and without terminating the Agreement, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted. If the remaining balance to be held by OWNER for Work not fully completed or corrected is less than the retainage stipulated in the Agreement, "" and if Bonds have been furnished as required in paragraph 5.1, the written consent of the surety to the payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by CONTRACTOR to ENGINEER with the Application for such payment. Such payment shall be made under °° the terms and conditions governing final payment, except that it shall not constitute a waiver of claims. Contractor's Continuine Obligation: 14.15 CONTRACTOR'S obligation to perform and complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents shall be absolute. Neither recommendation of any progress or final payment by ENGINEER, ,._ nor the issuance of a certificate of Substantial Completion, nor any payment by OWNER to CONTRACTOR under the Contract Documents, nor any use or occupancy of [he Work or any part thereof by OWNER, nor any pact of acceptance by OWNER nor any failure to do so, nor any review of a Shop Drawing or sample submission, nor the issuance of a notice of acceptability by ENGINEER pursuant to paragraph 14.13, nor any correction of defective Work by OWNER will constitute an acceptance of Work not in accordance with the Contract Documents or a release of CONTRACTOR'S obligation to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents (except as provided in paragraph 14.16). Waiver of Claims: "` 14.16 The making and acceptance of final payment will constitute: 14.16.1 a waiver of all claims by OWNER against CONTRACTOR, except claims arising from '° unsettled Liens, from defective Work appearing after final inspection pursuant to paragraph 14.11 or from failure to comply with the Contract Documents or the terms of any special guarantees specified therein; however, it will not constitute a waiver by OWNER of any rights in respect of m- CONTRACTOR'S continuing obligations under the Contract Documents; and 14.16.2 a waiver of all claims by CONTRACTOR against OWNER other than those previously -- made in writing and still unsettled. GC-39 ARTICLE 15 -SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION OWNER Mav Suspend Work: 15.1 OWNER may, at any time and without cause, suspend the Work or any portion thereof for a period of not more than ninety days by notice in writing to CONTRACTOR and ENGINEER which will fix the date on which Work will be resumed. CONTRACTOR shall resume the Work on the date so fixed. CONTRACTOR shall be allowed an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Time, or ... both, directly attributable to any suspension if CONTRACTOR makes an approved claim therefor as provided in Articles 11 and 12. OWNER Mav Terminate: 1.5.2 Upon the occurrence of any one or more of the following events 15.2.1 if CONTRACTOR commences a voluntary case under any chapter of the Bankruptcy Code (Title 11, United States Code), as now or hereafter in effect, or if CONTRACTOR takes any "" equivalent or similar action by filing a petition or otherwise under any other federal or state law in effect at such time relating to the bankruptcy or insolvency; °- 15.2.2 if a petition is filed against CONTRACTOR under any chapter of the Bankruptcy Code as now or hereafter in effect at the time of filing, or if a petition is filed seeking any such equivalent or similar relief against CONTRACTOR under any other federal or state law in effect at the time relating to bankruptcy or insolvency; 15.2.3 if CONTRACTOR makes a general assignment for the benefit of creditors; 15.2.4 if a trustee, receiver, custodian or agent of CONTRACTOR is appointed under applicable law orunder contract, whose appointment or authority to take charge of property of CONTRACTOR is for the purpose of enforcing a Lien against such property or for the purpose of general admini- stration of such property for the benefit of CONTRACTOR'S creditors; 15.2.5 if CONTRACTOR admits in writing an inability to pay its debts generally as they become m due; 15.2.6 if CONTRACTOR persistently fails to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract "' Documents (including, but not limited to, failure to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment or failure to adhere to the progress schedule established under paragraph 2.9 as revised from time to time); 15.2.7 if CONTRACTOR disregards Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction; -- 15.2.8 if CONTRACTOR disregards the authority of ENGINEER; or OWNER may, after giving CONTRACTOR (and the surety, if there be one) seven days' written notice and to the extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, terminate the services of CONTRACTOR, exclude CONTRACTOR from the site and take possession of the Work and of all CONTRACTOR'S tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery at Che site and use the same to the full extent they could GC-40 be used by CONTRACTOR (without liability to CONTRACTOR for trespass or conversion), incorporate _. in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the site or for which OWNER has paid CONTRACTOR but which are stored elsewhere, and finish the Work as OWNER may deem expedient. In such case CONTRACTOR shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the Work is finished. If [he unpaid ,._ balance of the Contract Price exceeds the direct, indirect and consequential costs of completing the Work (including but not limited to fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys and other professionals and court and arbitration costs) such excess will be paid to CONTRACTOR. If such costs exceed such unpaid ,,_ balance, CONTRACTOR shall pay the difference to OWNER. Such costs incurred by OWNER will be approved as to reasonableness by ENGINEER and incorporated in a Change Order, but when exercising any rights or remedies under this paragraph OWNER shall not be required to obtain the lowest price for the Work performed. 15.3 Where CONTRACTOR'S services have been so terminated by OWNER, the termination will not affect any rights or remedies of OWNER against CONTRACTOR then existing or which may thereafter ~+ accme. Any retention or payment of moneys due CONTRACTOR by OWNER will not release CONTRACTOR from liability. "` 15.4 Upon seven days'written notice to CONTRACTOR and ENGINEER, OWNER may, without cause and without prejudice to any other right or remedy, elect to abandon the Work and terminate the Agreement. In such case, CONTRACTOR shall be paid for all Work executed and any expense sustained plus reasonable -- termination expenses, which will include, but not be limited to, direct, indirect and consequential costs (including, butnot limited to, fees and charges of engineers, architects, attomeys and other professionals and court and arbitration costs). Contractor May Stop Work or Terminate: __ 15.5 If, through no act or fault of CONTRACTOR, the Work is suspended for a period of more than ninety days by OWNER or under an order of court or other public authority, or ENGINEER fails to act on any Application for Payment within thirty days to pay CONTRACTOR any sum finally determined to be due, then CONTRACTOR may, upon seven days' written notice to OWNER and ENGINEER, terminate the Agreement and recover from OWNER payment for all Work executed and any expense sustained plus reasonable termination expenses. In addition and in lieu of terminating the Agreement, if ENGINEER has failed to act on an Application for Payment or OWNER and ENGINEER stop the Work until payment of all amounts then due. The provisions of this paragraph shall not relieve CONTRACTOR of the obligations under paragraph 6:29 to carry on the Work in accordance with the progress schedule and without delay during disputes and disagreements with OWNER. ARTICLE 16 -DISPUTE RESOLUION 16.1 In the event either or both parties declare the Agreement null and void, or that said Agreement has been breached by either or both parties, before any legal action is taken by either party, said parties hereby agree that such dispute shall be submitted to non-binding mediation for the purpose of attempting to reconcile said dispute. 16.2 In the event mediation is invoked pursuant to paragraph 4.5.1 of this Agreement, said parties shall make a reasonable good faith effort to mutually agree upon a neutral mediator who shall qualify and comply -- with any and all statutory requirements set forth by state law. 16.3 The applicable laws of the State of Texas shall govern this Agreement, venue shall be in Kerr GC-41 County, Texas. ARTICLE 17 -MISCELLANEOUS Giving Notice• 17.1 Whenever any provision of the Contract Documents requires the giving of written notice, it will be deemed to have been validly given if delivered in person to the individual or to a member of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended, or if delivered at or sent by registered or certified mail, postage prepaid, to the last business address known to the giver of the notice. `~ Comoutation of Time: 17.2.1 When any period of time is referred to in the Contract Documents by days, it will be "" computed to exclude the first and include the last day of such period. If the last day of any such period falls on a Saturday or Sunday or on a day made a legal holiday by the law of the applicable jurisdiction, such day will be omitted from the computation. 17.2.2 A calendar day of twenty-four hours measured from midnight to the next midnight shall constitute a day. General• ... 17.3 Should OWNER or CONTRACTOR suffer injury or damage to person or property because of any error, omission or act of the other party or of any of the other party's employees or agents or others for whose acts the other party is legally liable, claim will be made in writing to the other party within a reasonable time of the first observance of such injury or damage. The provisions of this paragraph 17.3 shall not be construed as a substitute for or a waiver of the provisions of any applicable statute of limitations or repose. 17.4 The duties and obligations imposed by these General Conditions and the rights and remedies avail- '- able hereunder to the parties hereto, and, in particular but without limitation, the warranties, guarantees and obligations imposed upon CONTRACTOR by paragraphs 6.30, 13.1, 13.13, 13.14, 14.3 and 15.2 and all of the rights and remedies available to OWNER and ENGINEER thereunder, are in addition, to and are not to be construed in any way as a limitation of, any rights and remedies available to any or all of them which are otherwise imposed or available by Laws or Regulations, by special warranty or guarantee or by other provisions of the Contract Documents, and the provisions of this paragraph will be as effective as if repeated `-' specifically in the Contract Documents in connection with each particular duty, obligation, right and remedy to which they apply. All representations, warranties and guarantees made in the Contract Documents will survive final payment and termination or completion of the Agreement. GC-42 ._ SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS SC-I LOCATION OF PROJECT The project is located in the County of Kerr, Texas. SC-2 SCOPE OF WORK The work to be performed under this contract consists of furnishing all material, equipment, accessories, and labor for performing all operations necessary to complete the Construction of the Town Creek Crossing # 2 fridge Improvements. All work shall be accomplished as specified herein, and as shown on the Construction Drawings. SC-3 CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS The construction drawings for this project consist of drawings numbered 1 thru 10 entitled Town Creek Crossing # 2 Bridge Improvements, which drawings are hereby referred to and made a part of the specifications. SC-4 REQUIRED PERMITS AND ADVANCED NOTIFICATION .... Any and all permits by local governments shall be obtained by the Contractor at his expense. No extra payment will be made for these costs. These anticipated expenses shall be included in the unit prices bid for the construction of the project. The Contractor shall also be responsible for providing advanced ,_ notification to any and all agencies requiring such advanced notification for purposes such as inspection, approval, etc. SC-5 RIGHT OF ENTRY At all times, representatives of the Owner and Engineer personnel shall have the right to enter and inspect any and/or all parts of the project for compliance with the drawings and specifications. SC-6 TESTING OF MATERIALS Testing of all materials to be incorporated into the project will be made as directed by the Engineer at the expense of the Owner. All retesting will be at the expense of the Contractor. The testing laboratory will ~- be designated by the Engineer and all materials must meet the specification requirements. For materials furnished by a manufacturer such as reinforcing steel, expansion j oint materials, concrete pipe, cement, miscellaneous steel, cast iron materials, etc., the Contractor will be required to furnish a manufacturer's certificate stating that the material meets the requirements specified for this project, SC-7 CONSTRUCTION STAKING The contractor will be responsible for construction staking and therefore, should include in his unit price bidding, costs for the surveying and replacement of any pins. SC-1 SC-8 BASIS OF PAYMENT -.. Basis of measurement and payment of the Specifications shall apply except where otherwise specified or noted on the Plans. SC-9 METHOD OF PAYMENT Contractor shall submit Applications for Payment in accordance with Article 14 of the General Conditions. Applications for Payment will be processed by the ENGINEER as provided in the General Conditions. 10.1 Progress Payments. OWNER shall make progress payments on the basis of °' CONTRACTOR'S Applications for Payment for the amount of work completed to date and as recommended by the ENGINEER. The CONTRACTOR shall submit to the ENGINEER his Application for Payment on or before the Fifth (5`h) day of each month showing as is reasonably possible the total value of the work completed by the CONTRACTOR up to and including the last day of the preceding month. After reviewing the CONTRACTOR' S Application for Payment, the ENGINEER shall submit recommendations to the OWNER by the Tenth (10`"} day of the month. The OWNER shall then pay the CONTRACTOR on or before the last day of the current month. a. Prior to Substantial Completion of work, progress payments shall be in the amount equal to 90 percent of work completed, and 90 percent of materials and equipment not incorporated in the work but delivered and suitable stored, less _ the aggregate of payments previously made. b. Upon Substantial Completion, OWNER shall pay the amount sufficient to increase total payments to CONTRACTOR to 95 percent of the Contract Price, less such amount as the ENGINEER shall determine necessary to cover defective work or work not completed. '- 10? Final Payment. Upon final completion and acceptance of the Work in accordance with Section 14.13 of the Supplementary Conditions, OWNER shall pay the remainder of the Contract Price as recommended by the ENGINEER and as provided in said section "- 14.13. SC-10 CLEARING AND GRUBBING The Contractor shall clear and grub all areas necessary for the construction of his work. All trees shall be removed which are in the way of construction or where the excavation or fill around the trees are likely to cause the trees to die. SC-11 COORDINATION OF CONSTRUCTION SC-2 _ Each Contractor involved in this project shall perform his work in such a manner as not to delay other construction work on the site. ._ SC-12 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS Each Contractor shall maintain a separate set of Contract Drawings on the job site to fully indicate as- __ built conditions at no additional cost to the Owner. These drawings shall be maintained in a current condition at all times until completion of the work and shall be available for review by the Engineer at al] times. All variations from the Contract Drawings, after approval by the Engineer, shall be indicated. These variations shall be shown on the same general detail utilized in the initial Contract Drawings. Upon completion of the work, the marked up set of drawings shall be furnished to the Engineer. SC-13 PROPOSAL QUANTITIES The proposal quantities are for bidding purposes and final payment will be only for work performed and accepted by the Owner. The Contractor shall verify the quantities required before ordering materials and "- shall notify the Engineer if the quantities appear to exceed the bid quantities by more than ten percent (10%). The Contractor shall notify the Engineer at any time that actual field conditions appear to be significantly different from the Plans. Changes proposed by City personnel that would cause a °"° significant change in the cost or function of the facility shall be reported to the Engineer and approved before proceeding. Significant cost changes shall only be authorized by approved change orders. -- SC-14 CLEAN UP All Contractors, at their own expense, will be responsible for the removal of the excess materials and „_ trash left by their phase of construction. 1f excess dirt is generated from trenches or grading etc., it shall be removed and hauled off site. Each Contractor shall restore and/or replace gravel, paving, curbing, sidewalks, gutters, fences, sod, or other disturbed surfaces to a condition equal to that before work began and to the satisfaction of the Owner or his representative. SC-15 LOCAL CONDITIONS AFFECTING WORK Each bidder shall visit the job site and thoroughly acquaint himself relative to construction hazards and "- procedure, labor and all other conditions and factors, local and otherwise, which would affect the prosecution and completion of the work and the cost thereof, including the availability and cost of labor, and available facilities for transportation, handling and storage of materials, and equipment. It must be "` understood and agreed that all such factors have been properly investigated and considered in the preparation of every proposal submitted, as there will be no subsequent financial adjustment, to any contract awarded thereunder, which is based on the lack of such prior information or its effect on the cost --" of the work. SC-16 INSPECTION The Engineer shall decide any and all questions that may arise as to the quality and acceptability of the materials furnished, the work performed, the manner of performance and the rate of progress of the work. SC-3 He shall decide all questions which may arise as to the interpretation of the drawings and specifications, all questions as to the acceptable fulfillment of the contract, and all disputes and mutual rights by the Contractors, if there be more than one Contractor on the project. Any inspection performed at times other than between the hours of 8:00 A.M. and 5:00 P.M., Monday through Friday, or on holidays that may fall on a week day shall be at the Contractor's expense at a cost _ of forty-five dollars ($45.00) per hour. The minimum charge for weekend (Saturday or Sunday) or holiday inspections shall be four (4) hours per day. Whether or not overtime inspection will be necessary, will be deternuned by the Engineer. _ SC-17 ALL BILLS PAID AFFIDAVIT The Contractor shall submit with every pay estimate an All Bills Paid Affidavit. No payments will be "- made unless this affidavit has been submitted. SC-18 ONE YEAR WARRANTY The Contractor shall warrant all work performed under this contract for a period of one year beginning on the date of final acceptance by the county. SC-19 CONSTRUCTION WATER All waters required for the construction of this project shall be the responsibility of the contractor. SC-20 TRAFFIC CONTROL The owner will be responsible for Traffic Control on this project. SC-4 HEARN ENGINEERING SPECIFICATIONS TOWN CREEK CROSSING IMPROVEMENTS KERR CO., TEXAS TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ""' INDEX "` ITEM Ol GENERAL (3 Pages) ITEM 02 SITE PREPARATION (5 Pages) ITEM 03 ROADWAYS, PARKING AREAS, AND SIDEWALKS (1 Page) ITEM NO. 1 GENERAL 1.01 Scope of Work: The work covered by these Specifications consists of furnishing all labor, equipment, machinery and materials and performing all operations in connection with the construction of water system improvements for Kerr County Wherever the term "Engineer" is used in the Specifications, it shall be construed to mean "Hearn Engineering, Inc.", or its designated representatives. _ 1.02 Construction Site: During construction the Contractor shall keep the site free and clear of all rubbish and debris and shall clean-up the site promptly when notified to do so by the Owner's representative. The Contractor shall, at his own expense, maintain streets free from dust, mud, excess earth or debris which constitutes a nuisance or danger to the public using the thoroughfare or the occupants of adjacent properties. Care shall be taken to prevent spillage on streets over which hauling is done, and any such spillage or debris due to construction operations shall be immediately removed. ~. 1.03 Hackwork: The Contractor shall coordinate his operations in such a manner as to prevent the amount of clean-up and completion of backwork from becoming excessive. Should such a condition exist, the Owner's representative may order all or portions of the work to cease and refuse to allow any "` work to commence until the backwork is done to his satisfaction. 1.04 Gracline: The Contractor shall do such grading in the area adjacent to backfilled trenches and structures as may be necessary to leave the area in a neat and satisfactory condition, approved by Che Owner's representative. 1.05 Inspection of Work: The principal inspection for the work covered under this Contract shall be by the Owner and his designated representatives. The quality of material and the quality of installation of pipe and related equipment shall be to the satisfaction of the Inspector. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility for the constmction methods and safety precautions in the undertaking of [his Contract. 1.06 Notification: The Owner must be notified a minimum of 24-hours in advance of beginning constmction. 1.07 Testine And Acceptance of Im~ovements: The Owner's representative will be present at the testing and balancing of electrical systems, mechanical systems, and linework. The Contractor will test all lines and be confident that the lines will be able to pass the test prior to calling the Owner's representative to observe the tests. No lines will be accepted by the Owner without the Owner's representative observing the tests and certifying to the lines passing the pressure tests as specified herein. In addition, all water-containing vessels (i.e., ground tank, pressure tank, etc.) shall be tested for leakage prior to being placed in service. The maximum allowable leakage for the 24-hour testing period shall he 1/4-inch plus the daily evaporation rate as established by the NWS. 1.08 Work in FreezinP Weather: Portions of the work may continue as directed by the Owner's representative. 1 of3 - 1.09 Pronerty Lines and Monuments: The Contractor shall be responsible for the protection, reference and resetting of property corner monuments if disturbed. 1.10 Contractor's Use of Premises: The Contractor shall, at his own expense, provide additional space as necessary for his operations and storage of materials. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing and maintaining all needed construction related facilities as part of the contract including, but not limited to telephone, fax services, job office, electricity, potable water, sanitary facilities, security, and waste disposal. The Contractor shall not use the facilities of the Owner without permission. The site shall be kept free of debris at all times. 1.] 1 Trade Names: Except as specified otherwise, wherever in the Specifications an article or class of material is designated by a trade name or by the name or catalog number of any maker, patentee, manufacturer, or dealer, such designations shall be taken as intending to mean and specify the articles described or another equal thereto in quality, finish, and serviceability for the purpose intended, as may be determined and judged by the Engineer in his sole discretion. 1.12 Materials And Workmanship: No material which has been used by the Contractor for any temporary purpose whatever is to be incorporated in the permanent structure without written consent of the Engineer. Where materials or equipment are specified by a trade or brand name, it is not the "' intention of the Owner to discriminate against an equal product of another manufacturer, but rather to set a definite standard of quality for performance, and to establish an equal basis for the evaluation of bids. Where the words "equivalent", "proper", or "equal to" are used, they shall be understood to mean that the item referred to shall be proper, the equivalent of, or equal to some other item, in the opinion or judgment of the Engineer. Unless otherwise specified, all materials shall be the best of their respective kinds and shall be in all cases fully equal to approved samples. Notwithstanding •- that the words "or equal to" or other such expressions may be used in the Specifications in connection with a material, manufactured article or process, the material, article, or process specifically designated shall be used unless a substitute shall be approved in writing by the Engineer ._ and the Engineer shall have the right to require the use of such specifically designated material, article or process. 1.13 Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Six (6) sets of complete Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Manuals shall be supplied by the equipment manufacturer at the time of shipment. Manuals shall be submitted for approval by the Engineer. 1.14 Service: The equipment manufacturers shall provide the services of a technical service representative to inspect and adjust the completed installation and to instruct the Owner's personnel in the care and operation of the equipment specified herein. The manufacturers shall maintain a ~' service organization available on call with spare parts from local stock. All equipment provided on this project shall be guaranteed against defects of material and workmanship for a period of one (1) yeaz from date of acceptance of the project by the Owner. Field service shall be included in each equipment manufacturer's bid to check out the installed equipment, place it in operating service and provide start-up and maintenance instruction service to the plant operating personnel. Field service time is no[ intended to include any time in the field required to correct fabrication or installation errors, and any charges resulting from time required for this must be resolved between the manufacturer and/or equipment supplier and the General ~-- Contractor. The equipment manufacturer shall coordinate all field service trips with the General Contractor and the Owner's representative. -- 1.15 "AS-BUILT DRAWINGS": The Contractor shall. furnish to the Engineer one (1) set of marked-up Plans, showing all the changes and deviations made to the original Plans during the construction of this Project. Dimensions shall be provided where necessary to properly locate all structures, _. ?of3 pipelines and appurtenances. Three (3) sets of electrical "as-built" wiring diagrams shall also be furnished to the Engineer for all equipment and controls by the Electrical Subcontractor through the General Contractor. The Engineer will record the changes, include the electrical diagrams on the „._ original Plans and provide the required sets of "as-built" Plans to the Owner. 1.16 Safety: All work shall comply with the rules set out by the Occupational Safety and Health Act. A „_ minimum of one competent person, that is not working in the excavation, shall monitor excavations exceeding four feet in depth. The person shall be trained to recognize dangerous conditions, proper use of trench protection, CPR, and First Aid in accordance with 29 CFR 1926, Subpart P. All excavations over five feet deep shall be shored, shielded, or sloped in accordance with 29 CFR, Subpart P. 1.17 Measurement And Payment: No separate payment for work performed under this item. Include cost of same in contract price bid for all items of which this work is a component. 3 oC 3 ._. ITEM NO. 2 SITE PREPARATION ri. 1.01. Sco e: This section of the specifications describes materials and equipment [o be utilized and requirements for their use in preparing the work site for construction and performing all earthwork. Y Site clearing and grubbing within the construction area will he performed by the Contractor. The Contractor shall furnish all materials, equipment and labor necessary to complete the work. 1.02. Underground Soil Data: No soil borings have been taken on this project. 1.03. Existing Underground Utilities and Obstructions: The Drawings indicate underground utilities or obstructions that are known to exist according to the best information available to the Owner. The "` site shall be carefully scrutinized for evidence of utilities. Prior to any ground disturbance, the contractor shall call the Texas One Cal] system at (800) 245-4545 for utility locates. Calling the number will only confirm the existence of underground utilities owned by companies that subscribe "°' to the service. There may be other utilities in the area and the Contractor will be responsible for insuring that no damage is done to any utilities whether shown or not shown. -° A. Electronic Pipe and Cable Finder: Furnish and have available at all times an electronic pipe detector, in good working order, to locate existing pipe lines or other obstructions, B. Relocation of Services: Locate ail utilities services to avoid interference with such services and determine whether these services should be relocated. Repair any damage done to utilities services or pipe line resulting from efforts to locate services or resulting from the ,., construction operation. NOTE: Any delay or extra cost due to encountering underground utilities or obstructions not shown on the Drawings or found in locations different from those shown on the Drawings shall not constitute a claim for additional payments. 1.04 Surface Drainage: The contractor shall prevent surface water and ground water from flowing into excavations and from flooding project site and surrounding areas. De-water excavated areas as required to remove any water. " 2.00 Clearine: The Contractor shall clear from areas indicated on the plans all natural and artificial obstmctions, including, but not limited to trees, stumps, brush, shrubs, rubbish, existing storm sewers, abandoned utility lines and debris with the exception of trees designated to be left in place. ^'- The natural ground surface shall be cleared of all vegetable growth, such as trees, logs, stumps, roots of downed trees, brush, grass, weeds. Contractor shall haul all trash, rubbish and debris from site prior to starting excavation or grading. Unless otherwise authorized, the area to be cleared and grubbed shall include the work area plus three feet outside the work area. A. Removal Procedures: 1. Stumps: Remove to a depth at least 3 feet below finished subgrade and backfill with suitable material to a density not less than that of adjacent soil. Abandoned Obstructions: Remove or break down masonry and asphalt structures to a depth of at least 1 foot below finished grade. Thoroughly crack or otherwise I of 5 break abandoned structures remaining in place which may impound water where they exist within 10 feet of finished grade backfill with suitable material to a density not less than that of adjacent soil. 3. Tap roots and other significant objectionable matter: Remove to a depth of at least 1 foot below subgrade. ~` 4. Protect from damage those trees and bushes not designated on the Drawings to be removed. "" 5. Accomplish clearing and grubbing well in advance of earth work to allow sufficient time for inspection and staking. "' 3.00 Excavation: The Contractor shall perform all excavation of every description and of whatever substances encountered, to the dimensions and levels shown on the Drawings and/or specified. Excavation may be accomplished by any customary method. M.. A. Unsuitable subgrade Material: Any material in the opinion of the Engineer which is unsuitable for subgrade shall be removed and replaced with compacted earth material as ,_ directed by the Engineer. B. Topsoil: Topsoil shall be strippedfromtheconstructionareas. Material determined suitable by the Engineer shall be stockpiled on site at a location designated by the Engineer. Unsuitable material shall be removed from the site. Replacing topsoil after final grading operation is included in this work. Stockpiled topsoil shall be spread evenly over designated areas at the end of grading operations. Rough grade elevations extending 30' outside the building perimeter shall be 6" lower than [he finish grades shown on the plans. C. Disposal of Material: Unless otherwise specifically authorized, all objectionable material "" is the Contractor's property and must be removed from the project area. 4.00 Proof-rolling: Proof-rolling shall consist of the moving an 18 ton tandem dump, or equal, to cover "" base thoroughly by lapping the tires one width each pass to assure a minimum tolerance of a 1/2" settling and no cracking or pumping, prior to any paving. This is to be witnessed by the engineer. subgrade shall be proof-rolled with six passes of the roller. Depressions that deve]op during the proof-rolling operation shall be filled with suitable material and those filled areas shall be proof- rolled with six passes of the roller. If, after having been filled and proof-rolled, the subgrade still contains depressions, the area shall be undercut to the full depth of the soft material or 5 feet whichever is less, backfilled, and rolled to achieve a subgrade acceptable to the Engineer. ,._ After the proof-rolled subgrade has been accepted by the Engineer, the surface of the subgrade shall be finished rolled with a smooth steel wheel roller weighing not less than 10 tons. ,~ Conduits, pipes, culverts, and underdrains shall be neither disturbed nor damaged by proof-rolling operations. Rollers shall neither pass over, nor approach closer than five feet to, conduits, pipes, culverts, and underdrains unless the tops of those products are deeper than three feet Areas not rulled due to the proximity to conduits, pipes, culverts and underdrains shall be hand tamped. 5.00. Compaction: Scarified soil and fill material shall be compacted to dry densities as determined by 2 of 5 the Standard Proctor Compaction Test performed in accordance with ASTM D 698. The fill material shall be spread in loose lifts of not more than eight inches and shall be compacted with a vibratory or sheepsfoot roller. Each lift shall be compacted to a minimum density of 95% of the maximum dry density as determined in accordance with ASTM D 698, current edition. The fill soil moisture content shall be maintained within 3% of the optimum moisture content as determined in accordance with ASTM D 698, current edition. 5.01 Compaction of fill shall be by sheepsfoot rollers with staggered uniformly spaced knobs and suitable cleaning devices. The projected area of each knob and the number and spacing of the knobs shall be such that the total weight of the roller and ballast when distributed over the area of one row of knobs shall be 250 psi. Placement and compaction of materials shall extend beyond the final contours sufficiently to insure compaction of the material at the resulting final surface. Final contours shall then be achieved by a tracked bulldozer shaping the face of the embankment. Compaction of backfill azound structures shall be accomplished by heavy power tamping equipment. •- If tests indicate that density of fill is less than that specified, the area shall be either re-compacted or undercut, Filled, and compacted until specified density is achieved at no cost to the Owner. 6.00 Construction Alone HiQhways Streets, and Roadways: Conduct all construction related activities along highways, streets and roadways in accordance with the applicable regulations of the City, County, and State with reference to construction operations, safety, traffic control, road maintenance and repair. A. Protection of Traffic: Provide and maintain suitable signs, barricades and lights, as required by the County, for protection of traffic. Replace all highway signs removed for construction as soon as possible. Do not close or block any highway, street, or roadway without first obtaining permission from the proper authorities. Flagmen shall be provided to direct and '~ expedite the flow of traffic. B. Construction O erations: Perform all work along highways, streets and roadways to least "'" interfere with traffic. Shanin¢: Reshape damaged slopes, side ditches, and ditch lines immediately after completing backfilling operations. Replace topsoil, sod and any other materials removed from shoulders. C. Excavated Materials: Do not place excavated material along highways, streets and roadways in a manner which obstructs traffic. Sweep all scattered excavated material off of the pavement. D. Drainage Structures: Keep all side ditches, culverts, cross drains, and other drainage structures clear of excavated material and free to drain at all times. E. Maintainin¢ Hiehways Streets Roadways and Driveways: Maintain streets, highways, and roadways in suitable condition for movement of trafficuntil completion and final acceptance T of the work. Use steel running plate to maintain traffic until pavement replacement is completed. 3of5 5.00 Building Site Prepazation: The Contractor shall grade the site to conform with the subgrade °' elevations for the building and paving areas and shall grade all other areas to the finish contour elevations shown on the plans. All grading and excavation shall be in accordance with the following requirements: A. Extent of Work: The building pad azea shall be extended 5'beyond the exterior walls of the building to allow for foundation construction. W B. Proof-rolling: The building pad area and all aeeas to receive fill shall be proof-rolled as described above. Any yielding, pumping or soft areas shall be cut-out and replaced with fill compacted as specified herein. C. Fill Material: The fill soil used to bring the site to grade shall be ]invited to soils classified .._ in accordance with ASTM D 2487 as GM, GC, SW, SP, SM, SC, ML and CL. The on-site soils in the cut section are generally of a satisfactory classification. The classification of the soil material used for the building pad areas shall be verified by an approved soils testing ,_ laboratory during construction. D. Compaction: See above E. Backfill: Backfilling of walls, structures and trenches shall be compacted in six inch loose lifts. Each lift shall be compacted using a mechanical tamp such as a vibratory or impact type compactor. Where subgrade or layer of soil material must be moisture conditioned before compaction, uniformly apply water to surface or subgrade, or layer of soil material, to prevent free water appearing on surface during or subsequent to compaction operations. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, soil material that is too wet to permit compaction to specified density. Soil material that has been removed because it is too wet to permit compaction may be stockpiled or spread and allowed to dry. Assist drying by discing or harrowing until moisture content is reduced to a satisfactory value. F. Slones: Slope sides of excavations to comply with local codes and ordinances having jurisdiction. Shore and brace where sloping is not possib]e because of space restrictions or stability of material excavated. Maintain sides and slopes of excavations in a safe condition until completion of backfilling. Shore and brace as necessary. 1.07 Backfillin¢ and Embankment: Fill materials shall be placed as required to provide compacted backfill for pavements. A. Materials: Fill materials shall be free of organic or other perishable material and shall not contain stones or rubble. No material shall be placed when frozen. B. Soil Sterilization Soil shall be sterilized and void of live vegetation in an area contained within limits one foot outside the proposed edge of pavement. Herbicide shall be HYBAR XL by Dupont applied at a rate of 10 gallons per acre (follow dilution instructions on label) or PRIMATOL by Ciba Geigy applied at a rate of 20 gallons per acre (follow dilution instruction on label). C. Proof-rolling: All areas beneath new roadway pavement shall be proof-rolled to detect soft '- spots after scarification and compaction but before placement of primer and pavement. Contractor may at his option proof-roll areas prior to scarification. 4of5 D. Scarification: Following proofrolling, the construction azea shall be stripped of topsoil and all unsuitable materials removed as described under Excavation. The area shall then be scarified to a depth of at least eight inches with a disc harrow. Soil shall be well pulverized and mixed (sand-clay) to a depth of eight inches. E. Com action: See above. ._ 1.08 Final Gradine: Graded areas shall be made to blend into conformation with remaining ground surfaces. All surfaces shall be left smooth and free to drain. 1.09 Pavment: Payment For a]] equipment, labor and materials required to clear; grub; remove; pipe; sterilize soil; scarify, grade and roll road beds, building pads, embankments, and fill for site; in this section of the Specifications shall be included in the unit price bid in the Proposal for the grading and for clearing as it pertains. SofS ITEM NO. 3 ROADWAYS, PARKING AREAS AND SIDEWALKS 1.01 Scoue: This section of the specifications covers the asphalt paving for roadways and parking areas and concrete sidewalks. 1.02 Suberade Preparation: All fill shall be placed in layers not deeper than (6) six inches compacted thickness. Top 12 inches of the subgrade shall be compacted to at least 95`70 of maximum density as determined by the standard Proctor Test. 1.02 Materials and Construction: All materials and construction shall conform to the applicable provisions of the Texas Department of Transportation (TXDOT). Standard Specifications, 2004 Edition or the latest revisions thereof. The items of work shall be governed by the following specifications. Item 204 Item 210 Item 216 Item 247 Item 300 Item 310 Item 340 Sprinkling Rolling Proof Rolling Flexible Base (Type 2) Asphalts, Oils, and Emulsions Frime Coat Dense-Graded Hot-Mix Asphalt 1.03 Asnhalt Surface: On the day following final shaping and compaction of the base, if weather permits, "' the base shall be broomed and then primed with 0.25 gallons of MC-30 bituminous primer per square yard to be surfaced. Prime coat shall be in accordance with TDOT Item 310. ._ One and one-half (1-1/2") inches, unless called out otherwise on plans, of plant mix asphalt Type C or D surface shall be applied after the primer is set. The asphalt surface shall be rolled with a rubber tired roller to present a smooth finished surface. All work shall be in accordance with Section 340 of the TDOT Standard Specifications. All manhole covers, valve boxes or gratings which are in the area to be paved shall be adjusted to grade such that the top of such cover, valve box or grating will be at the same elevation as the finished paving. "' 1.04 Concrete Sidewalks: Concrete sidewalks shall be 4' wide by 4" thick unless otherwise shown on the drawings and shall be constructed of concrete with a minimum compressive strength of 3,000 psi in 28 days. The subgrade shall be formed by excavating or filling to the required elevation for the bottom of the concrete. It shall be thoroughly tamped or rolled until it is stable. The forms shall be of metal or wood, straight, Free from warp, and strong enough to resist springing while concrete is being placed. Divider plates shall be of metal. The forms shall be the full depth of the walk and shall be securely staked, braced and held to line and grade. All forms shall be cleaned and oiled before concrete is placed. .~ The concrete shall be deposited in one course within the forms on the wetted subgrade to such a depth that after finishing it will be of the full thickness required. It shall then be leveled off, tamped and spaded enough to bring mortar and water to the surface after which it shall be finished smooth and even by means of a wooden float. Traverse contraction joints shall be formed with a tool designed to form a groove one-third the depth of the sidewalk at spaces not more than the width of the sidewalk. Expansion joints shall be of the ... materials and dimensions specified in the details. After the concrete has set enough and the forms have been removed, the space on each side of the sidewalk shall be refilled to the required elevation with suitable material which shall be Firmly -- compacted and neatly graded. 1.05 Payment: Payment shall be in accordance with the bid proposal 1 of 1 TxDOT SPECIFICATIONS TOWN CREEK CROSSING IMPROVEMENTS KERR CO., TEXAS TxDOT SPECIFICATIONS INDEX ITEM 110 EXCAVATION (Pages 80-82) ITEM 132 EMBANKMENT (Pages 83-89) ITEM ] 64 SEEDING FOR EROSION CONTROL (Pages 103-115) ITEM 166 FERTILIZER (Pages 115-116) ITEM 168 VEGETATIVE WATERING (Page 116) ITEM 204 SPRINKLING (Page 133) ITEM 210 ROLLING (Page 133) ITEM 216 PROOF ROLLING (Page 138) ITEM 247 FLEXIBLE BASE (Pages 138-146) ITEM 300 ASPHALTS, OILS, AND EMULSIONS (Pages 199-215) ITEM 310 PRIME COAT (Pages 223-224) ITEM 340 DENSE-GRADED HOT MIX ASPHALT (METHOD) (Pages 265-278) ITEM 420 CONCRETE STRUCTURES (Pages 482-515) ITEM 440 REINFORCING STEEL (Pages 643-653) ITEM 462 CONCRETE BOX CULVERTS AND STORM DRAINS (Pages 765-770) ITEM 466 HEADWALLS AND WINGWALLS (Pages 782-785) ITEM 506 TEMPORARY EROSION, SEDIMENTATION AND ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS (Pages 820-834) ITEM 636 ALUMINUM SIGNS (Pages 914-917) ITEM 644 SMALL ROADSIDE SIGNS SUPPORTS AND ASSEMBLIES (Pages 920-922) ITEM 666 REFLECTORIZED PAVEMENT MARKINGS (Pages 939-944) ITEM 668 PREFABRICATED PAVEMENT MARKINGS (Pages 944-946) „_ 106.1 to 110.2 ITEM 106 OBLITERATING ABANDONED ROAD '"` 106.1. Description. Obliterate designated sections of abandoned road. 106.2. Construction. Strip and windrow existing topsoil before shaping ~'° operations. Remove asphaltic pavement in accordance with applicable item. Remove material designated as salvageable in accordance with applicable items. Remove abandoned structures unless otherwise shown on the plans. M.. Scarify and mix the abandoned roadbed with soil and blade to produce a smooth, uniform appearance. Fill, cut, and shape the designated sections of the abandoned road to blend into the surrounding terrain. Eliminate ditches except where needed to facilitate drainage. Cover disturbed areas with topsoil after shaping operations to facilitate establishment of vegetation. 106.3. Measurement. This Item will be measured by the 100-ft. station along the baseline of the abandoned roadway. 106.4. Payment. The work performed in accordance with this Item and measured as provided under "Measurement" will be paid for at the unit price bid for "Obliterating Abandoned Road." This price is full compensation for salvaging and replacing topsoil; stockpiling or disposal of materials; removal of abandoned structures; scarifying, mixing, and shaping abandoned road; furnishing and operating equipment, and labor, tools, and incidentals. ITEM 110 EXCAVATION 110.1. Description. Excavate areas as shown on the plans or as directed. Remove materials encountered to the lines, grades, and typical sections shown on the plans and cross-sections. 110.2. Construction. Accept ownership of unsuitable or excess material •-- and dispose of material in accordance with local, state, and federal regulations at locations outside the right of way. Maintain drainage in the excavated area to avoid damage to the roadway section. Correct any damage to the subgrade caused by weather, at no additional cost to the Department. ~-- Shape slopes to avoid loosening material below or outside the proposed grades. Remove and dispose of slides as directed. 80 110.3 to 110.4 -~ A. Rock Cuts. Excavate to finish subgrade. Manipulate and compact subgrade in accordance with Article 132.3.D, "Compaction Methods," unless excavation is to clean homogenous rock at finish subgrade elevation. If excavation extends below finish subgrade, use approved embankment material compacted in accordance with Article 132.3.D to replace undercut material at no additional cost. B. Earth Cuts. Excavate to finish subgrade. In areas where base or pavement structure will be placed on subgrade, scarify subgrade to a ... uniform depth at least 6 in. below finish subgrade elevation. Manipulate and compact subgrade in accordance with Article 132.3.D, "Compaction Methods." ""' If unsuitable material is encountered below subgrade elevations, take corrective measures as directed. Drying required deeper than 6 in. below subgrade elevation will be paid for in accordance with W. Article 9.4, "Payment for Extra Work." Excavation and replacement of unsuitable material below subgrade elevations will be performed and paid for in accordance with the applicable bid items. However, if Item 132, "Embankment," is not included in the Contract, payment for replacement of unsuitable material will be paid for in accordance with Article 9.4. C. subgrade Tolerances. For turnkey construction, excavate to within 1/2 in. in cross-section and 1/2 in. in 16 ft. measured longitudinally. For '- staged construction, excavate to within 0.1 ft. in cross-section and 0.1 ft. in 16 ft. measured longitudinally. - 110.3. Measurement. This Item will be measured by the cubic yard in its original position as computed by the method of average end areas. This is a plans quantity measurement Item. The quantity to be paid is the quantity shown in the proposal unless modified by Article 9.2, "Plans Quantity Measurement." Additional measurements or calculations will be ,_ made if adjustments of quantities are required. Limits of measurement for excavation in retaining wall areas will be as shown on the plans. r Shrinkage or swelling factors will not be considered in determining the calculated quantities. 110.4. Payment. The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and measured as provided under "Measurement" will be paid for at the unit price bid for "Excavation (Roadway)," "Excavation (Channel)," "Excavation (Special)," or "Excavation (Roadway 81 110.4 to 112.3 and Channel)." This price is full compensation for authorized excavation; drying; undercutting subgrade and reworking or replacing the undercut material in rock cuts; hauling; disposal of material not used elsewhere on the project; scarification and compaction; and equipment, labor, materials, tools, and incidentals. When a slide not due to the Contractor's negligence or operation occurs, payments for removal and disposal of the slide material will be in accordance with Article 9.4, "Payment for Extra Work." Excavation in ,_ backfill areas of retaining walls will not be measured or paid for directly but will be subsidiary to pertinent Items. m ITEM 112 SUBGRADE WIDENING v 112.1. Description. Widen the existing subgrade in accordance with the typical sections. 112.2. Materials. Furnish water in accordance with Article 204.2, "Materials." 112.3. Construction. A. Preparation of Embankment. Scarify to a depth of at least 6 in. into existing adjacent embankment slopes before fill is placed. B. Pavement Structure Removal. Remove material along the edge of the existing pavement. Provide a smooth vertical cut unless otherwise shown on the plans. Conform to the typical sections for the limits of removal unless directed otherwise. Accept ownership of excess ,,,_ material not used in the construction of the subgrade widening. Dispose of excess material in accordance with federal, state, and local regulations. "" C. Widening. In cut sections, remove material and move to fill sections within the project. Use material from cut sections for embankment. In fill sections, place the material in successive lifts to the line and grades shown on the typical sections. Provide additional embankment in accordance with the applicable bid item or Article 9.4, "Payment for Extra Work," if all excavation has been performed and additional embankment is required to complete the work. D. Compaction. Compact the widened subgrade in accordance with ~- Article 132.3, "Construction." 82 112.4 to 132.2 ._ 112.4. Measurement. This Item will be measured by the 100-ft. station along the baseline of each roadbed. This is a plans quantity measurement Item. The quantity to be paid is the '~~ quantity shown in the proposal, unless modified by Article 9.2, "Plans Quantity Measurement." Additional measurements or calculations will be made if adjustments of quantities are required. 112.5. Payment. The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and measured as provided under "Measurement" will be paid for at the unit price bid for "Subgrade Widening (Ordinary Compaction)" or "Subgrade Widening (Density Control)." This price is full compensation for excavation; hauling of embankment material from cuts to fills; finishing of the subgrade widening; hauling and disposing of excess excavated material; furnishing and operating equipment; scarifying; ... shaping; and labor, fuel, materials, tools, and incidentals. No payment will be made for thickness or width exceeding that shown on the typical sections. "Sprinkling" and "Rolling" will not be paid for directly "" but will be considered subsidiary to this Item. Corrections of unstable areas in the widened subgrade will be at the ,_ Contractor's expense. In a cut section, work involved in removing and replacing unsuitable material encountered below the finished subgrade will be paid for as specified under Item 110, "Excavation," when included; otherwise it will be paid for under Article 9.4, "Payment for Extra Work." ITEM 132 EMBANKMENT 132.1. Description. Furnish, place, and compact materials for construction of roadways, embankments, levees, dikes, or any designated section of the roadway where additional material is required. 132.2. Materials. Furnish approved material capable of forming a stable embankment from required excavation in the areas shown on the plans or •- from sources outside the right of way. Provide 1 or more of the following types as shown on the plans: • Type A. Granular material that is free from vegetation or other objectionable material and meets the requirements of Table 1. 83 -.. 132.3 to 132.3 Table 1 Testin Re uirements Property Test Method Specificafion Limit Li uidlimit Tex-104-E <45 Plastici index PI Tex-106-E < 15 Bar linear shrinka e Tex-107-E > 2 The Linear Shrinkage test only needs to be performed as indicated in Tex-104-E. • Type B. Materials such as rock, loam, clay, or other approved ,.~, materials. • Type C. Material meeting the specification requirements shown on the plans. • Type D. Material from required excavation areas shown on the plans. Retaining wall backfill material must meet the requirements of the pertinent retaining wall Items. 132.3. Construction. Meet the requirements of Item 7, "Legal Relations and Responsibilities to the Public," when off right of way sources are used. "`" To allow for required testing, notify the Engineer before opening a material source. Complete preparation of the right of way, in accordance with Item 100, "Preparing Right of Way," for areas to receive embankment. Backfill tree-stump holes or other minor excavations with approved material and tamp. Restore the ground surface, including any material •- disked loose or washed out, to its original slope. Compact the ground surface by sprinkling in accordance with Item 204, "Sprinkling," and by rolling using equipment complying with Item 210, "Rolling," when --- directed. Scarify and loosen the unpaved surface areas, except rock, to a depth of at least 6 in., unless otherwise shown on the plans. Bench slopes before Y, placing material. Begin placement of material at the toe of slopes. Do not place trees, stumps, roots, vegetation, or other objectionable material in the embankment. Simultaneously recompact scarified material with the placed embankment material. Do not exceed the layer depth specified in Section 132.3.D, "Compaction Methods." '- Construct embankments to the grade and sections shown on the plans. Construct the embankment in layers approximately parallel to the finished grade for the full width of the individual roadway cross sections, unless otherwise shown on the plans. Ensure that each section of the embankment 84 132.3 to 132.3 conforms to the detailed sections or slopes. Maintain the finished section, density, and grade until the project is accepted. A. Earth Embankments. Earth embankment is mainly composed of w material other than rock. Construct embankments in successive layers, evenly distributing materials in lengths suited for sprinkling and „_ rolling. Obtain approval to incorporate rock and broken concrete produced by the construction project in the lower layers of the embankment. When -` the size of approved rock or broken concrete exceeds the layer thickness requirements in Section 132.3.D, "Compaction Methods," place the rock and concrete outside the limits of the completed roadbed. Cut and `~ remove all exposed reinforcing steel from the broken concrete. Move the material dumped in piles or windrows by blading or by ,.. similar methods and incorporate it into uniform layers. Featheredge or mix abutting layers of dissimilar material for at least 100 ft. to ensure there are no abrupt changes in the material. Break down clods or lumps .. of material and mix embankment until a uniform material is attained. Apply water free of industrial wastes and other objectionable matter to achieve the uniform moisture content specified for compaction. When ordinary compaction is specified, roll and sprinkle each embankment layer in accordance with Section 132.3.D.1, "Ordinary ._ Compaction." When density control is specified, compact the layer to the required density in accordance with Section 132.3.D.2, "Density Control." B. Rock Embankments. Rock embankment is mainly composed of rock. Construct rock embankments in successive layers for the full width of the roadway cross-section with a depth of 18 in. or less. Increase the layer depth for large rock sizes as approved. Do not exceed a depth of 2-1/2 ft. in any case. Fill voids created by the large stone matrix with smaller stones during the placement and filling operations. Ensure the depth of the embankment layer is greater than the maximum dimension of any rock. Do not place rock greater than 2 ft. in its maximum dimension, unless otherwise approved. Construct the final layer with graded material so that the density and uniformity is in accordance with Section 132.3.D, "Compaction Methods." Break up °' exposed oversized material as approved. When ordinary compaction is specified, roll and sprinkle each _, embankment layer in accordance with Section 132.3.D.1, "Ordinary Compaction." When density control is specified, compact each layer to 85 ~. 132.3 to 132.3 -- the required density in accordance with Section 132.3.D.2, "Density Control." When directed, proof-roll each rock layer where density testing is not possible, in accordance with Item 216, "Proof Rolling," to ensure proper compaction. C. Embankments Adjacent to Culverts and Bridges. Compact embankments adjacent to culverts and bridges in accordance with Item 400, "Excavation and Backfill for Structures." D. Compaction Methods. Begin rolling longitudinally at the sides and proceed toward the center, overlapping on successive trips by at least 1 /2 the width of the roller. On super elevated curves, begin rolling at the lower side and progress toward the high side. Alternate roller trips "- to attain slightly different lengths. Compact embankments in accordance with one of the following methods as shown on the plans: ,.,. 1. Ordinary Compaction. Use approved rolling equipment complying with Item 210, "Rolling," to compact each layer. The plans or the Engineer may require specific equipment. Do not -- allow the loose depth of any layer to exceed 8 in., unless otherwise approved. Before and during rolling operations, bring each layer to the moisture content directed. Compact each layer until there is no evidence of further consolidation. Maintain a level layer to ensure uniform compaction. If the required stability or finish is lost for any reason, recompact and refinish the subgrade at no additional expense to the Department. 2. Density Control. Compact each layer to the required density using equipment complying with Item 210, "Rolling." Determine the maximum lift thickness based on the ability of the compacting operation and equipment to meet the required density. Do not exceed layer thickness of 16 in. loose or 12 in. compacted material, unless otherwise approved. Maintain a level layer to ensure uniform compaction. The Engineer will use Tex-114-E to determine the maximum dry density (D,) and optimum moisture content (WoP~). Meet the requirements for field density and moisture content in Table 2, unless otherwise shown on the plans. 86 132.3 to 132.3 Table 2 Field Density Control Requirements Densi ' Moisture Content Description Tex-115-E 15 < PI < 35 >_ 98% Da and < 102% D° ? WoPi. PI > 35 ? 95% Da and <_ 100% Da ? W°P~. ..._ Each layer is subject to testing by the Engineer for density and moisture content. During compaction, the moisture content of the soil should not exceed the value shown on the moisture-density - curve, above optimum, required to achieve • 98% dry density for soils with a PI greater than 15 but less than or equal to 35 or ~- • 95% dry density for soils with PI greater than 35. When required, remove small areas of the layer to allow for - density tests. Replace the removed material and recompact at no additional expense to the Department. Proof-roll in accordance with Item 216, "Proof Rolling," when shown on the plans or as m directed. Correct soft spots as directed. E. Maintenance of Moisture and Reworking. Maintain the density and moisture content once all requirements in Table 2 are met. For soils '- with a PI greater than 15, maintain the moisture content no lower than 4 percentage points below optimum. Rework the material to obtain the specified compaction when the material loses the required stability, density, moisture, or finish. Alter the compaction methods and procedures on subsequent work to obtain specified density as directed. - F. Acceptance Criteria. 1. Grade Tolerances. - a. Staged Construction. Grade to within 0.1 ft. in the cross- section and 0.1 ft. in 16 ft. measured longitudinally. b. Turnkey Construction. Grade to within 1/2 in. in the cross- - section and 1/2 in. in 16 ft. measured longitudinally. 2. Gradation Tolerances. When gradation requirements are shown r on the plans, material is acceptable when not more than 1 of the 5 87 132.4 to 132.5 -- most recent gradation tests is outside the specified limits on any individual sieve by more than 5 percentage points. 3. Density Tolerances. Compaction work is acceptable when not more than 1 of the 5 most recent density tests is outside the specified density limits, and no test is outside the limits by more _ than 3 lb. per cubic foot. 4. Plasticity Tolerances. Material is acceptable when not more than 1 of the 5 most recent PI tests is outside the specified limit by no more than 2 points. 132.4. Measurement. Embankment will be measured by the cubic yard. •- Measurement will be further defined for payment as follows: A. Final. The cubic yard will be measured in its final position using the average end area method. The volume is computed between the original ground surface or the surface upon which the embankment is to be constructed and the lines, grades, and slopes of the embankment. In ,e areas of salvaged topsoil, payment for embankment will be made in accordance with Item 160, "Topsoil." Shrinkage or swell factors will not be considered in determining the calculated quantities. B. Original. The cubic yard will be measured in its original and natural position using the average end area method. C. Vehicle. The cubic yard will be measured in vehicles at the point of delivery. When measured by the cubic yard in its final position, this is a plans quantity measurement Item. The quantity to be paid is the quantity shown in the proposal, unless modified by Article 9.2, "Plans Quantity Measurement." Additional measurements or calculations will be made if adjustments of quantities are required. Shrinkage or swell factors are the Contractor's responsibility. When shown ,_ on the plans, factors are for informational purposes only. Measurement of retaining wall backfill in embankment areas is paid for as embankment, unless otherwise shown on plans. Limits of measurement for ~- embankment in retaining wall areas are shown on the plans. 132.5. Payment. The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and measured as provided under "Measurement" will be paid for at the unit price bid for "Embankment (Final)," "Embankment (Original)," or "Embankment (Vehicle)," of the compaction "~ method and type specified. This price is full compensation for furnishing 88 132.5 to 134.3 .... embankment; hauling; placing, compacting, finishing, and reworking; disposal of waste material; and equipment, labor, tools, and incidentals. When proof rolling is directed, it will be paid for in accordance with "- Item 216, "Proof Rolling." All sprinkling and rolling, except proof rolling, will not be paid for directly, but will be considered subsidiary to this Item, unless otherwise shown on the plans. Where subgrade is constructed under this contract, correction of sofr spots in the subgrade will be at the Contractor's expense. Where subgrade is not constructed under this contract, correction of soft spots in the subgrade will be paid in accordance with Article 9.4, "Payment for Extra Work." ITEM 134 BACKFILLING PAVEMENT EDGES 134.1. Description. Backfill pavement edges in conformance with the typical sections shown on the plans. 134.2. Materials. A. Backfill Material. Use backfill material capable of sustaining vegetation unless otherwise specified on the plans. Furnish backfill ~- material of one of the following types: 1. Type A. Backfill secured from a source outside the right of way and according to the requirements as shown on the plans. 2. Type B. Backfill secured from within the existing right of way as shown on the plans or as directed. 3. Type C. Mulch sodding backfill secured from an approved source in accordance with Article 162.2.B, "Mulch Sod." ,,,_ B. Emulsified Asphalt. Furnish the type specified on the plans and meeting the requirements of Item 300, "Asphalts, Oils, and Emulsions." C. Fertilizer. Furnish fertilizer in accordance with Article 166.2, "' "Materials," if specified on the plans. D. Water. Furnish water required for proper compaction, promotion of _, plant growth, or emulsion dilution in accordance with Article 168.2, "Materials." 134.3. Construction. Haul the backfill material to the required location before placing the finish surface course unless directed otherwise. After 89 - 162.4 to 164.2 - Add or reshape the mulch sod to meet the requirements of Section 162.3.B, "Finishing." B. Finishing. Smooth and shape the area after planting to conform to the desired cross sections. Spread any excess soil uniformly over adjacent areas or dispose of the excess soil as directed. ^- C. Straw or Hay Mulch. Apply straw or hay mulch for "Spot Sodding" and "Mulch Sodding" uniformly over the area as shown on the plans. Apply straw mulch at 2 to 2-1/2 tons per acre. Apply hay mulch at "' 1-1/2 to 2 tons per acre. Use a tacking method over the mulched area. 162.4. Measurement. "Spot Sodding," "Block Sodding," and "Straw or ""' Hay Mulch" will be measured by the square yard in its final position. "Mulch Sodding" will be measured by the square yard in its final position or by the cubic yard in vehicles as delivered to the planting site. 162.5. Payment. The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and measured as provided under "Measurement" '~` will be paid for at the unit price bid for "Spot Sodding," "Block Sodding," "Straw or Hay Mulch," or "Mulch Sodding." This price is full compensation for securing a source, excavation, loading, hauling, placing, rolling, finishing, furnishing materials, equipment, labor, tools, supplies, and incidentals. Fertilizer will not be paid for directly but will be subsidiary to this Item. r Unless otherwise specified on the plans, water, except for that used for maintaining and preparing the sod before planting, will be measured and ~- paid for in accordance with Item 168, "Vegetative Watering." ITEM 164 SEEDING FOR EROSION CONTROL 164.1. Description. Provide and install temporary or permanent seeding far erosion control as shown on the plans or as directed. 164.2. Materials. A. Seed. Provide seed from the previous season's crop meeting the requirements of the Texas Seed Law, including the testing and labeling for pure live seed (PLS = Purity x Germination). Furnish seed of the designated species, in labeled unopened bags or containers to the _, Engineer before planting. Use within 12 mo. From the date of the 103 164.2 to 164.2 ~- analysis. When Buffalograss is specified, use seed that is treated with KN03 (potassium nitrate) to overcome dormancy. Use Tables 1 through 4 to determine the appropriate seed mix and rates m as specified on the plans. 104 164.2 to 164.2 Table 1 Permanent Rural Seed Mix District Cla Soils Sand Soils and Planting Species and Rates Species and Rates Dates (lb. PLS/ac.) (Ib. PLS/ac.) 1 (Paris) Green Sprangletop 0.3 Green Sprangletop 0.3 Feb. 1 - Sideoats Grama (Hast 3.2 Bermudagrass 1.5 May 15 Bermudagrass 1.8 Bahiagrass (Pe~sacota) 6.0 Little Bluestem (Nat;ve> 1.7 Sand Lovegrass 0.6 Illinois Bundleflower 1.0 Weeping Lovegrass (Ermeto> 0.8 Partrid e Pea 1.0 2 Green Sprangletop 0.3 Green Sprangletop 0.3 (Ft. Worth) Sideoats Grama (Et Reno) 2.7 Sand Lovegrass 0.5 Feb. 1 - Bermudagrass 0.9 Bermudagrass 1.8 May 15 Little Bluestem (Native) 1.0 Weeping Lovegrass (Hr,„etnt 0.8 Blue Grama (Hacnita> 0.9 Sand Dropseed 0.4 Illinois Bundleflower 1.0 Partrid e Pearl 1.0 3 (Wichita Green Sprangletop 0.3 Green Sprangletop 0.3 Falls) Sideoats Grama (at Renc) 2.7 Bermudagrass 1.2 Feb. 1 - Bermudagrass 0.9 Sand Dropseed 0.4 May 15 Buffalograss (Texolca> 1.6 Sand Bluestem 2.4 Western Wheatgrass 2.1 Sand Lovegrass 0.3 Blue Grama (Hacnaa> 0.6 Weeping Lovegrass (13a,ietc) 0.6 Illinois Bundleflower 1.0 Pu le Prairieclover 0.5 4 Green Sprangletop 0.3 Green Sprangletop 0.3 (Amarillo) Sideoats Grama (Et Reno) 3.6 Weeping Lovegrass (Hirneto) 0.8 Feb. 15 - Blue Grama (Hacnaa) 1.2 Blue Grama (Hacn;ta> 1.0 May 15 Buffalograss (rexoka) 1.6 Sand Dropseed 0.3 Illinois Bundleflower 1.0 Sand Bluestem 1.8 Pu le Prairieclover 0.5 5 Green Sprangletop 0.3 Green Sprangletop 0.3 (Lubbock) Sideoats Grama (Et Reno) 3.6 Weeping Lovegrass (Evneto) 0.8 Feb. 15 - BIUe Grama (Hachita) ] .2 B1Ue Grama (Hachita) ] .~ May 15 Buffalograss (Texoka) 1.6 Sand Dropseed 0.3 Illinois Bundleflower 1.0 Sand Bluestem 1.8 Pu le Prairieclover 0.5 105 ._ 164.2 to 164.2 Table 1 (continued) Permanent Rural Seed Mix District Cla Soils Sand Soils and Planting Species and Rates Species and Rates Dates (lb. PLS/ac.) (lb. PLS/ac.) 6 (Odessa) Green Sprangletop 0.3 Green Sprangletop 0.3 Feb. 1 - Sideoats Grama lxaskeu) 2.3 Blue Grama 0.8 May 15 Blue Grama lxa~naa) 0.8 Sand Dropseed 0.4 Allcali Sacaton 0.4 Weeping Lovegrass (Eimeto)0.6 Galleta 2.1 Indian Ricegrass 3.0 Illinois Bundleflower 1.0 Pu le Prairieclover 0.5 7 Green Sprangletop 0.3 Green Sprangletop 0.3 (San Angelo) Sideoats Grama exaskeu> 2.7 Sideoats Grama (xaskeul 2.7 Feb. 1 - Buffalograss ~Texoka~ 1.6 Weeping Lovegrass (Erme~o> 0.6 May 1 Little Bluestem nvac;~el 1.7 Sand Dropseed 0.4 Blue Grama txa~n;ca> 0.9 Purple Prairieclover 0.5 Galleta 1.6 Illinois Bundleflower 1.0 8 (Abilene) Green Sprangletop 0.3 Green Sprangletop 0.3 Feb. 1 - Sideoats Grama ~xa:keu) 2.7 Sand Bluestem 3.0 May 15 Blue Grama lxa~n;ca~ 0.9 Weeping Lovegrass (Er,neio)1.2 Galleta 1.6 Sand Dropseed 0.5 Buffalograss (Texoka> 1.6 Purple Prairieclover 0.5 Little Bluestem ~Nac;ve) 1.7 Illinois Bundleflower 1.0 9 (Waco) Green Sprangletop 0.3 Green Sprangletop 0.3 Feb. 1 - Bermudagrass 1.2 Bermudagrass 2.4 May 15 Sideoats Grama txaskeu> 3.6 Sand Dropseed 0.5 Little Bluestem rNat;ve) 2.0 Weeping Lovegrass (Erme~o> 0.8 Illinois Bundleflower 1.0 Partrid e Pea 1.0 10 (Tyler) Green Sprangletop 0.3 Green Sprangletop 0.3 Feb. 1 - Bermudagrass 1.8 Bermudagrass 1.8 May 15 Bahiagrass erensa~oia~ 9.0 Bahiagrass tre~sa~oia> 9.0 Sideoats Grama (xaskeID 2.7 Weeping Lovegrass (Hrme~o) 0.5 Illinois Bundleflower 1.0 Sand Lovegrass 0.5 Lance-Leaf Coreo sis 1.0 106 164.2 to 164.2 Table 1 (continued) Permanent Rural Seed Mix District Cla Soils Sand Soils and Planting Species and Rates Species and Rates Dates (lb. PLS/ac.) (Ib. PLS/ac.) 11 (Lufkin) Green Sprangletop 0.3 Green Sprangletop 0.3 Feb. 1 - Bermudagrass 1.8 Bermudagrass 2.1 May 15 Bahiagrass tronsaootal 9.0 Bahiagrass lrensa~ota> 9.0 Sideoats Grama lxa5xeul 2.7 Sand Lovegrass 0.5 Illinois Bundleflower 1.0 Lance-Leaf Coreo sis 1.0 12 Green Sprangletop 0.3 Green Sprangletop 0.3 (Houston) Bermudagrass 2.1 Bermudagrass 2.4 Jan. 15 - Sideoats Grama ~Hasxeul 3.2 Bahiagrass (Pensacola) 10.5 May 15 Little Bluestem (Nat;ve) 1.4 Weeping Lovegrass (]3rtneto) 0.5 Illinois Bundleflower 1.0 Lance-Leaf Coreo sis 1.0 13 Green Sprangletop 0.3 Green Sprangletop 0.3 (Yoakum) Sideoats Grama (Aaskeu> 3.6 Bermudagrass 1.8 Jan. 15 - Bermudagrass 1.8 Bahiagrass (Pensacota> 6.0 May 15 Little Bluestem (Nalive> 1.4 Sand Lovegrass 0.6 Illinois Bundleflower I.0 Weeping Lovegrass (&cnel o) 0.6 Partrid e Pea 1.0 14 (Austin) Green Sprangletop 0.3 Green Sprangletop 0.3 Feb. 1 - Bermudagrass 0.9 Bermudagrass 2.4 May 15 Sideoats Grama (Aaskeu> 2.7 Weeping Lovegrass (}3nnet o) 0.8 Little Bluestem (Native) 1.0 Sand Lovegrass 0.8 Blue Grama (Aachita) 0.9 Partridge Pea 1.0 Illinois Bundleflower 1.0 15 (San Green Sprangletop 0.3 Green Sprangletop 0.3 Antonio) Bermudagrass 1.2 Bermudagrass 1.8 Feb. 1 - Sideoats Grama teasxeul 2.7 Lehmanns Lovegrass 0.6 May 1 Little Bluestem (Nat;ve) 1.4 Sand Lovegrass 0.6 Plains Bristlegrass 1.2 Buffelgrass tconunont 0.4 Illinois Bundleflower 1.0 Partrid e Pea 1.0 16 (Corpus Green Sprangletop 0.3 Green Sprangletop 0.3 Christi) Sideoats Grama (xast 1.7 Weeping Lovegrass (Ermo~o) 0.6 Illinois Bundleflower 1.0 Sand Lovegrass 0.6 Lance-Leaf Coreo sis 1.0 18 (Dallas) Green Sprangletop 0.3 Green Sprangletop 0.3 Feb. 1 - Bermudagrass 1.2 Bermudagrass 1.8 May 15 Sideoats Grama gat Reno) 2.7 Weeping Lovegrass (Enne~o ) 0.6 Little Bluestem (NaHve> 2.0 Sand Lovegrass 0.6 Buffalograss (Texoxa) 1.6 Sand Dropseed 0.4 Illinois Bundleflower 1.0 Partrid e Pea 1.0 19 Green Sprangletop 0.3 Green Sprangletop 0.3 (Atlanta) Bermudagrass 2.4 Bermudagrass 2.1 Feb. 1 - Sideoats Grama (xaskeu) 4.5 Bahiagrass (Pensacola) 7.5 May 15 Illinois Bundleflower 1.0 Sand Lovegrass 0.6 Lance-Leaf Coreo sis 1.0 20 Green Sprangletop 0.3 Green Sprangletop 0.3 (Beaumont) Bermudagrass 2.7 Bermudagrass 2.1 Jan. 15 - Sideoats Grama (xasketq 4.1 Bahiagrass (Pensacola) 7.5 May 15 Illinois Bundleflower 1.0 Sand Lovegrass 0.6 Lance-Leaf Coreo sis 1.0 21 (Pharr) Green Sprangletop 0.3 Green Sprangletop 0.3 Jan. 15 - Sideoats Grama ~xasxeu> 3.6 Bermudagrass 1.8 May 15 Plains Bristlegrass 1.2 Buffelgrass (common) 0.4 Buffalograss (Texoka) 1.6 Sand Dropseed 0.4 Berrnudagrass 1.2 Lehmanns Lovegrass 0.6 Illinois Bundleflower 1.0 Pu le Prairieclover 0.5 22 (Laredo) Green Sprangletop 0.3 Green Sprangletop 0.3 Jan. 15 - Sideoats Grama (xaskeu) 3.6 Bermudagrass 1.8 May 1 Bermudagrass 1.2 Buffelgrass (common) 0.4 Buffalograss (Texoxal 1.6 Sand Dropseed 0.4 Plains Bristlegrass 1.2 Lehmanns Lovegrass 0.6 Illinois Bundleflower 1.0 P le Prairieclover 0.5 108 164.2 to 164.2 Table 1 (continued) Permanent Rural Seed Mix District Cla Soils Sand Soils and Planting Species and Rates Species and Rates Dates (lb. PLS/ac.) (lb. PLS/acJ 23 Green Sprangletop 0.3 Green Sprangletop 0.3 (Brownwood) Sideoats Grama ~Haskeiq 2.7 Bermudagrass 1.8 Feb. 1 - Bermudagrass 0.6 Weeping Lovegrass ~armeio> 0.6 May 15 Blue Grama 1Ha~n;~~ 0.9 Sand Lovegrass 0.6 Galleta 2.1 Sand Dropseed 0.4 Illinois Bundleflower 1.0 Pu le Prairieclover 0.5 24 (El Green Sprangletop 0.3 Green Sprangletop 0.3 Paso) Sideoats Grama (sane) 2.7 Sand Dropseed 0.4 Feb. 1 - Blue Grama (xaeh;ta) 0.9 Lehmanns Lovegrass 0.9 May 15 Galleta 21 Blue Grama (xach~~al 1.0 Alkali Sacaton 0.4 Indian Ricegrass 1.6 i Illinois Bundleflower 1.0 Pu le Prairieclover 0.5 25 Green Sprangletop 0.3 Green Sprangletop 0.3 (Childress) Sideoats Grama jai Reno> 2.7 Weeping Lovegrass (Hnne~o ) 1.2 Feb. 1 - Blue Grama ~xaen;ca~ 0.9 Sand Dropseed 0.5 May 15 Western Wheatgrass 2.1 Sand Lovegrass 0.8 Galleta 1.6 Purple Prairieclover 0.5 '~ Illinois Bundleflower 1.0 109 164.2 to 164.2 Table 2 Permanent iJrhan Seed Mix District and Clay Soils Sandy Soils Planting Species and Rates Species and Rates Dates lb. PLS/ac. lb. PLS/ac. 1 (Paris) Green Sprangletop 0.3 Green Sprangletop 0.3 Feb.1 Bermudagrass 2.4 Bermudagrass 5.4 Ma 15 Sideoats Grama (xaskou> 45 2 Green Sprangletop 0.3 Green Sprangletop 0.3 (Ft. Worth) Sideoats Grama (si Rono) 3.6 Sideoats Grama (ai Reno) 3.6 Feb. 1 - Bermudagrass 2.4 Bermudagrass 2.1 Ma 15 Buffalo rass (Toxoka) 1.6 Sand Dro seed 0.3 3 (Wichita Green Sprangletop 0.3 Green Sprangletop 0.3 Falls) Sideoats Grama cai Rono> 4.5 Sideoats Grama (Ei Reno> 3.6 Feb. 1 - Bermudagrass 1.8 Bermudagrass 1.8 Ma 15 Buffalo rass (Toxoka> 1.6 Sand Dro seed 0.4 4 (Amarillo) Green Sprangletop 0.3 Green Sprangletop 0.3 Feb. 15 Sideoats Grama (Ei Rono) 3.6 Sideoats Grama (ai Reno> 2.7 May 15 Blue Grama (xacn;ta) 1.2 Blue Grama (xaen;ta) 0.9 Buffalograss (Toxoka) 1.6 Sand Dropseed 0.4 Buffalo rass (Toxoka) 1.6 5 (Lubbock) Green Sprangletop 0.3 Green Sprangletop 0.3 Feb. 15 - Sideoats Grama (s~ Reno) 3.6 Sideoats Grama (si Reno) 2.7 May I S Blue Grama (xachira) 1.2 Blue Grama (xacn;ta) 0.9 Buffalograss (Toxoka) 1.6 Sand Dropseed 0.4 Buffalo rass (Toxoka) 1.6 6 (Odessa) Green Sprangletop 0.3 Green Sprangletop 0.3 Feb. 1 - Sideoats Grama rxaskeu> 3.6 Sideoats Grama (xaskotn 2.7 May 15 Blue Grama (Hachita) 1.2 Sand Dropseed 0.4 Buffalograss (Toxoka) 1.6 Blue Grama (xacn;ta) 0.9 Buffalo rass (Toxoka) 1.6 7 Green Sprangletop 0.3 Green Sprangletop 0.3 (San Angelo) Sideoats Grama (xaskou> 7.2 Sideoats Grama (Haskoll) 3.2 Feb. 1 - Buffalograss (Toxoka) 1.6 Sand Dropseed 0.3 May 1 Blue Grama (xach;ta) 0.9 Buffalo rass (Toxoka> 1.6 11~ 164.2 to 164.2 Table 2 (continued) Permanent Urban Seed Mix District and Clay Soils Sandy Soils Planting Species and Rates Species and Rates Dates Ib. PLS/ac. lb. PLS/ac. 8 (Abilene) Green Sprangletop 0.3 Green Sprangletop 0.3 Feb. 1 Sideoats Grama (xaskeu) 3.6 Sand Dropseed 0.3 May 15 Blue Grama (xachita) 1.2 Sideoats Grama (xaskeu) 3.6 Buffalograss (Texoka) 1.6 Blue Grama (Hachita) 0.8 Buffalo rass (Texokal 1.6 9 (Waco) Green Sprangletop 0.3 Green Sprangletop 0.3 Feb. 1 - Bermudagrass 1.8 Buffalograss (Texoka) 1.6 May 15 Buffalograss (Texoka> 1.6 Bermudagrass 3.6 Sideoats Grama (xaskeu) 4.5 Sand Dro seed 0.4 10 (Tyler) Green Sprangletop 0.3 Green Sprangletop 0.3 Feb. 1 - Bermudagrass 2.4 Bermudagrass 5.4 Ma 15 Sideoats Grama (xaskeu) 4.5 11 (Lufkin) Green Sprangletop 0.3 Green Sprangletop 0.3 Feb. 1 - Bermudagrass 2.4 Bermudagrass 5.4 Ma 15 Sideoats Grama (xaskeu) 4.5 12 Green Sprangletop 0.3 Green Sprangletop 0.3 (Houston) Sideoats Grama (xaskeu) 4.5 Bermudagrass 5.4 Jan. 15 - Bermudagrass 2.4 Ma 15 13 Green Sprangletop 0.3 Green Sprangletop 0.3 (Yoakum) Sideoats Grama (Haskeu) 4.5 Bermudagrass 5.4 Jan. 15 - Bermudagrass 2.4 Ma 15 14 (Austin) Green Sprangletop 0.3 Green Sprangletop 0.3 Feb.l Bermudagrass 2.4 Bermudagrass 4.8 May 15 Sideoats Grama (xaskeu) 3.6 Buffalograss (Texoka) 1.6 Buffalo rass (Texoka) 1.6 15 (San Green Sprangletop 0.3 Green Sprangletop 0.3 Antonio) Sideoats Grama (xasketq 3.6 Bermudagrass 4.8 Feb. 1 - Bermudagrass 2.4 Buffalograss (Texoka) 1.6 Ma 1 Buffalo rass (Texoka) 1.6 16 (Corpus Green Sprangletop 0.3 Green Sprangletop 0.3 Christi) Sideoats Grama (xasketq 3.6 Bermudagrass 4.8 Jan. 1 - Bermudagrass 2.4 Buffalograss (Texoka) 1.6 Ma 1 Buffalo rass (Texoka) 1.6 111 ._ 164.2 to 164.2 Table 2 (continued) Permanent Urban Seed Mix District and Clay Soils Sandy Soils Planting Species and Rates Species and Rates Dates b. PLS/ac. lb. PLS/ac. 17 (Bryan) Green Sprangletop 0.3 Green Sprangletop 0.3 Feb. 1 - Bermudagrass 2.4 Bermudagrass 5.4 Ma I S Sideoats Grama ~xaekeul 4.5 18 (Dallas) Green Sprangletop 0.3 Green Sprangletop 0.3 Feb. 1 - Sideoats Grama ~Ei xenol 3.6 Buffalograss ~Texoka~ 1.6 May 15 Buffalograss 1Texoxal 1.6 Bermudagrass 3.6 Bermuda rass 2.4 Sand Dro seed 0.4 19 (Atlanta) Green Sprangletop 0.3 Green Sprangletop 0.3 Feb.l Bermudagrass 2.4 Bermudagrass 5.4 Ma 15 Sideoats Grama ~xasxeu> 4.5 20 Green Sprangletop 0.3 Green Sprangletop 0.3 (Beaumont) Bermudagrass 2.4 Bermudagrass 5.4 Jan. 15 - Sideoats Grama ~xasxeu> 4.5 Ma 15 21 (Pharr) Green Sprangletop 0.3 Green Sprangletop 0.3 Jan. 15 - Sideoats Grama ~xasxeu> 3.6 Buffalograss ~Texoka> 1.6 May 15 Buffalograss (Texoka> 1.6 Bermudagrass 3.6 Bermuda ass 2.4 Sand Dro seed 0.4 22 (Laredo) Green Sprangletop 0.3 Green Sprangletop 0.3 Jan. 15 Sideoats Grama ~xasxeu~ 4.5 Buffalograss ~Texoxai 1.6 May 1 Buffalograss ~rexoka> 1.6 Bermudagrass 3.6 Bermuda rass 1.8 Sand Dro seed 0.4 23 Green Sprangletop 0.3 Green Sprangletop 0.3 (Brownwood) Sideoats Grama Ixaskeu~ 3.6 Buffalograss ~Texoka~ 1.6 Feb.l Bermudagrass 1.2 Bermudagrass 3.6 Ma 15 Blue Grama ~xa~mca> 0.9 Sand Dro seed 0.4 24 (El Paso) Green Sprangletop 0.3 Green Sprangletop 0.3 Feb. 1 - Sideoats Grama (a~cce) 3.6 Buffalograss ~Texoxa~ 1.6 May 15 Blue Grama lxa~t„~1 1.2 Sand Dropseed 0.4 Buffalo rass ~Texoeal 1.6 Blue Grama ~xa~naa> 1.8 25 Green Sprangletop 0.3 Green Sprangletop 0.3 (Childress) Sideoats Grama cai aeoo~ 3.6 Sand Dropseed 0.4 Feb. 1 - Blue Grama rxa~h;ca~ 1.2 Buffalograss (Tezoka> 1.6 Ma 15 Buffalo rass (Tcxoka) 1.6 Bermuda rass 1.8 112 164.2 to 164.2 Table 3 Temnnrarv Cnnl Ceasnn Caadina Districts Dates Seed Mix and Rates Ib./ac. ' Paris (1), Amarillo (4), September 1 - Tall Fescue 4.5 Lubbock (5), Dallas (18) November 30 Western Wheatgrass 5.6 Wheat (Red, Winter) 34 Odessa (6), San Angelo (7), El September 1 - Western Wheatgrass 8.4 Paso (24) November 30 Wheat (Red, winter) 50 Waco (9), Tyler (10), Lufkin September 1 - Tall Fescue 4.5 (11), Austin (14), San Antonio November 30 Oats 24 (15), Bryan (17), Atlanta (19) Wheat 34 Houston (12), Yoakum (13), September 1 - Oats 72 Corpus Christi (16), Beaumont November 30 20 ,Pharr 21), Laredo 22 Ft. Worth (2), Wichita Falls September 1 - Tall Fescue 4.5 (3), Abilene (8), Brownwood November 30 Western Wheatgrass 5.6 (23), Childress (25) Cereal Rye 34 Table 4 Temnnrarv Warm Season Seedino Districts Dates Seed Mix and Rates ]b./ac. All Ma 1 - Au st 31 Foxtail Millet 34 B. Fertilizer. Use fertilizer in conformance with Article 166.2, "Materials." C. Vegetative Watering. Use water that is clean and free of industrial _, wastes and other substances harmful to the growth of vegetation. D. Mulch. 1. Straw or Hay Mulch. Use straw or hay mulch in conformance with Article 162.2.E, "Mulch." 2. Cellulose Fiber Mulch. Use only cellulose fiber mulches that are -- on the approved list published in "Field Performance of Erosion Control Products," available from the Maintenance Division. Submit 1 full set of manufacturer's literature for the selected material. Keep mulch dry until applied. Do not use molded or rotted material. E. Tacking Methods. Use a tacking agent applied in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations or a crimping method on all straw or 113 _ 164.3 to 164.3 hay mulch operations. Tacking agents must be approved before use, or specified on the plans. ._. 164.3. Construction. Cultivate the area to a depth of 4 in. before placing the seed unless otherwise directed. When performing permanent seeding after an established temporary seeding, cultivate the seedbed to a depth of ._ 4 in. or mow the area before placement of the permanent seed. Plant the seed specified and mulch, if required, after the area has been completed to lines and grades as shown on the plans. A. Broadcast Seeding. Distribute the seed or seed mixture uniformly over the areas shown on the plans using hand or mechanical distribution or _ hydro-seeding on top of the soil. When seed and water are to be distributed as a slurry during hydro-seeding, apply the mixture to the area to be seeded within 30 min. of placement of components in the equipment. Roll the planted area with a light roller or other suitable equipment. Roll sloped areas along the contour of the slopes. B. Straw or Hay Mulch Seeding. Plant seed according to Section 164.3.A, "Broadcast Seeding." Immediately after planting the seed or seed mixture, apply straw or hay mulch uniformly over the seeded area. Apply straw mulch at 2 to 2.5 tons per acre. Apply hay `~ mulch at 1.5 to 2 tons per acre. Use a tacking method over the mulched area. .~. C. Cellulose Fiber Mulch Seeding. Plant seed according to Section 164.3.A, "Broadcast Seeding." Immediately after planting the seed or seed mixture, apply cellulose fiber mulch uniformly over the seeded area at the following rates: • Sandy Soils with slopes of 3:1 or less-25001b. per acre. • Sandy Soils with slopes greater than 3:1-3000 lb. per acre. °-~ • Clay Soils with slopes of 3:1 or less-2000 lb. per acre. • Clay Soils with slopes greater than 3:1 2300 lb. per acre. Cellulose fiber mulch rates are based on dry weight of mulch per acre. Mix cellulose fiber mulch and water to make a slurry and apply uniformly over the seeded area using suitable equipment. -- D. Drill Seeding. Plant seed or seed mixture uniformly over the area shown on the plans at a depth of 1/4 to 1/3 in. using a pasture or rangeland type drill. Plant seed along the contour of the slopes. E. Straw or Hay Mulching. Apply straw or hay mulch uniformly over the area as indicated on the plans. Apply straw mulch at 2 to 2.5 tons per acre. Apply hay mulch at 1.5 to 2 tons per acre. Use a tacking method over the mulched area. 114 164.4 to 166.2 .~- Apply fertilizer in conformance with Article 166.3, "Construction." Seed and fertilizer may be distributed simultaneously during "Broadcast Seeding" operations, provided each component is applied at ~-- the specified rate. When temporary and permanent seeding are both specified for the same area, apply half of the required fertilizer during the temporary seeding operation and the other half during the "" permanent seeding operation. Water the seeded areas at the rates and frequencies as shown on the plans or as directed. 164.4. Measurement. This Item will be measured by the square yard or by m.. the acre. 164.5. Payment. The work performed and the materials furnished in ,_ accordance with this Item and measured as provided under "Measurement" will be paid for at the unit price bid for "Broadcast Seeding (Perm)" of the rural or urban seed mixture and sandy or clay soil specified, "Broadcast a... Seeding (Temp)" of warm or cool season specified, "Straw or Hay Mulch Seeding (Perm)" of the rural or urban seed mixture and sandy or clay soil specified, "Straw or Hay Mulch Seeding (Temp)" of warm or cool season specified, "Cellulose Fiber Mulch Seeding (Perm)" of the rural or urban seed mixture and sandy or clay soil specified, "Cellulose Fiber Mulch Seeding (Temp)" of warm or cool season specified, "Drill Seeding (Perm)" -- of the rural or urban seed mixture and sandy or clay soil specified, "Drill Seeding (Temp)" of warm or cool season specified, and "Straw or Hay Mulching." This price is full compensation for furnishing materials, including water for hydro-seeding and hydro-mulching operations, mowing, labor, equipment, tools, supplies, and incidentals. Fertilizer will not be paid for directly but will be subsidiary to this Item. Water for irrigating the "'" seeded area, when specified, will be paid for under Item 168, "Vegetative Watering." ITEM 166 FERTILIZER 166.1. Description. Provide and distribute fertilizer over areas specified on the plans. 166.2. Materials. Use a complete fertilizer containing nitrogen (N), s phosphoric acid (P), and potash (K) nutrients unless otherwise specified on the plans. At least 50% of the nitrogen component must be of aslow-release 115 -- 166.2 to 168.3 °- formulation such as urea-based and plastic resin-coated fertilizers. Ensure that fertilizer is in an acceptable condition for distribution in containers labeled with the analysis. Fertilizer is subject to testing by the Texas A&M Feed and Fertilizer Control Service in accordance with the Texas Fertilizer Law. 166.3. Construction. Deliver and apply the complete fertilizer uniformly at a rate equal to 1001b. of nitrogen per acre or at the analysis and rate specified on the plans. 166.4. Measurement. When fertilizer is specified on the plans to be a pay item, measurement will be by the acre of surface area covered or by the ton ~~ (2,000 lb.). Measurement by the ton will use guaranteed weight of bags or containers as shown by the manufacturer or certified scales meeting the requirements of Item 520, "Weighing and Measuring Equipment," unless otherwise approved. _. 166.5. Payment. Unless otherwise specified on the plans, the work performed, materials furnished, equipment, labor, tools, and incidentals will not be paid for directly but will be considered subsidiary to bid items of the ,v Contract. When fertilizer is specified on the plans to be a pay item, the work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and ~- measured as provided under "Measurement" will be paid for at the unit price bid for "Fertilizer." This price is full compensation for furnishing materials and performing operations. ITEM 168 VEGETATIVE WATERING 168.1. Description. Provide and distribute water to promote growth of vegetation as directed. 168.2. Materials. Use water that is clean and free of industrial wastes and "~ other substances harmful to the growth of vegetation. 168.3. Construction. Apply water when directed. Furnish and operate equipment to distribute water at a uniform and controllable rate. Ensure that watering does not erode soil or plantings. Apply water in the required quantity where shown on the plans or as directed. 116 204.1 to 210.2 200 ITEMS - SUBGRADE TREATMENTS AND BASE ITEM 204 SPRINKLING 204.1. Description. Apply water for dust control, earthwork, or base wnstruction. 204.2. Materials. Furnish water free of industrial wastes and other objectionable matter. "- 204.3. Equipment. Use sprinklers and spray bazs equipped with positive and rapidly working cut-off valves. '- 204.4. Construction. Apply water at a uniform rate and in the required quantity, or as duected. 204.5. Measurement. This Item will be measured by the 1,000 gal. applied. -- 204.6. Payment. Unless sprinkling is specified as a pay item, the work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item will not be paid for directly but will be subsidiary to pertinent Items. When sprinkling is specified on the plans as a pay item, the work performed and water furnished will be paid for at the unit price bid for "Sprinkling (Base)," "Sprinkling (Earthwork)," or "Sprinkling (Dust Control)." This price is full compensation for furnishing and applying water; furnishing and operating sprinklers and measuring devices; and hauling, equipment, labor, fuel, materials, tools, and incidentals. ITEM 210 ROLLING 210.1. Description. Compact embankment, subgrade, base, surface "` treatments, broken concrete pavement, or asphalt pavement using rollers. Breakup asphalt mats, pit nm material, or base materials. "' 210.2. Equipment. The Contractor may use any type of rol]er to meet the production rates and quality requirements of the Contract unless otherwise shown on the plans or directed. When specific types of equipment aze 133 210.2 to 210.2 '~ required, use equipment that meets the requirements of this Article. The Engineer may allow the use of rollers that operate in one direction only when fuming does not affect the quality of work or encroach on traffic. Table 1 Rnller Rennirrmentct Roller Materials to be Load Contact Roller Speed Type Compacted (tons) Pressure h m Embankment, ? 325 Ib. per Steel wheel subgrade, base, ? ] 0 linear inch of 2-3 asphalt concrete wheel width Tamping Embankment, _ 125-550 psi per 2 3 sub ade, base tam in foot Heavy Embankment, <_ 550 psi per 2-3 tam in sub ade, base tam in foot Type A < 6 Embankment, Type B > 6 Per equipment Vibratory subgrade, base, Type C as specification As approved asphalt concrete shown on and as approved plans Embankment, Light subgrade, base, 2~i pneumatic surface treatment 4.5-9.0 ? 45 psi Asphalt Concrete 4-12 Medium Same as light ~ 80 psi' as ~ as S pneumatic pneumatic 12-25 directed I ht g neumaUc Embankment, subgrade, base, Heavy previously broken > 25 < I50 psi 2-6 pneumatic concrete pavement, other avements Embankment, Grid base, breaking up 5-13 - 2-3 existing asphalt mats or base ].Unless otherwise specified in the Contract. A. Static Steel Wheel Rollers. Furnish single, double, or triple steel wheel, self-propelled power rollers weighing at least 10 tons capable of 134 210.2 to 210.2 "' operating in a forward and backward motion. Ensure all wheels aze flat. When static steel wheel rollers are required, vibratory rollers in the static mode may be used. For single steel wheel rollers, pneumatic reaz wheels aze allowed for embankment, subgrade, and base. For triple steel wheel rollers, provide ,_ rear wheels with a minimum diameter of 48 in., a minimum width of 20 in., and a minimum compression of 3251b. per inch of wheel width. B. Tamping Rollers. Furnish self-propelled rollers with at least 1 self- cleaning metal tamping drum capable of operating in a forwazd or backwazd motion with a minimum effective rolling width of 5 ft. For rollers with more than 1 drum, mount drums in a frame so that each -- drum moves independently of the other. Operate rollers in static or vibratory mode. 1. Tamping Roller (Minimum Requirement). For all tamping rollers except for heavy tamping rollers, provide tamping feet that exert a static load of 125 to 550 psi and project at least 3 in. from the surface of the drum. 2. Heavy Tamping Roller. Provide tamping rollers that have: • 2 metal tamping drums, rolls, or shells, each with a 60-in. minimum diameter and a 5-ft. minimum width, or • 1 rear and 2 forwazd drums, each with a 60-in. minimum diameter. Arrange drums so that the reaz drum compacts the ~-- space between the 2 forward drums and the minimum overall rolling width is 10 ft. Equip drums with tamping feet that: • project at least 7 in. from the drum surface, • have an area of 7 to 21 sq. in., • aze self-cleaning, v • exert a static load of at least 550 psi, and • are spaced at 1 tamping foot per 0.65 to 0.70 sq. ft. of drum area. C. Vibratory Rollers. Furnish self-propelled rollers with at least 1 drum equipped to vibrate. Select and maintain amplitude and frequency .._ settings per manufacturer's specifications to deliver maximum compaction without material displacement or shoving, as approved. Furnish the equipment manufacturer's specifications concerning •- settings and controls for amplitude and frequency. Operate rollers at speeds that will produce at least 10 blows per foot unless otherwise shown on the plans or approved. Pneumatic rear wheels are allowed for -- embankment, subgrade, and base. Equip each vibrating drum with: 135 - 210.2 to 210.2 • sepazate frequency and amplitude controls, • controls to manually start and stop vibration, and .... a mechanism to continuously clean the face of the drum. For asphalt-stabilized base and asphalt concrete pavement, furnish a roller that also has the ability to: '"' • automatically reverse the direction of the rotating eccentric weight, • stop vibration before the motion of the roller stops, and • thoroughly moisten the drum with water or approved asphalt release agent. 1. Drum (Type A). Furnish a roller with a static weight less than ,-, 6 tons and a vibratory drum. 2. Drum (Type B). Furnish a roller with a minimum static weight of 6 tons and a vibratory drum. - 3. Drum (Type C). Furnish a roller as shown on plans. D. Pueumatic Tire Rollers. Pneumatic fire rollers consist of rubber fire .., wheels on axles mounted in a frame with either a loading platform or body suitable for ballast loading. Arrange the rear tires to cover the gaps between adjacent tires of the forward group. Furnish rollers ,., capable of forward and backward motion. Compact asphalt pavements and surface treatments with a roller equipped with smooth-tread tires. Compact without damaging the surface. When necessary, moisten the _.. wheels with water or an approved asphalt release agent. Select and maintain the operating load and fire air pressure within the range of the manufacturer's charts or tabulations to attain maximum i compaction throughout the lift, as approved. Furnish the manufacturer's chart or tabulations showing the contact areas and contact pressures for the full range of fire inflation pressures and for the full range of loadings for the particulaz tires furnished. Maintain individual fire inflation pressures within 5 psi of each other. Provide uniform compression under all tires. ~.. 1. Light Pneumatic Tire. Furnish a unit: • with at least 9 pneumatic tires, ,_ • with an effective rolling width of approximately 5 ft., • capable of providing a total uniform load of 4.5 to 9 tons, and • with tires capable of maintaining a minimum ground contact ~. pressure of 45 psi. 2. Medium Pneumatic Tire. Furnish a unit: • with at least 7 pneumatic tires, • with an effective rolling width of approximately 7 ft., 136 210.3 to 210.4 • capable of providing a total uniform load of 12 to 25 tons, and • with tires capable of maintaining a minimum ground contact pressure of 80 psi or 90 psi as directed. 3. Heavy Pneumatic Tire. Furnish a unit: • with at least 4 pneumatic-tired wheels mounted on axles carrying at most 2 wheels, ""` • with wheels arranged to carry approximately equal loads on uneven surfaces, • with a width between 8 and 10 ft. that can tum 180° in the crown width, • capable of providing a total uniform load of at ]east 25 tons, • with tires capable of maintaining a maximum ground contact pressure of 150 psi, and • with liquid-filled tires inflated to such a level that liquid will ,_ flow from the valve stem when the stem is in the uppermost position. E. Grid Rollers. Furnish rollers that have 2 cylindrical cages with a w- minimum diameter of 66 in. and a minimum width of 32 in. Mount cages in a rigid frame with weight boxes. Use a cage surface of cast or welded steel fabric grid with bazs 1-1/2 in. wide, spaced on 5-in. centers in each direction, that undulate approximately 1 in. between the high and low points. Furnish rollers capable of providing a total load of 5 to 13 tons and _, capable of being operated in a forward or backwazd motion. F. Alternate Equipment. Instead of the specified equipment, the Contractor may, as approved, operate other compaction equipment that produces equivalent results. Discontinue the use of the alternate equipment and furnish the specified equipment if the desired results aze ~-- not achieved. 210.3. Construction. Perform this work in accordance with the applicable .~ Items using equipment and roller speeds specified in Table 1. Use only rubber-tired equipment to push or pull compaction equipment on base courses. Use equipment that does not damage material being rolled. 210.4. Measurement and Payment. The work performed, materials furnished, equipment, labor, tools, and incidentals will not be measured or paid for directly but will be subsidiary to pertinent Items. 137 -- 216.1 to 247.2 ~- ITEM 216 PROOF ROLLING 216.1. Descripfion. Proof-roll earthwork, base, or both to locate unstable azeas. '~' 216.2. Equipment. A. Specified Equipment. Furnish rollers that when loaded weigh at least ... 25 tons. The maximum acceptable load is 50 tons. Provide rollers that meet the requirements of Section 210.2.D, "Pneumatic Tire Rollers." B. Alternative Equipment. Instead of the specified equipment, the -- Contractor may, as approved, operate other compaction equipment that produces equivalent results in the same period of time. Discontinue the use of the alternative equipment and furnish the specified equipment if °° the desired results are not achieved. 216.3. Constrncrion. Perform proof rolling as directed. Adjust the load - and tire inflation pressures within the range of the manufacturer's charts or tabulations, as directed. Make at least 2 coverages with the proof roller. Offset each trip of the roller by at most 1 tire width. Operate rollers at a - speed between 2 and 6 miles per hour, as directed. If an unstable or non- uniform azea is found, correct the area in accordance with the applicable Item. - 216.4. Measurement. Rolling will be measured by the hour operated on surfaces being tested. 216.5. Payment. The work performed and equipment furnished in accordance with this Item and measured as provided under "Measurement" will be paid for at the unit price bid for "Proof Rolling" This price is full compensation for furnishing and operating equipment and for labor, materials, tools, and incidentals. ITEM 247 FLEXIBLE BASE 247.1. Description. Construct a foundation course composed of flexible base. 247.2. Materials. Fumish uncontaminated materials of uniform quality that meet the requirements of the plans and specifications. Notify the Engineer 138 247.2 to 247.2 of the proposed material sources and of changes to material sources. The Engineer may sample and test project materials at any time before compaction throughout the duration of the project to assure specification compliance. Use Tex-100-E material definitions. A. Aggregate. Furnish aggregate of the type and grade shown on the plans and conforming to the requirements of Table 1. Each source must meet Table 1 requirements for liquid limit, plasticity index, and wet ball mill for the grade specified. Do not use additives such as but not limited to lime, cement, or fly ash to modify aggregates to meet the requirements of Table 1, unless shown on the plans. Table i Material Requirements Pro a Test Method Grade 1 Grade 2 Grade 3 Grade 4 Master gradation sieve size % retained) 2-I/2 in. - 0 0 1-3/4 in. 0 0-10 0-10 n As sho 7/8 in. Tex-110-E 10-35 - - w on the plans 318 in. 30-50 - - No.4 45-65 45-75 45-75 No. 40 70-85 60-85 50-85 Liquid limit % max.' Tex-104-E 35 40 40 As shown , on the lans Plasticity index, max.' 10 12 12 As shown Tex-106-E on the lans Plastici index, min.' As shown on the lans Wet ball mdl, %max.~ 40 45 - Wet ball mill, %max. Tex-116-E As shown increase passing the 20 20 - on the plans No. 40 sieve Classification' 1.0 l.1-2.3 _ As shown on the lans Min. compressive strength3 psi Tex-117-E As shown laferal pressure 0 psi 45 35 - on the plans lateral pressure 15 psi 175 175 - 1. Determine plastic index in accordance with Tex-107-E (lineaz shrinkage) when liquid limit is unattainable as defined in Tex-104-E. „_. 2. When a soundness value is required by the plans, test material in awordance with Tex-411-A. 3. Meet both the classification and the minimum compressive strength, unless otherwise shown on the plans. 139 _, 247.2 to 247.2 1. Material Tolerances. The Engineer may accept material if no more than 1 of the 5 most recent gradation tests has an individual sieve outside the specified limits of the gradation. When target grading is required by the plans, no single failing test may exceed the master grading by more than 5 percentage points on sieves No. 4 and larger or 3 percentage points on sieves smaller than No. 4. The Engineer may accept material if no more than 1 of the 5 most "'" recent plasticity index tests is outside the specified limit. No single failing test may exceed the allowable limit by more than 2 points. _ 2. Material Types. Do not use fillers or binders unless approved. Furnish the type specified on the plans in accordance with the following. a. Type A. Crushed stone produced and graded from oversize quarried aggregate that originates from a single, naturally occurring source. Do not use gravel or multiple sources. b. Type B. Crushed or uncnxshed gravel. Blending of 2 or more sources is allowed. ..... c. Type C. Crushed gravel with a minimum of 60% of the particles retained on a No. 4 sieve with 2 or more crushed faces as determined by Tex-460-A, Part I. Blending of 2 or -- more sources is allowed. d. Type D. Type A material or crushed concrete. Crushed concrete containing gravel will be considered Type D ""- material. Crushed concrete must meet the requirements in Section 247.2.A.3.b, "Recycled Material (Including Crushed Concrete} Requirements," and be managed in a way to provide for uniform quality. The Engineer may require sepazate dedicated stockpiles in order to verify compliance. ,.., e. Type E. As shown on the plans. 3. Recycled Material. Recycled asphalt pavement (RAP) and other recycled materials may be used when shown on the plans. Request approval to blend 2 or more sources of recycled materials. a. Limits on Percentage. When RAP is allowed, do not exceed 20% RAP by weight unless otherwise shown on the plans. The percentage limitations for other recycled materials will be as shown on the plans. 140 247.2 to 247.2 '- b. Recycled Material (Including Crushed Concrete) Requirements. „_ (1) Contractor Furnished Recycled Materials. When the Contractor furnishes the recycled materials, including crushed concrete, the final product will be subject to the ,.. requirements of Table 1 for the grade specified. Certify compliance with DMS-11000, "Evaluating and Using Nonhazardous Recyclable Materials Guidelines," for ~. Contractor furnished recycled materials. In addition, recycled materials must be free from reinforcing steel and other objectionable material and have at most 1.5% -- deleterious material when tested in accordance with Tex-413-A. For RAP, do not exceed a maximum percent loss from decantation of 5.0% when tested in accordance -- with Tex-406-A. Test RAP without removing the asphalt. (2) Department Furnished Required Recycled Materials. When the Department furnishes and requires the use of "- recycled materials, unless otherwise shown on the plans: • Department required recycled material will not be subject to the requirements in Table 1, "- • Contractor fiunished materials aze subject to the requirements in Table 1 and this Item, • the fmal product, blended, will be subject to the requirements in Table 1, and • For fmal product, unblended (100% Department furnished required recycled material), the liquid limit, plasticity index, wet ball mill, classification, and compressive strength is waived. ... Crush Department-furnished RAP so that 100% passes the 2 in. sieve. The Contractor is responsible for uniformly blending to meet the percentage required. "' (3) Department Furnished and Allowed Recycled Materials. When the Department furnishes and allows the use of recycled materials or allows the Contractor to ® furnish recycled materials, the final blended product is subject to the requirements of Table 1 and the plans. ,._ c Recycled Material Sources. Department-owned recycled material is available to the Contractor only when shown on the plans. Return unused Department-owned recycled materials to 141 ~` 247.3 to 247.4 the Department stockpile location designated by the Engineer unless otherwise shown on the plans. .~ The use of Contractor-owned recycled materials is allowed when shown on the plans. Contractor-owned surplus recycled materials remain the property of the Contractor. Remove -- Contractor-owned recycled materials from the project and dispose of them in accordance with federal, state, and local regulations before project acceptance. Do not intermingle -- Contractor-owned recycled material with Department-owned recycled material unless approved by the Engineer. B. Water. Furnish water free of industrial wastes and other objectionable matter. C. Material Sources. When non-commercial sources are used, expose the vertical faces of all strata of material proposed for use. Secure and process the material by successive vertical cuts extending through all exposed strata, when directed. - 247.3. Equipment. Provide machinery, tools, and equipment necessary for proper execution of the work. Provide rollers in accordance with Item 210, .,, "Rolling."Provide proof rollers in accordance with Item 216, "Proof Rolling," when required. - 247.4. Construction. Construct each layer uniformly, free of loose or segregated azeas, and with the required density and moisture content. Provide a smooth surface that conforms to the typical sections, lines, and - grades shown on the plans or as directed. Stockpile base material temporarily at an approved location before delivery to the roadway. Build stockpiles in layers no greater than 2 ft. thick. -- Stockpiles must have a total height between 10 and 16 ft. unless otherwise shown on the plans. After construction and acceptance of the stockpile, loading from the stockpile for delivery is allowed. Load by making - successive vertical cuts through the entire depth of the stockpile. Do not add or remove material from temporary stockpiles that require sampling and testing before delivery unless otherwise approved. Chazges - for additional sampling and testing required as a result of adding or removing material will be deducted from the Contractor's estimates. - Haul approved flexible base in clean trucks. Deliver the required quantity to each 100-ft. station or designated stockpile site as shown on the plans. Prepare stockpile sites as directed. When delivery is to the 100-ft. station, - manipulate in accordance with the applicable Items. 142 247.4 to 247.4 A. Preparation of Subgrade or Existing Base. Remove or scarify existing asphalt concrete pavement in accordance with Item 105, "Removing Stabilized Base and Asphalt Pavement," when shown on the plans or as directed. Shape the subgrade or existing base to conform to the typical sections shown on the plans or as directed. - When new base is required to be mixed with existing base, deliver, place, and spread the new flexible base in the required amount per station. Manipulate and thoroughly mix the new base with existing material to provide a uniform mixture to the specified depth before shaping. When shown on the plans or directed, proof roll the roadbed in ~. accordance with Item 216, "Proof Rolling," before pulverizing or scarifying. Correct soft spots as directed. B. Placing. Spread and shape flexible base into a uniform layer with an approved spreader the same day as delivered unless otherwise approved. Construct layers to the thickness shown on the plans. ._ Maintain the shape of the course. Control dust by sprinkling, as directed. Correct or replace segregated areas as directed, at no additional expense to the Department. °" Place successive base courses and finish courses using the same construction methods required for the first course. C. Compaction. Compact using density control unless otherwise shown on the plans. Multiple lifrs aze permitted when shown on the plans or approved. Bring each layer to the moisture content directed. When r necessary, sprinkle the material in accordance with Item 204, "Sprinkling" Begin rolling longitudinally at the sides and proceed towards the center, overlapping on successive trips by at least 1/2 the width of the roller unit. On superelevated curves, begin rolling at the low side and progress toward the high side. Offset alternate trips of the roller. °- Operate rollers at a speed between 2 and 6 mph as directed. Rework, recompact, and refmish material that fails to meet or that loses required moisture, density, stability, or finish before the next course is '~ placed or the project is accepted. Continue work until specification requirements are met. Perform the work at no additional expense to the _ Department. 1. Ordinary Compaction. Roil with approved compaction equipment as directed. Correct irregularities, depressions, and weak spots immediately by scarifying the areas affected, adding or 143 `" 247.5 to 247.5 removing approved material as required, reshaping, and recompacting. 2. Density Control. Compact to at least 100% of the maximum density determined by Tex-113-E unless otherwise shown on the plans. Determine the moisture content of the material at the beginning and during compaction in accordance with Tex-103-E. The Engineer will determine roadway density of completed sections in accordance with Tex-115-E. The Engineer may accept the section if no more than 1 of the 5 most recent density tests is below the specified density and the failing test is no more than 3 pcf below the specified density. - D. Finishing. After completing compaction, clip, skin, or tight-blade the surface with a maintainer or subgrade trimmer to a depth of ._. approximately 1/4 in. Remove loosened material and dispose of it at an approved location. Seal the clipped surface immediately by rolling with a pneumatic rire roller until a smooth surface is attained. Add small ._ increments of water as needed during rolling. Shape and maintain the course and surface in conformity with the typical sections, lines, and grades as shown on the plans or as directed. '"' In azeas where surfacing is to be placed, correct grade deviations greater than 1/4 in. in 16 ft. measured longitudinally or greater than 1/4 in. over the entire width of the cross-section. Cored by loosening, "' adding, or removing material. Reshape and recompact in accordance with Section 247.4.C, "Compaction ,_ E. Curing. Cure the finished section until the moisture content is at least 2 percentage points below optimum or as directed before applying the next successive course or prime coat. 247.5. Measurement. Flexible base will be measured as follows: • Flexible Base (Complete In Place). The ton, square yazd, or any cubic yard method. • Flexible Base (Roadway Delivery). The ton or cubic yard in vehicle. • Flexible Base (Stockpile Delivery). The ton, cubic Yazd in vehicle, or „~ cubic yazd in stockpile. Measurement by the cubic yazd in final position and square yard is a plans quantity measurement. The quantity to be paid for is the quantity shown in ~- the proposal unless modified by Article 9.2, "Plans Quantity Measurement" Additional measurements or calculations will be made if adjustments of quantities aze required. 144 °" 247.6 to 247.6 ~` Measurement is further defined for payment as follows. A. Cubic Yard in Vehicle. By the cubic yard in vehicles of uniform .._ capacity at the point of delivery. B. Cubic Yard in Stockpile. By the cubic yazd in the final stockpile position by the method of average end areas. C. Cubic Yard in Final Position. By the cubic yazd in the completed and accepted final position. The volume of base course is computed in ,~ place by the method of average end areas between the original subgrade or existing base surfaces and the lines, grades, and slopes of the accepted base course as shown on the plans. -- D. Square Yard. By the squaze yazd of surface azea in the completed and accepted final position. The surface area of the base course is based on the width of flexible base as shown on the plans. E. Ton. By the ton of dry weight in vehicles as delivered. The dry weight is determined by deducting the weight of the moisture in the material at the rime of weighing from the gross weight of the material. The ~~ Engineer will determine the moisture content in the material in accordance with Tex-103-E from samples taken at the time of weighing. When material is measured in trucks, the weight of the material will be determined on certified scales, or the Contractor must provide a set of y- standazd platform truck scales at a location approved by the Engineer. Scales must conform to the requirements of Item 520, "Weighing and Measuring Equipment." v 247.6. Payment. The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and measured as provided under "Measurement" ... will be paid for at the unit price bid for the types of work shown below. No additional payment will be made for thickness or width exceeding that shown on the typical section or provided on the plans for cubic yard in the ~- final position or square yard measurement. Sprinkling and rolling, except proof rolling, will not be paid for directly but will be subsidiary to this Item unless otherwise shown on the plans. When "' proof rolling is shown on the plans or directed, it will be paid for in accordance with Item 216, "Proof Rolling." ,., Where subgrade is constructed under this Contract, correction of soft spots in the subgrade will be at the Contractor's expense. Where subgrade is not constructed under this project, correction of soft spots in the subgrade will 145 ~~ 251.1 to 251.2 be paid in accordance with pertinent Items or Article 4.2, "Changes in the Work." .- A. Flexible Base (Complete In Place). Payment will be made for the type and grade specified. For cubic yard measurement, "In Vehicle," "In Stockpile," or "In Final Position" will be specified. For square yard ~- measurement, a depth will be specified. This price is full compensation for furnishing materials, temporary stockpiling, assistance provided in stockpile sampling and operations to level stockpiles for measurement, - loading, hauling, delivery of materials, spreading, blading, mixing, shaping, placing, compacting, reworking finishing, correcting locations where thickness is deficient, curing, furnishing scales and labor for ~- weighing and measuring, and equipment, labor, tools, and incidentals. B. Flexible Base (Roadway Delivery). Payment will be made for the type and grade specified. For cubic yard measurement, "In Vehicle" will be specified. The unit price bid will not include processing at the roadway. This price is full compensation for furnishing materials, temporary stockpiling, assistance provided in stockpile sampling and operations to ,_ level stockpiles for measurement, loading, hauling, delivery of materials, furnishing scales and labor for weighing and measuring, and equipment, labor, tools, and incidentals. C. Flexible Base (Stockpile Delivery). Payment will be made for the type and grade specified. For cubic yard measurement, "In Vehicle" or "In -- Stockpile" will be specified. The unit price bid will not include processing at the roadway. This price is full compensation for famishing and disposing of materials, preparing the stockpile area, •~- temporary or permanent stockpiling, assistance provided in stockpile sampling and operations to level stockpiles for measurement, loading, hauling, delivery of materials to the stockpile, famishing scales and -- labor for weighing and measuring, and equipment, labor, tools, and incidentals. ITEM 251 REWORKING BASE COURSES 251.1. Description. Refinish existing base material or rework existing base material with or without asphaltic concrete pavement. Incorporate new base material when shown on plans. 251.2. Materials. Furnish uncontaminated materials of uniform quality that -- meet the requirements of the plans and specifications. Notify the Engineer 145 300.1 to 300.3 300 TTEMS -SURFACE CdURSES AND PAVEMENT ITEM 300 ASPHALTS, OILS, AND EMULSIONS 300.1. Description. Provide asphalt cements, cutback and emulsified asphalts, performance-graded asphalt binders, and other miscellaneous °- asphalt materials as specified on the plans. 300.3. Materials. Provide asphalt materials that meet the stated requirements when tested in accordance with the referenced Department, AASFITO, and ASTM test methods. Refer to the Material Inspection Guide (maintained by the Construction Division), Section 11. "Asphalt Inspection, -- Quality Control and Quality Assurance," for sampling and testing requirements. Acronyms used in this Item aze defined in Table 1. Table 1 Arrnnvms Acronv_ m Definition _ _ Test Procedure Designations_ _ -------------- ------------- Tex De artment p T or R AASHTO D ASTM _ __________ _PolymerModitierDesignations ____ ____ ___ P polymer-modified SBR or L styrene-butadiene rubber (latex) SBS styrene-butadiene-styrene block co-polymer TR fire rubber (from ambient temperature rindin of truck and risen er tires) AC asphalt cement AE as halt emulsion AE-P as halt emulsion rime A-R as halt-rubber C cationic EAl'&T emulsified as halt rime and tack H-suffix harder residue lower enetration HF hi float MC medium-curio 199 300.3 to 300.3 Table 1 (continued) Acrnnvms Acron m Definition MS medium-settin PCE rime cure, and erosion control PG rformance ade RC ra id-curio RS r id-settin S-suffix stoc ile u SCM s ecial cutback material SS slow-settin A. Aspha-t Cement. Asphalt cement must be homogeneous, water-free, and nonfoaming when heated to 347°F, and must meet Table 2 requirements. Table 2 Acnhnlt Cement Vis cosi' Grade Property Test AG11.6 AC-1.5 AC-3 AC-5 AC-10 Procedure Min;Maz Min;Maz in;Maz in;Maa Min'Maa Viscosity T 202 140°F, poise 40 ~ 80 100 ~ 200 250; 350 400; 600 800;1,200 275°F, oise 0.4' - u.7; - i.I' - L4; - L9' - Penetration, 77°F, 1008, T49 350; - 250; - 210; - 135; - 85 ; - 5sec. Flash int C.O.C., °F T 48 425 ~ - 425 ~ - 425 ~ - 425 ~ - 450 ~ - Solubility in T 44 99.0 - 99.17 - 99.0 - 99.0 - 9A0~ - trichloroeth lene, S of test Tex-509-C Ne Ne Ne Ne Ne . T€ccs nn rg?idue from ' Thin-Film Oven Test: T 179 ' I ; I Viswsity, 140°F, poise T 202 ~ 180 - I - ~ 450 - ~ 900 - ~1,SOO - 3,000 T 51 100 - 100 - 100 - 1001 100 ~ cm/min.,cm 1. If AC-0.6 or AC-1.5 ductility at 77°F is less than 100 an, matenal is acceptable ~t aucnuty at 60°F is more than 100 cm. B. Polymer-Modified Asphalt Cement. Polymer-modifed asphalt cement must be smooth and homogeneous, and comply with the requirements of Table 3. Tf requested, supply samples of the base asphalt cement and polymer additives. 200 Table 3 Polymer-Modified Asphalt Cement N' 0 .+ _ Pol men-Modilie d Visaosit Grad e Pro er P ~ Test AC-5 AC-10 AC-ISP AC-20-STR Procedure w/2%SBR w/2°h SBR Miu Max Min ~ Max Min ~ Max Min Mex ~. Pol er SBR SBR SBS TR Pol er content, % solids basis Tex-533-C 2,0 2.D - 3.p - 5.0 - D namic shear, Ci*/sin S~, 64°C, 10 rad/s, kPa T 315 - - - - - 1.0 - Viscosity 140°F, poise T202 700 - 1,300 ; - l,SDD - 2',D00 - 275°F, oise T202 - ~ 7.0 - ~ 8.0 - ~ 8l.0 ~ 10.0 Penetration, 77°F, 100 , 5 sec. T49 12D - 80 - IOD ~ 150 7i ~ 115 Ductility, 5cm/min., 39.2°F, cm T 51 70 - 60 - - - - ~ Elastic recovery, 50°F, X Tex-539-C - - - - SS - SS - Softenin oint, °F T S3 - - - - - - 120 - Pol Amer se azatian, 48 hr. Tex-540-C None None None None 2 Flash oint. C.O.C., °F T 48 425 ~ - 425 ~ - 425 ~ - 425 - ~ 'Rests on residue from Thin-Film Oven Tes[: T 179 Retained etretrationratio, 77°F T49 - - 0.60 1,00 0.60 ; 1.00 71'ests on residue from RTFOT aging and pressure aging: Tex-541-C and R 28 Creep stiffness T 313 S, -18°C, MPa - - - - - - _ 300 m-value, -18°C' - - - - - 0.300 ; - O O N .~ O W d IJ 300.3 to 3003 C. Cutback Asphalt. Cutback asphalt must meet the requirements of Tables 4, 5, and 6 for the specified type and grade. If requested, supply samples of the base asphalt cement and polymer additives. Table 4 Ranid_Cnrina Cnthack Asphalt T. a-Grade Property RC-250 RCA00 RC-3000 Proc dare 11'rur ; Mu Min ' Maa Min ~ Mu K•rs~tic cis~si ~ 14C°F, c82 T 201 2SC 4ffJ 800 1,600 3,000 6,000 Water % T 55 ; 0.2 0.2 ; 0.2 Flash int, T.O.C., °F T 79 80 - 80 - 80 - llistille[iontest '1' 78 Distillate, percentage by volume of total distillate [0 680°F to 437°F 40 ; 7S 35 ; 70 20 ; SS to 500°F 65 ; 90 SS ~ 85 45 ; 75 m 600°F 85 - 80 ; - 70 Resrdue from distillation, volume % 70 - 75 ; - 82 - Tests on distillation residue: Pcnctratiat, : JO g, S sca., 77°F T 49 80 120 80 120 8C 120 DuctiliTy, S caJmin., 77°F, cm T 51 100 - 100 ; - 100 - SolubiliTyintrichloroemylene,% T44 99.0 ~ 99.0 ~ - 99.0 - 8 ttest Tex-509-C Ne Ne . Ne . Tabee 5 Mndinm_Cnrinv CSrthack Asphalt T" a-Glade Properly MC-30 MC-250 MC-800 MC-3000 Pnxxdure Mur'Maa Mm'Ma: Min'Max Min 'Mu Kinematic viscosi , 140°F, eSt T 201 30 60 250 ; 500 800 ;1,600 3,000 ; 6,000 Water,% TSS ~ 0.2 - ~ 0.2 - ~ 0.2 - ~ 0.2 Flash oint, T.O.C., °F T 79 ]00 ; - 150 ; - I50 ; - ]SO - Distillationtest: T 78 Distillate, percentage by volume of totsl die!v!ate is 500°F to 437°F 1 - ~ 25 - ; 10 I - - - - to500°F 40 ~ 70 15 55 - 35 - ]S iv bo"0°F 75 53 6ir ; 87 35 8G iS 7S Residue from distillation, volume % 50 ; 67 ; - 7S ; - 80 ; - Tests on distillation residue: Penetration, 100 g, 5 sec., 77°F T 49 120 ; 250 120 ; 250 120 ; 2S0 120 250 Ductility, S cm/min., 77°F, cm' T 51 l00 ~ - 100 ; - 100 ~ - 100 ~ - SolubiliTy in tdchlomethylene, % T 44 99.0 ; - 99.0 ; - 99,0 ; - 99.0 - .Spot test Tex-509-C ~ Neg. ~ Neg. Neg. ~ Neg. 1. If the penetration of residue is more than 200 and the ductility at 77°F rs less man lUU cm, me matenal rs acceptable if its ductility at 60°F is more than 100 om. ZOZ 300.2 to 3ot1.2 Table 6 Special-Use Cutback Asnhalt T e-irade Propa*ty ProTce~ilare MC-2400L SCM I SCM II a Mtn Msx Kinematic viscosi , 140°F, cSt T 201 2,400 ~ 4,800 500 1,000 1,000 ' 2,000 Water, % T 55 - ~ 0.2 ; 0.2 ~ 0.2 Flssh last, T.O.C.. °F T 79 150 ~ 175 - 175 ' - Distillation test T 78 Distillate, percentage by volume of total aisriilaie to o80°F to 437°F - _ _ _ _ _ to 500°F - 35 - 0.5 - 0.5 to 600°F 35 80 20 ; 60 15 50 Residue from distillation, volume % 78 16 82 Tests on distillation residue: Polymer SBR ~ - Polymer content, % (solids basis) Tex-533-C 2.0 ~ - _ _ _ _ Pwnanwfinn; l00 g;5s.w_, 77°F T49 150 ;(1(1 IR(1 _ A(t _ 1. Ductility, 5 cm/min., 39.2°F, cm T 51 50 - - - _ _ Solubili in triclilotoeUt lease, % T 44 99.0 ~ 99.0 ~ 99.0 ~ - D. Emulsified Asphalt. Emulsified asphalt must be homogeneous, not sepazate after thorough mixing, and meet the requirements for the specified type and grade in Tables 7, $, 9, and 10. 203 l i l 6 t E t t ~ ~ ~ t t 1 , w 0 0 N Ta ble 't ___ ,_.-- o Emulsified As halt ~ TY~rade ---- -- ----~ a Slow-Setting N Rapid" Mediinm-Setting Test 5etton AE5-300 55-1 SS-IH ~, i ~ Property Pr ocedure HFRS_2 s m ;Max MS-2 Min ;Max Min ;Maz M Min ;Maz Min; Mnx T 72 _ 75 ~, 400 20 ~; 100 20 ~; 100 _ Saybolt Furol sity Vi _ - - ~ _ - ~ - ' ' , sco 150 1 400 100 3C0 ' ~ 01 . 0.1 sec. 77°F sec. t22°F T 59 - ~ 0.1 ~ 0.1 ~ O.l pass Pass , Sieve test, °/o T59 - _ _ - 2.0 - - ~ 20 Miscibili T 59 - - _ Cement mixin , % and water resistance: bilit T 59 - _ C,~dlFair ir F - _ y Coating a a - Fair( ; o dry aggregate/after spray - _ 30 _ ; - _ 1 i' wet are atelafter s ra h 10 35 ml of 0.02 N CaC _, ° _ 50 ; - ~ 1 ~ 1 '~ 1 l ss p Pass Demulsibili , T 59 _ a e stabili , 1 da , °~o Stora T 59 - Pass ~ , Freezin test, 3 clest T 59 ~ - _ 65 ~' _ 65 ' 60 ~ - 5 0 60 ; - - 0.5 Dtstillatian test. sidue by distillation, °!° by %`~ R i 65 ~ 5 ,, 0 5 0.5 _ _ - . - , 0 ' e on ° ~ volume of emuls Oil distillate, rob ~ ~A 300 ~ - 120 ; 160 ~ 10 70 1 Tests on residue from distillation: T 49 1201 l 100 ~ 140 97 5 { - 97.5 ; - _ 97 5 Ssec' Penetration, 77°F, 100 g, ° T 44 97.5 l - 97.5; - - 100 t - SO 1 - /u lene, Solulbibty intrichloroethy T Sl 100 ; - 100; 2001 1 - - - - Ductility, 77°F, 5 cm/min., cm T 50 1,200; , - - Float test, 140°F, sec. er designates material for i wtnter use. ne ]. Applies only when the Eng I i t } t i ~ i 1 d s i i i 1 [ E Table 8 Cationic F3mulsif~ed Asphalt N T e-Grade Test Ra id- Settin Mediom-Settin Slow-Setfin Property procedure CRS-2 CRS-2H CMS-Z CMti-2S CSS-l CSS-1H Min; Maa Min; Maz Min; Max Min;; Maz Min; Mlax Min; Max Viscosity, Saybolt Furol T 72 77°F sec. - - - - - - - - 2U ; lU0 20 ; 100 , 122°F, sec. 150" 400 I50 ~ 400 1D0 ~ 30(! 100 ;; 300 - - - - Sievetest, % T 59 - ~ 0.1 - ~ 0.1 - ~ 0.1 - ~~ U.1 - ~ U.1 - ~ 0.1 Cement mixim , % T 59 - - - - - - - - - ; 2.0 - ; 2.0 Coating ability and water resistance: T 59 dryaggregate/after spray - - Crood/Fair Goo~dlFair - - wet re aie/after ra • - - Fair/Fair FahdFair - - Demulsibility, 35 ml of D.8%sodium T 59 70 ; 70 ; - - - - - - - - - dioc Isulfosuccinate, Stora a stabi-ity, 1 dac, % T 59 - 1 - I - 1 - I - 1 - 1 Panicle char e T 59 Positive Positive Positive Positive Positive Positive Distillation test: T 59 Residue by distillation, %by wt. 65 - 65 ; - 65 - 65 - 60 ; - 60 ~ - Oil distillate, % by volume of emulsion - ~ 0.5 - ~ 0.5 - ~ 7 - ~~ 5 - ~ Ut5 - ~ 0.5 Tests on residue from distillation: 100 5 °F T 49 ~ 120; 160 ~ 70 ; 110 j 120 ; 20f! j; 300 ; - 120 ; 160 70 ; 110 sec. g, . Penetration, 77 Solubility in trichloroethylene, % T 44 97.5 ~ - 97.51 - 97S ~ - 97.5 ~~ - 97.5 ~ - 97.5 ~ - Ductility, 77°F, 5 cm/min„ cm T S l 1001; - 80 ; - 100 ; - - - 100 ; - 80 ; - w 0 0 N e~ O W G t.N O Table 9 Anlvmar_MndiKad FmnlciPtPd .Aenhait T o-Grade Test Ra fd-SeHfn Medium -Baffin Slow-S etlim Property procedure RS-1P I~''RS-2P AES-150P AES-300P AES-3003 SS-1P Min ; Maz Min ~ Mnz M'vr ~ Maz Miu ; Mas Min ~ Maz Min ; Maz Viscosity, Saybolt Furol T 72 77°F, sea - - - - 75 400 75 400 75 400 30 100 122°F, sec. 50 ~ 200 150 ~ 400 - - - - - - - - Sieve test, °/ T 59 - 0.1 - 0.1 - 0.I - 0.1 - 0.1 - 0.1 Miscibihn, T 59 - - - - - Pass Goa[ing ability and water resistance: T 59 dry aggregate/atte[ spray - - Good/Fair Goud/Feir Goud/Feh' - wet a re ate/alter s m ~ - - Fair/Fau Fau/Fair Faix/Fau - Demulsibility, 35 ml of 0.02 N CaCL_, % T 59 60 - 50 - - - - - - - - - SCOra a s[abHr , 1 day, % T 59 - 1 - 1 - 1 - 1 - 1 - 1 Hreakin index, Tex-5420 - 80 - - - - - - - - - DistillatiantesC' T59 Residue by distillatinn, % by wt. 65 ~ - 65 ~ - GS ~ - GS ~ - G5 ~ - 60 - Oil distillate, "/° b eolrmre of emulsion - 3 - 0 5 - 3 - 5 - 7 - 0.5 Tests on residue from distillation: ' ~ Polymer content, w[. % (solids basis) Tex-533-C - ~ - 3.0 ' - - - - - - - 3.U - 77°F, I00 g, 5 sec. PeneVa[ion T 49 225 ; 300 9U ; 14U I50 ; ?W 300 ; - 300 ; - 100 140 , Solubility m trichloroethylene, % T 44 9ZU ; - 97 0 ; - 97.0 ~ - 97.0 - 97.0 ~ - 97.0 ~ - ~ Viscosity, I40°F, poise T202 - - 1,500 ~ - - - - ; - - ~ - 1,300 - I Float test, ]40°F, sec. T 50 - - 1,200 ; - 1,200 ; - 1,200 ; - l,2UU ; - - - Duc[ihty', 39.2°F, 5 ciit/min, cm T 51 - - 00 - - - - - - - 00 - 'll Elastic recove ~, 50°F, % Tex-539-C 55 - 55 - - - - - - - - - Tests on RTFO cm~ing of dis4illation residue Tex-541-C , , , ' ~ ~ ; Elastic recovery, 50°F, % Tex-5390 - ~ - - - S0 ; - 50 ~ - 30 - ~ - W 8 lJ O W O O N 1. Exception to T 59: Hrmg the temperature on the lower mennomerer srowry w .~o r ~~o . ..~...•,°,.• ,., ,.•....-...v-•-•-•- •-• -- ---- ----_---- - -- - in 60 i5 min. Cram the first application of heat. 2. FIFf2S-2P must meet one of either the ductility or elastic recovery requirements. 300.2 to 300.2 Table 10 Pnlvmer-Modified Cationic Emulsified Asuhalt T e-Grade Pro er P ty Test Rapid-Setting ~~~ Procedure CRS-1P CRS-2P CSS-1P Min ~ Maa Min ~ Maa Min ~ Ma: Viscosity, Saybolt Furol T 72 77°F, sec. - - - - 20 ~ 100 L22°F, sec. 50 ; 150 150 ; 400 - - Sieve test, % T 59 - 0.1 - 0.1 - 0.1 Demulsibiliry, 35 ml of 0.8% sodium T 59 60 ; - 70 - - - di 1 sulfosuccinate Stor a stabili , 1 da , % T 59 - 1 - 1 - 1 Breakin index, Tex-542-C - 80 - - - - Panicle ch e T 59 Positive Positive Positive Distillation test:' T 59 Residue by distillation, %by weight 65 { - 65 - 62 - Oil distillate, %by volume of - 3 - ~ 0.5 - ~ 0.5 emulsion Tests on residue from distillation: Polymer content, wt. %(solids Tex-533-C - - 3.0 ~ - 3.0 ~ - basis) Penetration, 77°F, 100 g, 5 sec. T 49 225 ~ 300 90 ~ I50 55 90 Viscosity,.140°F, poise T202 - - 1,300; - - - Solubiliry In trichloroedrylene, % T 44 97.0 ; - 97.0 ; - 97.0 ; - Sotlening point, °F T 53 - - - - 135 ~ - Ductiliry, 77°F, 5 cm/min., cm T 51 - - - - 70 - Ductiliry~, 39.2°F, 5 cm/min., cm T 51 - - 50 - - - Elas[ic recove ', 50°F, % Tex-539-C 45 - 55 ; - - - 1. Exception to T 59: Bring the temperature on the lower thermometer slowly to s5u°r t0"r. Maintain at this temperature for 20 min. Complete total distillation in 60 f5 min. from the First application of heat. 2. CRS-2P must meet one of either the ductility or elastic recovery requirements. E. Specialty Emulsions. Specialty emulsions may be either asphalt-based or resin-based and must meet the requirements of Table 11. 207 300.2 to 300.2 Table 11 S ecial Emulsions e-Geade Slow- Teat Medtum-Settutg S ttm Proper1y e Ptrocedurre r AE-P EAP&T PCE Min 'Max Mto' Max Min' Max Viscosity, Saybolt Furol T 72 77°$ sec. _ _ _ _ ]0 ; 100 122°F, sec, IS 150 - - - - Sieve test,% T 59 - 1 0.1 - ; 0.1 - ~ 0.1 Miscibili ' T59 Pass' Pass' Demulsibili , 35 ml of 0.10 N CaCh, % T 59 - ~ 70 - - - - Stora a stabili ,Ida % T 59 - ~ 1 - 1 - - Particlesize°,%b volume <2.5 Tex-238-Fs - - 90 - 90 - Asphalt emulsion distillation to 500°F followed by Cutback asphalt distillation of residue to T 59 & T 78 680°F: Residue after both distillations, % by wt. 40 - - - - - Total oil distillate from both distillations, % by 25 40 - - - - volume of emulsion Residue b distillation % b w[. T 59 60 Residue eva oration", % b wt. T 59 - - - - 60 - Tests on residue after all distillation(s): ViscosiTy, 140°F, poise T 202 - - 800 ~ - - - Kinematic viscosity', 140°F, cSt T 201 - - - - 100 ; 350 Flesh point C.O.C., °F T 48 - - - - 400 ; - Solubility in trichloroethylene, % T 44 97.5 ~ - - - - - Float test, 122°F sea T 50 50 ; 200 - - - - ]. Supply with each shipment of PCE: a) a copy of a lab report from an approved analytical lab, signed by a lab official, indicating the PCE formulation does not meet any characteristics of a Resource Conservation Recovery Act (RCRA) hazardous waste; b) a certification from the producer that [he formulation supplied does not differ from the one tested and that no listed RCRA hazardous wastes or PCBs have been mixed with the product; end c) a Material Safety Data Sheet. 2. Exception to T 59: In dilution, use 350 rnl of distilled or deionized water and a 1,000-mI beaker 3. Use Tex-23R-F, beginning at "Particle Size Analysis by Laser Diffraction," with distilled or deionized water as a medium and no dispersant, or use another approved method. 4. Exception to T 59: Leave sample in [he oven until foaming ceases, then cool and weigh. 5. PCE must meet either the kinematic viscosiTy requirement or the panicle size requirement. F. Recycling Agent. Recycling agent and emulsified recycling agent must meet the requirements in Table 12. Additionally, recycling agent and residue from emulsified recycling agent, when added in the specified proportions to the recycled asphalt, must meet the properties specified on the plans. 208 300.2 to 300.2 Table 12 Rarvrlina Aannt and Fmnlcified Recvclint* Agent Emulsified Test Recycling Recycling P ty Pro er Procedure Agent A ent Min I Maa Min ;Max Viscosity, Saybolt Furol, 77°F, .1.72 - - 15 ~ 100 sec. Sieve test, % T 59 - - - ~ 0.1 Miscibili ~ T 59 - No co ulation Residue b ev ration2, % b w[. T 59 - - 60 - Tests on recycling agent or residue from evaporation: Flash point, C.O.C., °F T 48 400 - 400 - Kinematic viscosiTy, T 201 140°F,cSt 75 200 75 200 275°F, cst - 10.0 - 10.0 1. Exception to T 59: Use 0.02 N CaCI~ solution in place of water. -„_ 2. Exception to T S9: Maintain sample at 300°F until foaming ceases, then cool and weigh. G. Crumb Rubber Modifier. Crtunb rubber modifier (CRlvn consists of automobile and truck tires processed by ambient temperature grinding. CRM must be: • free from contaminants including fabric, metal, and mineral and «- othernonnxbbersubstanees; • free-flowing; and • nonfoaming when added to hot asphalt binder. "' When tested in accordance with Tex-200-F, Part I, using a 50-g sample, the rubber gradation must meet the requirements of the grades in Table 13. Table 13 CRM Gradations Sieve Size Grade A Grade B Grade C Grade D Grade E Passin Min Max Min Max Min Max #8 100 - - - - - _ #10 95 100 100 - - As #16 - - 70 100 100 - shown As #30 - - 25 60 90 100 on the approved #40 - - - - 45 100 plans #50 0 10 - - - #200 - - 0 5 - - 209 '~y 300.2 to 300.2 H. Crack Sealer. Polymer modified asphalt-emulsion crack sealer must meet the requirements of Table 14. Rubber-asphalt crack sealer must meet the requirements of Table 15. Table 14 Polvmer-Modified Asphalt Emulsion Crack Sealer Pro a Test Procedure Min Mas Rotational viscos' , 77°F, cP D 2196, Method A 10,000 25,000 Sieve test, % T 59 - 0.1 Stor a stabili , 1 da , % T 59 - 1 Evaporation Tex-543-C Residue b ev oration, % b wt. 65 - Tests on residue from evaporation: Penetration, 77°F, 100 g, 5 sec. T 49 35 75 Softening point, °F T 53 140 - Ductility, 39.2°F, 5 cm/min., crn T 51 100 - Table 15 Rubber-Asphalt Crack Sealer Test Class A Class B Property procedure Min :Max Min :Max CRM content, Grade A or B, % b wt. Tex-544-C 22 26 - - CRM content, Grade B, % b wt. Tex-544-C - - 13 17 Vir in rubber contents, % ~ _ _ 2 _ Flash ointz, COC, °F T 48 400 - 400 - Penetration', 77°F, I50 , 5 sec. T 49 30 ~ 50 30 ~ 50 Penetration', 32°F, 200 60 sec. T 49 12 : - 12 ~ - Softenin oint, °F T 53 - - 170 - Bond° D5329 - Pass 1. Provide certification that the min. % virgin robber was added. 2. Before passing the test flame over the cup, agitate the sealing compound with a 3/8- to ,.. 1/2-in. (9.5- to 12.7-mm) wide, square-end metal spatula in a manner so as to bring the material on the bottom of the cup to the surface, i.e, taro the material over. Start at one side of the thermometer, move around to the other, and then return to the starting point using 8 to .- 10 rapid circulaz strokes. Accomplish agitation in 3 to 4 sec. Pass the test flame over the cup immediately after s[irrutg is completed. 3. Exception to T 49: Substitute the cone specified in ASTM D 217 for the penetration needle. ~" 4. No crack in the crack sealing materials or break in the bond between the sealer and the mortar blocks over 1/4 in. deep for any specimen after completion of the test. I. Asphalt-Rubber Binders. Asphalt-rubber (A-R) binders are mixtures of asphalt binder and CRM, which have been reacted at elevated temperatures. The A-R binders meet D 6114 and contain a minimum of 15% CRM by weight. Types I or II, containing CRM Grade C, are used 210 300.2 to 300.2 `~ for hot mixed aggregate mixtures. Types II or III, containing CRM Grade B, aze used for surface treatment binder. Table 16 describes required binder properties. Table 16 A-R Rinders Binder T e Properly Test T I T e II T e III Procedure Min Max Min Max Min Max Appazent viscosity, 347°F, cP D 2196, 1,500 5,000 1,500 5,000 1,500 5,000 Method A Penetration, 77°F, 100 5 sec. T 49 25 75 25 75 50 100 Penetration, 39.2°F, 200 g, T 49 ] 0 - I S - 25 - 60 sec. Softenin oint, °F T 53 135 - 130 - 125 - Resilience, 77°F, % D 5329 25 - 20 - 10 - Flash oint, C.O.C., °F T 48 450 - 450 - 450 - Tests on residue from Thin-Film T 179 Oven Test: Retained penetration ratio, 39.2°F, 200 g, 60 sec., % of T 49 75 - 75 - 75 - ori 'nal J. Performance-Graded Binders. PG binders must be smooth and ,_ homogeneous, show no sepazation when tested in accordance with Tex-540-0, and meet Table 17 requirements. Sepazation testing is not required if: ~- + a modifier is introduced separately at the mix plant either by injection in the asphalt line or mixer, • the binder is blended on site in continuously agitated tanks, or • binder acceptance is based on field samples taken from an in-line sampling port at the hot mix plant after the addition of modifiers. 211 N N W iN K O Table 1~ (~ R naOYa~ N W 9h~t>e4i, r ...- ~ -Ly ~ , - tnpacte $, max, 3001vT4 300 -12 .16 computer qro -24 ~ b meat-supplied ,ced. and co ed, mi. env suitable standar3 m.calve, n'ut, - 66 sue. °C' -l2 -18 ~ntaittvd inal]epaii uatetYP~ erne cattbe~ q bin~r is aljewtoman and wmpaction Test rem As an algoritbm ~ 1 Oe~V usrn8 asP~ltbindc n ~' ttect tension, T 31 e ~ ; ~ tnm(Imn.' °C air tertxpemtmes PP 28. drat P testizmpetatiti 8 tier wsuTants es irtdicatehiBhn'txm~ytm and Failw~o sttain, xm ' fed ftom~' 5~~~,ip 2 and m yarn ns ate estitna tf the suPP, ements. t (S 3161 values ntaY ~tttteit Tes[te xatur din disetcuoa ilt~re0.w2i 1 ~ otoery ~ieldHt~ tCwantly mP ements na vzsc b Goulds 1. pavetttant temPe ~odtves outline rbnextts andrAn9itUC`lab 02)'ri~ t+o fln rY 1o11oain8lt`e Pr be waived at the ~vun~tentEd, ~ 201 or T 2 eapected b e la what ~~on es tba nuld e aware t , e. slimted for d}`namr ~~at ~(T 2Ut or oc by nt maY saletV, to illarY t can ludinR cap 2. This re9mteme at all PPlicable ~ used, ituludin8 ~ ~mperatut tcaotors s6 tmaY a tnaY be a tton (;On slha I n5ed,~ ~mPe es that urn eat maY actd camp batchto batch. ctabilitY issue ma aP~itbin'ee~nt maY~ of the on tatm ufmi'tin8 ttoW any c moans of vt osity mess means of vtsWStty measure ~di¢atoc occur dressm8 sc - 9 state uisemen ,ih' al L35°C is an cant variation can t,sibte ~ t ad meat of the viscosity ly, si8m failure sty xefore tesP° ductioa measure stable standard ~ the duct Least 3. Vtsca' pddttional actors am tl>e rletvtoatanfluid. Any temPeratvtes. ~ontr' haltbiuderP }00 az~d o00 compactwn opetatiotts. nnmodifred asp asphalt is a 9 Fox 9~iTy ~~tal of as where the acceptable foruse. mss is between ~, (f 31G1. O Tp 1.93. aze ~ ~ eases. of ~+~sm(s) at lest temp°ratur ~pSHT red. if creep test as not~9"rmnstbe satisfied ml'u scnbed m T Z02) ur rotational visWa 300lvlPa erect tension 5, Silicone beam molds, as de nt The m value requii~ 6 If ct~P stiffness is below` btstead of the utoeP stift~ss sroKuueme O O N a W G 300.3 to 300.4 300.3. Equipment. Provide all equipment necessary to transport, store, sample, heat, apply, and incorporate asphalts, oils, and emulsions. 300.4. Construction. A. Typical Material Use. Table 18 shows typical materials used for specific applications. These aze typical uses only. Circumstances may require use of other material. "' Table 18 Tvoical Material Use Material A lication ically Used Materials Hot-mixed, hot-laid as halt mixtures PG binders, A-R binders T s I and II Surface treaiment AC-5, AC-IQ, AC-5 w/2% SBR, AC-l0 w/2% SBR, AC-15P, AC-20-STR, HFRS-2, MS-2, CRS-2, CRS-2H, HFRS-2P, CRS-2P, A-R binders T s II and liI Surface treatment (cool weather) RS-lP, CRS-1P, RC-250, RC-800, RC3000, MC-250, MC-800, MC-3000, M42400L Prceoatin AC-5, AC-10, PG 64-22, SS-l, SS-1$ CSS-1, CSS-1H Tack coat PG Binders, SS-1H, CSS-1H, EAP.&T Fo seal SS-1, SS-1H, CSS-I, CSS-1H Hot-mixed, cold-laid as bait mixtures AC-0.6, AC-1.6, AC3, AES300, AE5300P, CMS-2, CMS-2S Paichin mix MC-800, SCM I, SCM II, AES-300S Recycling AC-0.6, AC-1.5, AC3, AES-150P, AES-300P, recycling agent, emulsified rec clin a ent Crock sealing SS-IP, polymer mod AE crack sealant, rubber asphalt crack sealers Class A, Class B) Mictosurfacin CSS-1P Prime MC3Q, AE-P, EAP&T, PCE Curin membrane SS-l, SS-1H, CSS-I, CSS-1H, PCE Erosion control SS-1, SS-1H, CSS-1, CSS-IH, PCE B. Storage and Application Temperatures. Use storage and application temperatures in accordance with Table 19. Store and apply materials at the lowest temperature yielding satisfactory results. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for any agitation requirements in storage. Manufacturer's instructions regazding recommended application and ` storage temperatures supercede those of Table 19. 214 300.5 to 301.1 Table 19 Ctnraar and Annliratinn Temneratnres A licatiov S torage Type-Grade Recommended Mazimum Mazimum Allowable Range, °F (°F) cF AC-0.6, AC-1.5, AC-3 200-300 350 350 AC-5, AC-]0 275-350 350 350 AC-10 w/2% SBR, AC-5 w/2% SBR , 300-375 375 360 AC-15P, AC-20-STR RC-250 125-180 200 200 RC-800 170-230 260 260 RC-3000 215-275 285 285 MC-3Q AE-P 70-150 175 175 MC-250 125-210 240 240 MC-800, SCM I, SCM II 175-260 275 275 MC-3000, MC-2400L 225-275 290 290 HFRS-2, MS-2, CRS-2, CRS-2H, HFRS-2P, CRS-2P, CMS-2, CMS-2S, 120-160 180 180 AES-300, AES-300S, AES-150P, AES-300P SS-1, SS-1H, CSS-1, CSS-1H, PCE, EAP&T, SS-1P, RS-1P, CRS-1P, CSS-1P, recycling agent, emulsified 50-130 140 140 recycling agent, polymer mod AE crack sealant PG binders 275-350 350 350 Rubber asphalt crack sealers (Class A, 350-375 400 - Class B A-R binders T es I, II, and III 325-425 425 425 300.5. Measurement and Payment. The work performed, materials furnished, equipment, labor, tools, and incidentals will not be measured or paid for directly, but is subsidiary or is included in payment for other bid Items. ITEM 301 ASPHALT ANTISTRIPPING AGENTS 301.1. Description. Furnish and incorporate all required asphalt antistripping agents in asphalt concrete paving mixtures and asphalt- stabilized base mixtures to meet moisture resistance testing requirements. 215 314.1 to 314.4 ITEM 310 PRIME COAT 310.1. Description. Prepaze and treat existing or newly constructed surface with a bituminous material. Apply blotter material as required. 310.2. Materials. A. Bituminous. Use material of the type and grade shown on the plans in •- accordance with Item 300, "Asphalts, Oils, and Emulsions" B. Blotter. Unless otherwise shown on the plans or approved, use either base course sweepings obtained from cleaning the base or native sand "~ as blotter materials. 310.3. Equipment. Provide applicable equipment in accordance with '"' Article 316.3, "Equipment." 310.4. Construction. A. General. Apply the mixture when the air temperature is 60°F and above, or above 50°F and rising. Measure the air temperature in the _ shade away from artificial heat. The Engineer will determine when weather conditions aze suitable for application. Do not permit traffic, hauling, or placement of subsequent courses over ..- freshly constructed prime coats. Maintain the primed surface until placement of subsequent courses or acceptance of the work. B. Surface Preparafion. Prepaze the surface by sweeping or other approved methods. When directed, before applying bituminous material, lightly sprinkle the surface with water to control dust and ensure absorption. C. Application. i. Bituminous. The Engineer will select the application temperature •- within the limits recommended in Item 300, "Asphalts, Oils, and Emulsions." Apply material within 15°F of the selected temperature. '- Distribute the material smoothly and evenly at the rate selected by the Engineer. When directed, roll the freshly applied prime coat with apneumatic-tire roller to ensure penetration. 2. Blotter. Spread blotter material before allowing ttafFc to use a primed surface. When "Prime Coat and Blotter" is shown on the .- plans as a bid item, apply blotter material to primed surface at the 223 ~' 310.5 to 314.4 rate shown in the plans or as directed. When "Prime Coat" is shown on the plans as a bid item, apply blotter to spot locations or as directed to accommodate traffic movement through the work w azea. Remove blotter material before placing the surface. Dispose of blotter material according to applicable state and federal requirements. 310.5. Measurement. This Item will be measured by the gallon of bituminous material placed and accepted. 310.6. Payment. The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and measured as provided under "Measurement" "" will be paid for at the unit price bid for "Prime Coat" or "Prime Coat and Blotter" of the type and grade of bituminous material specified. This price is full compensation for cleaning and sprinkling the azea to be primed; materials, including blotter material; and rolling, equipment, labor, tools, and incidentals. ITEM 314 EMULSIFIED ASPHALT TREATMENT 314.1. Description. Apply an emulsified asphalt and water mixture as a base or subgrade treatment; for erosion control, including dust prevention; or as a prime coat. 314.2. Materials. Furnish materials in accordance with the fallowing: • Item 204, "Sprinkling" • Item 300, "Asphalts, Oils, and Emulsions" „„ Use emulsified asphalt of the type and grade shown on the plans. Use a quantity of emulsified asphalt in the mixture, expressed as a percent of total volume, in accordance with the percentage shown on the plans or as ,_ directed. 314.3. Equipment. Provide aself-propelled sprinkler in accordance with Article 204.3, "Equipment "Provide calibration documentation for the tank used for distribution. _ 314.4. Construction. Agitate the water and emulsified asphalt to produce a uniform blend. Evenly distribute at the rate selected by the Engineer to locations shown on the plans or as directed. 224 334.5 to 340.2 334.5. Measurement. This Item will be measured by the by the ton of composite asphalt concrete mixture of the type used in the completed and accepted work. Measurement will be made on scales in accordance with Item 520, "Weighing and Measuring Equipment." '"" For mixture produced by aweigh-batch plant or a modified weigh-batch plant, measurement will be determined on the batch scales unless surge- storage or stockpiling is used. Keep records of the number of batches, batch '- design, and the weight of the composite asphalt concrete mixture. The composite asphalt concrete mixture is defined as the asphalt, primer, aggregate, additives, and any residual moisture that is not designated to be ~~ deducted. Where surge-storage or stockpiling is used, measurement of the material taken from the surge-storage bin or stockpile will be made on truck scales or suspended hopper scales. 334.6. Payment. The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and measured as provided under Article 334.5, "" "Measurement," will be paid for at the unit price bid for "Hot-Mix Cold- Laid Asphalt Concrete Pavement" of the type, surface aggregate classification, and asphalt binder specified. w This price is full compensation for surface preparation, materials including tack coat, placement, equipment, labor, tools, and incidentals. °- Pay adjustment for ride quality, when required, will be determined in accordance with Item 585, "Ride Quality for Pavement Surfaces." ITEM 340 DENSE-GRADED HOT-MIX ASPHALT (METHOD) 340.1. Description. Construct a pavement layer composed of a compacted, dense-graded mixture of aggregate and asphalt binder mixed hot in a mixing _ plant. 340.2. Materials. Furnish uncontaminated materials of uniform quality that meet the requirements of the plans and specifications. Notify the Engineer of all material sources. Notify the Engineer before changing any material source or formulation. When the Contractor makes a .d source or formulation change, the Engineer will verify that the requirements of this Item are met and may require a new laboratory mixture design, trial 265 "° 340.2 to 340.2 batch, or both. The Engineer may sample and test project materials at any time during the project to verify compliance. A. Aggregate. Furnish aggregates from sources that conform to the requirements shown in Table 1, and as specified in this Section, unless otherwise shown on the plans. Provide aggregate stockpiles that meet the definition in this Section for either coarse aggregate or fine aggregate. When reclaimed asphalt pavement (RAP) is allowed by plan note, provide RAP stockpiles in accordance with this Section. -- Aggregate from RAP is not required to meet Table 1 requirements unless otherwise shown on the plans. Supply mechanically crushed gravel ar stone aggregates that meet the definitions in Tex=100=E. The •-- Engineer will designate the plant or the quarry as the sampling location. Samples must be from materials produced for the project. The Engineer will establish the surface aggregate classification (SAC) and perform •-~° Los Angeles abrasion, magnesimn sulfate soundness, and Micro-Deval tests. Perform all other aggregate quality tests listed in Table 1. Document all test results on the mixture design report. The Engineer -- may perform tests on independent or split samples to verify Contractor test results. Stockpile aggregates for each source and type separately. Determine aggregate gradations for mixture design and production "` testing based on the washed sieve analysis given in Tex-200-F, Part II. Do not add material to an approved stockpile from sources that do not meet the aggregate quality requirements of the Department's `~ Bituminous Ratecl Rource Quality Catalog (BRSQC) unless otherwise approved. 1. Coarse Aggregate. Coarse aggregate stockpiles must have no more than 20% material passing the No. 8 sieve. Provide aggregates from sources listed in the BRSQC. Provide aggregate ,_ from nonlisted sources only when tested by the Engineer and approved before use. Allow 30 calendar days for the Engineer to sample, test, and report results for nonlisted sources. -~- Provide coarse aggregate with at least the minimum SAC shown on the plans. SAC requirements apply only to aggregates used on the surface of travel lanes, unless otherwise shown on the plans. The SAC For sources on the Department's AQMP is listed in the BRSQC. Class B aggregate meeting all other requirements in Table 1 may be blended with a Class A aggregate in order to meet requirements for Class A materials. When blending Class A and B aggregates to meet a Class A requirement, ensure that at least 50% by weight of 266 344.2 to X40.2 "` the material retained on the No. 4 sieve comes from the Class A aggregate source. Blend by volume if the bulk specific gravities of the Class A and B aggregates differ by more than 0.300. When -" blending, do not use Class C or D aggregates. For blending purposes, coarse aggregate from RAP will be considered as Class B aggregate. 2. RAP. RAP is salvaged, milled, pulverized, broken, or crushed asphalt pavement. Crush or break RAP so that 100% of the particles pass the 2-in. sieve. RAP from either Contractor- or Department-owned sources, including RAP generated during the project, is permitted only when shown on the plans. Department-owned RAP, if allowed for use, will be available at the location shown on the plans. When RAP is used, determine asphalt content and gradation for mixture °-' design purposes. Perform other tests on RAP when shown on the plans. When RAP is allowed by plan note, use no more than 30% RAP in Type A or B mixtures unless otherwise shown on the plans. For all other mixtures, use no more than 26%RAP unless otherwise shown on the plans. Do not use RAP contaminated with dirt or other objectionable materials. Do not use the RAP if the decantation value exceeds 5% and the plasticity index is greater than 8. Test the stockpiled RAP for decantation in accordance with the laboratory method given in Tex-40b-A, Part I. Determine the plasticity index using Tex-106-E "' if the decantation value exceeds 5%. The decantation and plasticity index requirements do not apply to RAP samples with asphalt removed by extraction. ... Do not intermingle Contractor-owned RAP stockpiles with Department-owned RAP stockpiles. Remove unused Contractor- owned RAP material from the project site upon completion of the project. Return unused Department-owned RAP to the designated `stockpile location. 3. Fine Aggregate. Fine aggregates consist of manufactured sands, screenings, and field sands. Fine aggregate stockpiles must meet the gradation requirements in Table 2. Supply fine aggregates that •- are free from organic impurities. The Engineer may test the fine aggregate in accordance with Tex-408-A to verify the material is free from organic impurities. At most 15% of the total aggregate may be field sand or other uncrushed fine aggregate. With the 267 340.2 to 340.2 exception of field sand, use fine aggregate from coazse aggregate sources that meet the requirements shown in Table 1, unless otherwise approved. If 10% or more of the stockpile is retained on the No. 4 sieve, test the stockpile and verify that it meets the requirements in Table 1 ,~ for coarse aggregate angularity (Tex-460-A) and flat and elongated particles (Tex-2$0-F}. Table 1 A¢ere¢ate Quality Requirements Pro er Test Method Re uirement Coarse A e ate SAC AQMP As shown on tans Deleterious material, %, max Tex-217-F, Part I 1.5 Decantation, %, max Tex-217-F, Part 1I 1.5 Micro-Deval abrasion, %, max Tex-461-A Note 1 Los An eles abrasion, %, max Tex-410-A 40 M esium sulfate soundness, 5 c cles, %, max Tex-411-A 30r Coarse re ate an Mari , 2 crushed faces, %, min Tex 460-A, Part I 85' Flat and elon ated aRicles 3:I, %, max Tex-280-F 10 Fine A ate Lineaz shrird4 e, %, max Tex-107-E 3 Combined A re ate° Sande uivalent, °/q min Tex-203-F 45 I. Not used for acceptance purposes. Used by the Engineer as an indicator of the need for further investigation. 3. Unless otherwise shown on the plans: y 3. Unless otherwise shown on the plans. Only applies to crushed gravel. 4. Aggregates, without mineral filler, RAP, or additives, combined as used in the job-mix formula (JMF). - Teble 2 Gradation Requirements for Fine Ap~re¢ate Sieve Size % Passin b Wei ht or Volume 318" 100 #8 70-100 #~00 0-30 B. Mineral Filler. Mineral filler consists of finely divided mineral matter such as agricultural lime, crusher fines, hydrated lime, cement, or fly ash. Mineral filler is allowed unless otherwise shown on the plans. Do not use more than 2% hydrated lime or cement, unless otherwise shown on the plans. The plans may require or disallow specific mineral fillers. When used, provide mineral filler that: 268 340.3 to 340.3 is sufficiently dry, free-flowing, and free from clumps and foreign matter; does not exceed 3% linear shrinkage when tested in accordance with Tex-107-E; and meets the gradation requirements in Table 3. Table 3 Gradation Re uirements for Mineral Filler Sieve Size %Passin b Wei ht or Volume "' #8 100 #200 55-100 C. Baghouse Fines. Fines collected by the baghouse or other dust-collecting equipment may be reintroduced into the mixing drum. D. Asphalt Binder. Famish the type and grade of performance-graded 'W (PG) asphalt binder specified on the plans in accordance with Section 300.2.7, "Perfonnance-Graded Binders" _. E. Tack Coat. Unless otherwise shown on the plans or approved, furnish CSS-1H, SS-1H, or a PG binder with a minimum high-temperature grade of PG 58 for tack coat binder in accordance with Item 300, -.- "Asphalts, Oils, and Emulsions" Do not dilute emulsified asphalts at the terminal, in the field, or at any other location before use. If required, verify that emulsified asphalt ""' proposed for use meets the minimum residual asphalt percentage specified in Item 360, "Asphalts, Oils, and Emulsions" The Engineer will obtain at least 1 sample of the tack coat binder per project and test it to verify compliance with Item 300. The Engineer will obtain the sample from the asphalt distributor immediately before ,_ use. F. Additives. When shown on the plans, use the type and rate of additive specified. Other additives that facilitate mixing or improve the quality - of the mixture may be allowed when approved. If lime or a liquid antistripping agent is used, add in accordance with Item 301, "Asphalt Antistripping Agents." Do not add lime directly into the mixing drum of any plant where lime is removed through the exhaust stream unless the plant has a baghouse or dust collection system that reintroduces the lime back into the drum. 340.3. Equipment. Provide required or necessary equipment in accordance with Item 320, "Equipment for Asphalt Concrete Pavement" 269 " 340.d to 340.4 '"° 340.4. Construction. Design, produce, store, transport, place, and compact the specified paving mixture in accordance with the requirements of this Item. Unless otherwise shown on the plans, provide the mix design. The "'- Department will perform quality assurance (QA) testing. Provide quality control (QC) testing as needed to meet the requirements of this item. ._ A. Mixture Design. 1. Design Requirements. Use a Level II specialist certified by a Department-approved hot-mix asphalt certification program to develop the mixture design. Have the Level II specialist sign the design documents. Unless otherwise shown on the plans, use the typical weight design example given in Tex-204-F, Part i, to ' design a mixture meeting the requirements listed in Tables 1 through 6. Use an approved laboratory to perform the Hamburg Wheel test and provide results with the mixture design, or provide the laboratory mixture and request that the Deparhnent perform the Hamburg Wheel test. The Construction Division maintains a list of approved laboratories. Furnish the Engineer with representative `- samples of all materials used in the mixture design. The Engineer will verify the mixture design. If the design cannot be verified by the Engineer, furnish another mixture design. The Contractor may submit a new mixture design at anytime during the project. The Engineer will approve all mixture designs befare the Contractor can begin production. Provide the Engineer with a mixture design report using Department-provided software. Include the following items in the °- report: the Cotttbiited aggregate gPadatiait, source, specific gravity, and percent of each material used; '- • results of all applicable tests; • the mixing and molding temperatures; • the signature of the Level II person or persons who performed "' the design; • the date the mixture design was performed; and • a unique identification number for the mixture design. 270 340.4 to 340.4 Table 4 Master Gradation Bands (% Passing by Weight or Volume) and Volumetric Properties Sieve Size A Coarse Base B Fine Base C Coarse Surface D Fine Surface F Fine Mixture 1-1/2" 98.0.100.0 - - - - 1" 78.0-94.0 98.0-100.0 - - - 3/4" 64.0-85.0 84.0-98.0 95.0-100.0 - - 1/2" 50.0.70.0 - - 98.0.100.0 - 3/8" - 60.0-80.0 70.0-85.0 85.0-100.0 98.0.100.0 #4 30.0.50.0 40.0-60.0 43.0-63.0 50.0-70.0 80.0-86.0 #8 22.0-36.0 29.0-43.0 32.0-44.0 35.0-46.0 38.0-48.0 #30 8.0-23.0 13.0-28.0 14.0-28.0 15.0.29.0 12.0-27.0 #50 3.0-19.0 6.0-20.0 7.0-21.0 ZO-20.0 6.0-19.0 #200 2.0-7.0 2.0-7.0 2.0-7.0 2.0-7.0 2.0-7.0 Desi n VMA`,%Minimum - 12.0 13.0 14.0 15.0 ]6.0 Plant-Produced VMA %Minimum - 11.0 12.0 13.0 14.0 15.0 1. Voids in Mineral Aggregates. Table 5 ,.. Laboratory Mixture Desi¢n Properties Pro er Test Method R uirement T et laborato -molded densi , % Tex-207-F 96.0' Tensile stren (d ), si (molded to 93%fl%densi ) Tex-226-F 85-200 Boil testi3 Tex-530-C - 1. Unless otherwise shown on the plans. 2. May exceed 200 psi when approved and may be waived when approved. 3 Used to establish baseline for comparison to prodaction results. Maybe waived when approved. Table 6 Hambur¢ Wheel Test Reauiremeutst High-Temperature Binder Grade Minimum # of Passes Ca) 0.5 Rut De th, Tested ~ 122°F PG 64 or lower 10,000 PG 70 15,000 PG 76 or hi her 20,000 1. Tes[ed in accordance with Tex-242-F. 2. May be decreased or waived when shown on the plans. m B. Job-Mix Formula Approval. The job-mix formula (JMF) is the combined aggregate gradation and tazget asphalt percentage used to establish target values for mixture production. JMF is the original ,_ 271 - 340.4 to 340.4 -- laboratory mixture design used to produce the trial batch. The Engineer and the Contractor will verify JN1F based on plant-produced mixture from the trial batch unless otherwise approved. The Engineer may accept an existing mixture design previously used on a Department project and may waive the trial batch to verify TMF. if the TMF is not verified by the Engineer from the trial batch, adjust the JMF or redesign °- the mix and produce as many trial batches as necessary to verify the JMF. Provide the Engineer with split samples of the mixtures and blank samples used to determine the ignition oven correction factors. The Engineer will determine the aggregate and asphalt correction factors from the ignition oven using Tex-236-F. The Engineer will use a Texas gyratory compactor calibrated in accordance with Tex-914-F in molding production samples. The Engineer will perform Tex-530-C and retain the tested sample for comparison purposes during production. The Engineer may waive the requirement for the boil test. C. JMF Field Adjustments. Produce a mixture of uniform composition closely conforming to the approved JMF. •- If, during initial days of production, the Contractor or Engineer determines that adjustments to the JMF are necessary to achieve the specified requirements, or to more neazly match the aggregate production, the Engineer may allow adjustment of the JMF within the tolerances of Table 7 without a laboratory redesign of the mixture. The Engineer will adjust the asphalt content to maintain desirable laboratory density neaz the optimum value while achieving other mix requirements. 272 340.4 to 346.4 Table 7 O erational Tolerances Allowable Description Test Method Difference from JMF Tar et Individual % retained for #8 sieve and i er t5.0' Individual % retained for sieves smaller than #8 and Tex-200-For ~ 0 I erthan#200 Tex-236-F " assin the #200 sieve t2.0' As halt content, % Tex-236-F f0.3' Laborato -molded densi , % t1.0 VMA, °/y min Tex-207-F Note 2 1. When within these tolerances, mixture production gradations may fall outside the master grading limits; however, the percent passing the #200 sieve will be considered out of tolerance when outside the master grading limits: 2. Test and verify that Table 4 requirements aze met. D. Production Operations. Perform a new trial batch when the plant or plant location is changed. The Engineer may suspend production for noncompliance with this Item. Take corrective action and obtain approval to proceed after any production suspension for noncompliance. 1. Operafional Tolerances. During production, do not exceed the operational tolerances in Table 7. Stop production if testing indicates tolerances aze exceeded on: • 3 consecutive tests on any individual sieve, °' 4 consecutive tests on any of the sieves, or • 2 consecutive tests on asphalt content. Begin production only when test results or other information indicate, to the satisfaction of the Engineer, that the next mixture produced will be within Table 7 tolerances. 2. Storage and Heating of Materials. Do not heat the asphalt binder above the temperatures specified in Item 300, "Asphalts, Oils, and Emulsions" or outside the manufacturer's recommended values. On a daily basis, provide the Engineer with the records of asphalt binder and hot-mix asphalt discharge temperatures in accordance with Item 320, "Equipment for Asphalt Concrete Pavement." °' Unless otherwise approved, do not store mixture for a period long enough to affect the quality of the mixture, nor in any case longer than 12 hr. 3. Mixing and Discharge of Materials. Notify the Engineer of the target discharge temperature and produce the mixture within 25°F ,,_ of the target. Monitor the temperature of the material in the truck 273 340.4 to 340.4 -- before shipping to ensure that it does not exceed 350°F. The Department will not pay for or allow placement of any mixture produced at more than 350°F. Control the mixing time and -- temperature so that substantially all moisture is removed from the mixture before discharging from the plant. E. Hauling Operations. Before use, clean all truck beds to ensure mixture '~' is not contaminated. When a release agent is necessary to coat truck beds, use a release agent on the approved list maintained by the Construction Division. F. Placement Operafions. Prepaze the surface by removing raised pavement mazkers and objectionable material such as moisture, dirt, --- sand, leaves, and other loose impediments from the surface before placing mixture. Remove vegetation from pavement edges. Place the mixture to meet the typical section requirements and produce a smooth, -~- finished surface with a uniform appearance and texture. Offset longitudinal joints of successive courses of hot mix by at least 6 in. Place mixture so longitudinal joints on the surface course coincide with ~- lane lines, or as directed. Ensure that all finished surfaces will drain properly. Place mixture within the compacted lift thickness shown in Table 8, unless otherwise shown on the plans or allowed. Table 8 Compacted Lift Thickness and Required Core Height Com acted Lift Thickness Mirture Type Minimum in. Mazimum (in. A 3.00 6:00 B 2.50 5.00 C 2.00 4.00 D 1.50 3.00 F 1.25 2.50 1. Weather Condifions. Place mixture when the roadway surface ,, temperature is 60°F or higher unless otherwise approved. Measure the roadway surface temperature with a handheld infrared thermometer. Unless otherwise shown on the plans, place mixtures „_, only when weather conditions and moisture conditions of the roadway surface are suitable in the opinion of the Engineer. 2. Tack Coat. Clean the surface before placing the tack coat. Unless •°- otherwise approved, apply tack coat uniformly at the rate directed by the Engineer. The Engineer will set the rate between 0.04 and 0.10 gal. of residual asphalt per square yard of surface area. Apply 274 3d0.4 to X40.4 „_ a thin, uniform tack coat to all contact surfaces of curbs, structures, and all joints. Prevent splattering of tack coat when placed adjacent to curb, gutter, and structures. Roll the tack coat with apneumatic- _ fire roller when directed. The Engineer may use Tex-243-F to verify that the tack coat has adequate adhesive properties. The Engineer may suspend paving operations until there is adequate adhesion. G. Lay-Down Operations. 1. Minimum Mixture Placement Temperatures. Use Table 9 for suggested minimum mixture placement temperatures. 2. Windrow Operations. When hot mix is placed in windrows, - operate windrow pickup equipment so that substantially all the mixture deposited on the roadbed is picked up and loaded into the paver. Table 9 Suasested Minimum Mixture Placement Temperature High-Temperature Binder Grade Minimum Placement Temperature Before Enterin Paver PG 64 or lower 260°F PG 70 270°F PG 76 280°F PG 82 or hi her 290°F H. Compacfion. Use air void control unless ordinary compaction control is specified on the plans. Avoid displacement of the mixture. If displacement occurs, correct to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Ensure pavement is fully compacted before allowing rollers to stand on the pavement. Unless otherwise directed, use only water or an approved _, release agent on rollers, tamps, and other compaction equipment. Keep diesel, gasoline, oil, grease, and other foreign matter off the mixture. Unless otherwise directed, operate vibratory rollers in static mode when ,_ not compacting, when changing directions, or when the plan depth of the pauement mat is less than 1-1/2 in. Use tamps to thoroughly compact the edges of the pauement along w- curbs, headers, and similaz structures and in locations that will not allow thorough cdmpacti6ri with the rollers. The Engineer may require rolling with a trench roller on widened areas, in trenches, and in other °- limited areas. 275 340.4 to 340.4 Allow the compacted pavement to cool to 160°F or lower before opening to traffic unless otherwise directed. When directed, sprinkle the finished mat with water or limewater to expedite opening the ,-, roadway to traffic. 1. Air Void Control. Compact dense-graded hot-mix asphalt to contain from 5% to 9% in-place air voids. Do not increase the -~ asphalt content of the mixture to reduce pavement air voids. a. Rollers. Furnish the type, size, and number or rollers required for compaction, as approved. Use apneumatic-tire roller to seal the surface, unless otherwise shown on the plans. Use additional rollers as required to remove any roller marks. ... b. Air Void Determination. Unless otherwise shown on the plans, obtain 2 roadway specimens at each location selected by the Engineer for in-place air void determination. The y.- Engineer will measure air voids in accordance with Tex-207-F and Tex-227-F. Before drying to a constant weight, cores may be predried using a Corelok or similaz vacuum device to -- remove excess moisture. The Engineer will use the average air void content of the 2 cores to calculate the in-place air voids at the selected location. c. Air Voids but of Range. if the in-place air void content in the compacted mixture is below 5% or greater than 9%, change the production and placement operations to bring the "~ in-place air void content within requirements. The Engineer may suspend prodoctioii until the i1i-place air void content is brought to the required level, and may require a test section as described in Section 340.4.11.1.d, "Test Section." d. Test Section. Construct a test section of 1 lane-width and at ... most 0.2 mi. in length to demonstrate that compaction to between 5% and 9% in-place air voids can be obtained. Continue this procedure until a test section with 5% to 9% in- _.. place air voids can be produced. The Engineer will allow only 2 test sections per day. When a test section producing satisfactory in-place air void content is placed, resume full .-- production. 2. Ordinary Compaction Control. Furnish the type, size, and number or rollers required for compaction, as approved. Furnish at "°` least 1 medium pneumatic-tire roller (minimum 12-ton weight). LJse the control strip method given in Tex-207-F, Part iV, to establish rolling patterns that achieve maximum compaction. 276 340.5 to 340.6 .., Follow the selected rolling pattern unless changes that affect compaction occw in the mixtwe or placement conditions. When such changes occw, establish a new rolling pattern. Compact the pavement to meet the requirements of the plans and specifications. When rolling with the 3-wheel, tandem or vibratory rollers, start by first rolling the joint with the adjacent pavement and then continue '" by rolling longitudinally at the sides. Proceed towazd the center of the pavement, overlapping on successive trips by at least 1 ft., unless otherwise directed. Make alternate trips of the roller slightly -` different in length. On superelevated curves, begin rolling at the low side and progress toward the high side unless otherwise directed. I. Irregularities. Immediately take corrective action if surface irregularities, including but not limited to segregation, rutting, raveling, flushing, fat spots, mat slippage, color, texture, roller mazks, tears, gouges, streaks, or uncoated aggregate particles, aze detected. The Engineer may suspend production or placement operations until the problem is corrected. At the expense of the Contractor and to the satisfaction of the Engineer, remove and replace any mixture that does not bond to the existing pavement or that has other surface irregularities identified above. J. Ride Quality. Use Surface Test Type A to evaluate ride quality in _„ accordance with Item 585, "Ride Quality for Pavement Surfaces," unless otherwise shown on the plans. 340.5. Measurement. Hot mix will be measured by the ton of composite hot mix, which includes asphalt, aggregate, and additives. Measure the weight on scales in accordance with Item 520, "Weighing and Measuring -.. Equipment " 340.6. Payment. The work performed and materials fwnished in accordance with this Item and measwed as provided under "Measwement" will be paid for at the unit price bid for "Dense-Graded Hot-Mix Asphalt (Method)" of the type, surface aggregate classification, and binder specified. These prices are full compensation for surface preparation, materials including tack coat, placement, equipment, labor, tools, and incidentals. Trial batches will not be paid for unless they are incorporated into pavement work approved by the Department. 277 341.1 to 341.2 e_ Pay adjustment for ride quality, when required, will be determined in accordance with Item 585, "Ride Quality for Pavement Surfaces." "~ ITEM 341 DENSE-GRADED HOT-MIX ASPHALT (QC/QA) ... 341.1. Description. Construct a pavement layer composed of a compacted, dense-graded mixture of aggregate and asphalt binder mixed hot in a mixing .__ plant. 341.2. Materials. Furnish uncontaminated materials of uniform quality that ~. meet the requirements of the plans and specifications. Notify the Engineer of all material sources. Notify the Engineer before changing any material source or formulation. When the Contractor makes a -- source or formulation change, the Engineer will verify that the specification requirements are met and may require a new laboratory mixture design, trial batch, or both. The Engineer may sample and test project materials at any ~- time during the project to verify specification compliance. A. Aggregate. Furnish aggregates from sources that conform to the requirements shown in Table 1, and as specified in this Section, unless '- otherwise shown on the plans. Provide aggregate stockpiles that meet the definition in this Section for either a coazse aggregate or fine aggregate. When reclaimed asphalt pavement (RAP) is allowed by plan J' note, provide RAP stockpiles in accordance with this Section. Aggregate from RAP is not required to meet Table 1 requirements unless otherwise shown on the plans. Supply mechanically crushed gravel or stone aggregates that meet the definitions in Tex=100=E. The Engineer will designate the plant or the quarry as the sampling location. Samples must be from materials produced for the project. The Engineer will establish the surface aggregate classification (SAC) and perform Los Angeles abrasion, magnesium sulfate soundness; and Micro-Deval _, tests. Perform all other aggregate quality tests listed in Table 1. Document all test results on the mixture design report. The Engineer may perform tests on independent or split samples to verify Contractor test results. Stockpile aggregates for each source and type sepazately. Determine aggregate gradations for mixture design and production testing based on the washed sieve analysis given in Tex-200-F, Part II. ._, Do not add material to an approved stockpile from sources that do not meet the aggregate quality requirements of the Department's 278 ._ 420.1 to 420.2 ITEM 420 CONCRETE STRUCTURES 420.1. Description. Construct concrete structures. 420.2. Materials. A. Concrete. Provide concrete conforming to Item 421, "Hydraulic Cement Concrete" For each type of structure or unit, provide the class of concrete shown on the plans or in pertinent governing specifications. y B. Grout or Mortar. Provide grout or mortar conforming to Section 421.2.F, `2vlortaz and Crrout." C. Latex. Provide anacrylic-polymer latex admixture (acrylic resin -- emulsion per DMS-4640, "Chemical Admixtures for Concrete") suitable for producing polymer-modified concrete or mortar. Do not allow latex to freeze. D. Reinforcing Steel. Provide reinforcing steel conforming to Item 440, "Reinforcing Steel °' E. Expansion Joint Material. Provide materials that conform to the requirements of DMS-6310, "Joint Sealants and Fillers": • Provide preformed fiber expansion joint material that conforms to ,., the dimensions shown on the plans. Provide preformed bituminous fiber material unless otherwise specified. • Provide a Class 4, 5, or 71ow-modulus silicone sealant unless _. otherwise directed. • Provide asphalt boazd that conforms to dimensions shown on the plans. ._ • Provide re-bonded neoprene filler that conforms to the dimensions shown on the plans. F. Waterstop. Provide rubber or polyvinyl chloride (PVC) waterstops "' that cotifbnri to DMS-6160, "Waterstops`, Nylon Reinforced Neoprene Sheet, and Elastomeric Pads," unless otherwise shown on the plans. G. Evaporation Retardants. Provide evaporation retazdants that conform to the requirements of DMS-4650, "Hydraulic Cement Concrete Curing Materials and Evaporation Retazdants." ~-- H. Curing Materials. Provide membrane curing compounds that conform to the requirements of DMS-4650, "Hydraulic Cement Concrete Curing Materials and Evaporation Retardants." 482 42U.3 to 420.3 Provide cotton mats that consist of a filling material of cotton "bat" or _ "bats" (at least 12 oz. per square yard) completely covered with unsized cloth (at least 6 oz. per square yard) stitched longitudinally with continuous pazallel rows of stitching spaced at less than 4 in., or tuft -- both longitudinally and transversely at intervals less than 3 in. Provide cotton mats that aze free from tears and in good general condition. Provide a flap at least 6 in, wide consisting of 2 thicknesses of the •- covering and extending along 1 side of the mat. Provide polyethylene sheeting that is at least 4 mils thick and free from visible defects. Provide only clear or opaque white sheeting when the _ ambient temperature during curing exceeds 60°F or when applicable to control temperature during mass pours. _ Provide burlap-polyethylene mats made from burlap impregnated on I side with a film of opaque white pigmented polyethylene, free from visible defects. Provide laminated mats that have at least I layer of an impervious material such as polyethylene, vinyl plastic, or other acceptable material (either as a solid sheet or impregnated into another fabric) and aze free of visible defects. I. Epoxy. Unless otherwise specified, provide epoxy materials that conform to DMS-6100, "Epoxy and Adhesives" --• 420.3. Equipment. A. Fogging Equipment. Use fogging equipment that can apply water in a fine mist, not a spray. Produce the fog using equipment that pumps ~~ water or water and air under high pressure through a suitable atomizing nozzle. Use hand-held mechanical equipment portable enough to use in the direction of any prevailing wind and adaptable for intermittent use to prevent excessive wetting of the concrete. B. Transporting and Placing Equipmeut. Use appropriate transporting and placing equipment such as buckets, chutes, buggies, belt conveyors, pumps, or other equipment as necessary. Do not transport or convey concrete through equipment made of aluminum. Use carts with pneumatic tires for carting or wheeling concrete over newly placed slabs. Use tremies to control the fall of concrete or for underwater placement. "" Use tremies that are watertight and of lazge enough diameter to allow the placement of the concrete but less than 14 in. in diameter. For underwater placements, construct the tremie so that the bottom can be V` sealed and opened once the tremie has been fully chazged with concrete. 483 420.3 to 426.3 Use pumps with lines at Least 5 in. LD, where Grade 2 or smaller coazse ._ aggregate is used, and at least 8 in. LD. for Grade 1 coarse aggregate. C. Vibrators. Use immersion-type vibrators for consolidation of concrete. Provide at least 1 standby vibrator for emergency use. -' D. Screeds and Work Bridges for Bridge Slabs. For bridge slabs use a self-propelled transverse screed or a mechanical longitudinal screed. Use transverse screeds that are able to follow the skew of the bridge for skews Beater than 15° unless otherwise approved. Equip transverse screeds with a pan float. Manually operated screeding equipment may be used if approved for top slabs of culverts, small placements, or unusual conditians. Use screeds that are rigid and heavy enough to hold true to shape and have sufficient adjustments to provide for the required camber or section. Equip the screeds, except those of the roller drum type, with metal cutting edges. For bridge slabs, use sufficient work bridges for finishing operations. Mount a carpet drag to a work bridge or a moveable support system that can vary the area of carpet iri contact with the concrete. Use carpet pieces long enough to cover the entire width of the placement. Splice or overlap the carpet as necessary. Ensure that enough carpet is in contact longitudinally with the concrete being placed to provide the desired surface finish. Use artificial grass=type carpeting having a molded "" polyethylene pile face with a blade length between 5/8 and 1 in. and with a minimum weight of 70 oz. per square yard. Ensure that the carpet has a strong, durable backing not subject to rot and that the °' facing is adequately bonded to the backing to withstaud the intended use. A burlap drag, attached to the pan float on a transverse screed, may be used instead of the carpet drag. E. Temperature Recording Equipment. For mass concrete operations or as otherwise specified, use strip chart temperature recording devices, recording maturity meters in accordance with Tex-426-A, or other approved devices that are accurate to within f2°F within the range of 32 to 212°F. - F. Artificial Heating Equipment. Usc artificial heating equipment as necessary for maintaining the concrete temperatures as specified in Section 420.4.G.11, `Placing Concrete in Cold Weather." r G. Sawing Equipment. Use sawing equipment capable of cutting grooves in completed bridge slabs and top slabs of direct-traffic culverts. Provide grooves that aze 1/8 to 3116 in. deep and nominally 1/8 in. wide. Groove spacing may range from i/8 to 1 in. Use sawing 484 420.4 to 424.4 equipment capable of cutting grooves in hardened concrete to within 18 in. of the barrier rail or curb. H. Spraying Equipment. Use mechanically powered pressure sprayers, either air or airless, with appropriate atomizing nozzles for the application of membrane curing. Mechanically driven spraying equipment, adaptable to the rail system used by the screeds, may be used for applying membrane curing to bridge slabs. 1f approved, use hand-pressurized spray equipment equipped with 2 or 3 fan-spray nozzles. Ensure that the spray from each nozzle overlaps the spray from adjacent nozzles by approximately 50%. "~` I. Concrete Testing Equipment. Provide testing equipment for use by the Engineer in accordance with Section 421.3.C, "Testing Equipment." 420.4. Construction. Before starting work, obtain approval for proposed construction methods. Approval of construction methods and equipment "` does not relieve the Contractor's responsibility for safety or correctness of methods, adequacy of equipment, or completion of work in full accordance with the Contrast: Unless otherwise shown on the plans, it is the Contractor's option to perform testing on structural concrete (structural classes of concrete are ,,e identified in Tahle 5 of Section 421.4.A, "Classification and Mix Design's to determine the in-situ strength to address the schedule restrictions in Section 420.4.A, "Schedule Restrictions." The Engineer may require the -_ Contractor to perform this testing for concrete placed in cold weather. For Contractor-performed testing, make enough test specimens to ensure that strength requirements axe met for the operations listed in Section 420.4:A. ._ Make at least I set of test specimens for each element cast each day. Cure these specimens under the same conditions as the portion of the structure involved for all stages of construction. Ensure safe handling, curing, and _. storage of all test specimens. Provide testing personnel, and sample and test the hardened concrete in accordance with Section 421.4.G, "Sampling and Testing of Concrete." The maturity method, Tex-426-A, may be used for in- situ strength determination for schedule restrictions if approved. Coring will not be allowed for in-situ strength determination for schedule restrictions. Provide the Engineer the opportunity to witness all testing operations. Report all test results to the Engineer. If the Contractor does not wish to perform schedule restriction testing, the Engineer's 7-day lab-cured tests, performed in accordance with Section 421.4.G.5, "Adequacy and Acceptance of Concrete," will be used 485 420.4 to 420.4 for schedule restriction determinations. The Engineer may require additional time for strength gain to account for field curing conditions such '~ as cold weather. A. Schedule Restrictions. Unless otherwise shown on the plans, construct _. and open completed structures to traffic with the following limitations: 1. Setting Forms. Attain at least 2,500 psi compressive strength before erecting fom~s on concrete footings supported by piling or °' drilled shafts, or on individual drilled shafts. Erect forms on spread footings and culvert footings after the footing concrete has aged at least 2 curing days as defined in Section 420.4.J, "Curing Concrete." Place concrete only after the forms and reinforcing steel have been inspected by the Engineer. Support tie beam or cap forms by falsework on previously placed tie beams only if the tie beam concrete has attained a compressive strength of 2,500 psi and the member is properly supported to ._ eliminate stresses not provided for in the design. Maintain cm•ing as required until completion of the curing period. Place superstructure forms or falsework on the substructure only if the substructure concrete has attained a compressive strength of 3,000 psi. 2. Removal of Forms and Fassework. Keep in place weight- ~~ supporting forms and falsework for bridge components and culvert slabs until the concrete has attained a compressive strength of 2,500 psi in accordance with Section 420.4.x, "Removal of Forms and Falsework."Keep all forms for mass placements defined in Section 420.4.G.14, "Mass Placements," in place for 4 days following concrete placement. 3. Placemeut of Superstructure Members. Do not place superstructure members before the substructure concrete has y- attained a compressive strength of 3,000 psi. 4. Longitudinal Screeding of Bridge Slabs. Place a longitudinal screed directly on previously placed concrete slabs to check and "' grade an adjacent slab only after the previously placed slab has aged at least 24 hr. Place and screed the concrete after the previously placed slabs have aged at least 48 hr. Maintain curing of i the previously placed slabs during placement. 5. Staged Placement of Bridge Slabs on Continuous Steel Units. When staged placement of a slab is required, ensure that the previously placed concrete attains a compressive strength of 486 420.4 to 420.4 3,000 psi before placing the next stage placement. Multiple stages may be placed in a single day if approved. 6. Storage of Materials on the Structure. Obtain approval to store materials on completed portions of a structure once a compressive strength of 3,000 psi has been attained. Maintain proper curing if materials will be stored on structures before completion of curing. 7. Placement of Equipment and Machinery. Do not place erection equipment or machinery on the structure until the concrete has attained the design strength specified in Section 421.4.A, "Classification and Mix Design," unless otherwise approved. 8. Carting of Concrete. Once the concrete has attained a compressive strength of 3,000 psi, it may be carted, wheeled, or pumped over completed slabs. Maintain curing during these operations. 9. Placing Bridge Rails. Reinforcing steel and concrete for bridge ~-- rails may be placed on bridge slabs once the slab concrete has attained a compressive strength of 3,000 psi. If slipforming methods are used for railing concrete, ensure the slab concrete has ~- attained its design strength specified in Section 421.4.A, "Classification and Mix Design," before placing railing concrete. 10. Opening to Construction Traffic. Bridges and direct-traffic culverts may be opened to all construction traffic when the design strength specified in Section 421.4.A, "Classification and Mix Design," has been attained if curing is maintained. 11. Opening to Full Traffic. Bridges and direct-traffic culverts may be opened to the traveling public when the design strength ._. specified in Section 421.4.A, "Classification and Mix Design," has been attained for all structural elements including railing subject to impact from traffic, when curing has been completed for all slabs, and when the concrete surface treatment has been applied in accordance with Item 428, "Concrete Surface Treartnent" Obtain approval before opening bridges and direct-traffic culverts to the -- traveling public. Other noncritical structural and nonstructural concrete may be opened for service upon the completion of curing unless otherwise specified or directed. 12. Post-Tensioned Construction. For structtiral elements designed to bepost-tensioned ensure that 'strength requirements on the plans are met for stressing and staged loading of structural elements. 487 d20.4 to 420.4 13. Backfilling. Backfill in accordance with Section 400.3.C, `Bachfi11" B. Plans for Falsework and Forms. Submit 2 copies of plans for falsework and forms for piers, superstructure spans over 20 ft. long, ,_ bracing systems for girders when the overhang exceeds 3 ft. 6 in., and bridge widening details. Submit similar plans for other units of the structure as directed. Show all essential details of proposed forms, .... falsework, and bracing. Have a licensed professional engineer design, seat, and sign these plans. Department approval is not required, but the Department reserves the right to request modifications to the plans. The -- Contractor is responsible for the adequacy of these plans. C. Falsework. Design and construct falsework to carry the maximum anticipated loads safely, including wind loads, and to provide the "' necessary rigidity. Submit details in accordance with Section 420.4.B, "Plans for Falsework cad Foi2iis." Design job-fabricated falsework assuming a weight of 150 pcf for concrete, and include a liveload allowance of 50 psf of horizontal surface of the form. Do not exceed 1 ZS% of the allowable stresses used by the Department for the design of structures. For commercially produced structural units used in falsework, do not exceed the manufacturer's maximum allowable working loads for "' moment and sheaz or end reaction. Include a liveload allowance of 33 psf of horizontal form surface in determining the maximum allowable working load for commercially produced structural units. ... Provide timber that is sound, in good condition, and free from defects that would impair its strength. Provide timber that meets or exceeds the species, size, and grade requirements in the submitted falsewark plans. Provide wedges made of hazdwood or metal in pairs to adjust falsework to desired elevations to ensure even bearing. Do not use wedges to compensate for incorrectly cut bearing surfaces. Use sills or grillages that aze large enough to support the superimposed load without settlement. Take precautions to prevent settling of the supporting material unless the sills or grillages are founded on solid rock, shale, or other hard materials. Place falsework that cannot be founded on a satisfactory spread footing on piling or drilled shafts with enough bearing capacity to support the superimposed load without settlement. Drive falsework piling to the ._ required resistance determined by the applicable formula in Item 404, 488 420.d to d20.d "Driving Piling "' Design drilled shafts for falsework to carry the superimposed load using both skin friction and point bearing. Weld in conformance with Item 448, "Structural Field Welding." Securely brace each falsework bent to provide the stiffness required, ~- and securely fasten the bracing to each pile or column it crosses. Remove falsework when it is no longer required or as indicated on the submitted falsework plan. Pull or cut off foundations for falsework at `"- least 2 ft. below finished ground level. Completely remove falsework, piling, or drilled shafts in a stream, lake, or bay to the approved limits to prevent obstruction to the waterway. D. Forms. Submit formwork plans in accordance with Section 420.4.B, "Plans for Falsework and Forms" ' 1. General. Except where otherwise specified or permitted, provide forms of either timber or metal. Design forms for the pressure exerted by a liquid weighing 150 pcf. Take the rate of concrete placement into consideration in determining the depth of the equivalent liquid. Include a ]iveload J.. allowance of 50 psf of horizontal surface for job-fabricated forms. Do not exceed 125% of the allowable stresses used by the Department for the design of structures. -- For commercially produced structural units used for forms, do not exceed the manufacturer's maximum allowable working loads for moment and shear or end reaction. Include a liveload allowance of 35 psf of horizontal form surface in determining the maximum allowable working load for commercially produced structural units. "- Provide steel forms for round columns unless otherwise approved. Refer to Item 427, "Surface Finishes for Concrete," for additional requirements for off-the-form finishes. Provide commercial form liners for imprinting a pattern or texture on the concrete surface as shown on the plans and specified in s. Section 427.4.B.2.d, "Form Liner Finish" Provide forming systems that are practically mortar-tight, rigidly braced, and strong enough to prevent bulging between supports, "° and maintain them to the proper line and grade during concrete placement. Maintain forms in a manner that prevents warping and shrinkage. Do not allow offsets at form joints to exceed 1116 in. 489 d20.4 to 424.4 For forms to be left in place, use only material that is inert, _ nonbiodegradable,and nonabsorptive. Attachment of forms or screed supports for bridge slabs to steal I-beams or girders may be by welding subject to the following .... requirements: • Do not weld to tension flanges or to areas indicated on the plans. _ • Weld in accordance with Item 448, "Structural Field Welding." Take into account: "'~ • deflections due to cast-in-place slab concrete and railing shown in the dead load deflection diagram in the setting of slab forms, _ differential beam or girder deflections due to skew angles and the use of certaifl stay-itt-place slab forming systems, and • deflection of the forming system due to the wet concrete. _ For bridge approach slabs, securely stake forms to line and grade and maintain in position. Rigidly attach inside forms for curbs to _ the outside forms. Construct all forms to permit their removal without marring or damaging the concrete. Clean all forms and footing areas of any "' extraneous matter before placing concrete. Provide openings in forms if needed for the removal of laitance or foreign matter ,~ Treat the facing of all forms with bond-breaking coating of composition that will not discolor or injuriously affect the concrete surface. Take care to prevent coating of the reinforcing steel. •- Complete all preparatory work before requesting permission to place concrete. If the forms show signs of bulging or sagging at any stage of the `~ placement, cease placement and remove the portion of the concrete causing this condition immediately if necessary. Reset the forms and securely brace them against further movement before -" continuing the placement. 2. Timber Forms. Provide properly seasoned good-quality lrunber ~_ that is free from imperfections that would affect its strength or impair the finished surface of the concrete. Provide timber or lumber that meets or exceeds the requirements for species and _ grade in the submitted formwork plans, 490 4211.4 to 420.4 Maintain forms or form lumber that will be reused so that it stays clean and in good condition. Do not use any lumber that is split, warped, bulged, or marred or that has defects that will produce inferior work, and promptly remove such lumber from the work. Provide form lining for all formed surfaces except: • the inside of culvert barrels, inlets, manholes, and box girders; • the bottom of bridge slabs between beams or girders; -- • surfaces that aze subsequently covered by backfill material or are completely enclosed; and • any surface formed by a single finished boazd or by plywood. "' Provide form lining of an approved type such as masonite or plywood. Do not provide thin membrane sheeting such as polyethylene sheets for form lining. Use plywood at least 3/4 in. thick. Place the gain of the face plies on plywood forms parallel to the span between the supporting „.. studs or joists unless otherwise indicated on the submitted form drawings. Use plywood for forming surfaces that remain exposed that meets the requirements for B-B Plyform Class I or Class II Exterior of the U.S. Department of Commerce Voluntary Product Standard PS 1. Space studs and joists so that the facing form material remains in true alignment under the imposed loads. -.. Space wales closely enough to hold forms securely to the designated lines, scabbed at least 4 ft. on each side of joints to provide continuity. Place a row of wales near the bottom of each placement. Place facing material with pazallel and square joints, securely fastened to supporting studs. .- For surfaces exposed to view and receiving only an ordinary surface finish as defined in Section 420.4.M, "Ordinary Surface .,, Finish," place forms with the form panels symmetrical (long dimensions set in the same direction). Make horizontal joints continuous. •- Make molding for chamfer strips or other uses of materials of a grade that will not split when nailed and that can be maintained to a true line without warping. Dress wood molding on all faces. `"' Unless otherwise shown on the plans, fill forms at all sharp comers 491 420.4 to 420.4 and edges with triangular chamfer strips measuring 3/4 in. on the sides. To hold forms in place, use metal form ties of an approved type or a satisfactory substitute of a type that permits ease of removal of _.- the metal. Cut back wire ties at least 1/2 in. from the face of the concrete. Use devices to hold metal ties in place that are able to develop the °" strength of the tie and adjust to allow for proper alignment. Entirely remove metal and wooden spreaders that sepazate the ,_ forms as the concrete is being placed. Provide adequate clean-out openings for narrow walls and other locations where access to the bottom of the forms is not readily attainable. 3. Metal Forms. Requirements for timber forms regazding design, mortar-tightness, flleted comers, beveled projections, bracing, alignment, removal, reuse, and wetting also apply to metal forms except that metal forms do not require lining unless specifically noted on the plans. Use form metal thick enough to maintain the true shape without warping or bulging. Countersink all bolt and rivet heads on the facing sides. Resign clamps, pins, or other connecting devices to hold the forms rigidly together and to allow removal without damage to the concrete. Use metal forms that present a smooth surface and that line up properly. Keep metal free from rust, grease, and other foreign materials. 4. Form Supports for Overhang Slabs. Form supports that transmit " a horizontal force to a steal girder or beam or to a prestressed concrete beam aze permitted provided a satisfactory structural analysis has been made of the effect on the girder or beam as "~ indicated in the submitted formwork plans. When overhang brackets aze used on prestressed concrete beam spans with slab overhangs not exceeding 3 ft 6 in., use beam bracing as indicated in the plans. For spans with overhangs exceeding this amount, use additional support for the outside .... beams regardless of the type of beam used. Submit details of the proposed bracing system in accordance with Section 420.4.B, "Plans for FalseWOrk and Farms" "' Punch or drill holes full size in the webs of steel members for support of overhang brackets, or torch-cut them to 1/4 in. under 492 420.4 to 420.4 size and ream them full size. Do not burn the holes full size. Leave the holes open unless otherwise shown on the plans. Never fill the ~. holes by welding. E. Drains. Install and construct weep holes and roadway drains as shown on the plans. F. Placing Reinforcement. Place reinforcement as provided in Item 440, "Reinforcing Steel." Do not weld reinforcing steel supports to I-beams "'" or girders or to reinforcing steel except where shown on the plans. Place post-tensioning ducts in accordance with the approved prestressing details and in accordance with Item 426, "Prestressing." Keep ducts free of obstructions until all post-tensioning operations aze complete. G. Placing Concrete. Give the Engineer suff cient advance notice before placing concrete in any unit of the structure to permit the inspection of forms, reinforcing steel placement, and other prepazations. Follow the sequence of placing concrete shown on the plans or specified. Do not place concrete when impending weather conditions would impair the quality of the finished work. If conditions of wind, humidity, and temperature aze such that concrete cannot be placed without the _- potential for shrinkage cracking, place concrete in early monring or at night or adjust the placement schedule for more favorable weather. Consult the evaporation rate nomograph in the Portland Cement -- Association's Design and Control of Concrete Mixtures for shrinkage cracking potential. When mixing, placing, and finishing concrete in non-daylight hours, adequately illuminate the entire placement site as ~- approved. If changes in weather conditions require protective measures after work starts, famish adequate shelter to protect the concrete against damage from rainfall or from freezing temperatures as outlined in this Item. Continue operations during rainfall only if approved. Use protective coverings for the material stockpiles. Cover aggregate stockpiles only -.. tb the extent necessary to control the moi"state conditions in the aggregates. ._ Allow at least 1 curing day after the concrete has achieved initial set before placing strain on projecting reinforcement to prevent damage to the concrete. 493 420.4 to 420.4 1. Placing Temperature. Place concrete according to the following temperature limits for the classes of concrete defined in '"' Section 421 A.A, "Classification and Mix Design": • Place Class C, F, H, K, or SS concrete only when its temperature at time of placement is between 50 and 95°F. Increase the minimum placement temperature to 60°F if ground-granulated blast furnace (GGBF) slag is used in the concrete. ._ • When used in a bridge slab or in the top slab of adirect=traffic culvert, place Class Cq DC, or S concrete only when its temperature at the time of placement is between 50 and 85°F. Increase the minimum placement temperature to 60°F if GGBF slag is used in the concrete: The maximum temperature increases to 95°F if these classes are used for other applications. • Place Class A, B, and D concrete only when its temperature at ~. the time of placement is greater than 50°F. • Place mass concrete, defined by Section 420.4.G.14, "Mass Placements," only when its temperature at the time of placement is between 50 and 75°F. 2. Transporting Time. Place concrete delivered in agitating trucks within 60 min. after hatching. Place concrete delivered in non- - agitating equipment within 45 min. after hatching. Revise the concrete mix design as necessary for hot weather or other conditions that contribute to quick setting of the concrete. Submit ~- for approval a plan to demonstrate that these time limitations can be extended while ensuring the concrete can be properly placed, consolidated, and finished without the use of additional water. i 3. Workability of Concrete. Place concrete with a slump as specif ed in Section 421.4.A.5, "Slump." Concrete that exceeds the maximum slump will be rejected. Water maybe added to the concrete before discharging any concrete from the truck to adjust for low slump provided that the maximum mix design water- cement ratio is not exceeded. After introduction of any additional water or chemical admixtures, mix concrete in accordance with Section 421.4.E, "Mixing and Delivering Concrete °' Do not add ,,_, water or chemical admixtures after any concrete has been discharged. 4. Transporting Concrete. Use a method and equipment capable of maintaining the rate of placement shown on the plans or required by this Item to transport concrete to the forms. Transport concrete 494 420.4 to 420.4 by buckets, chutes, buggies, belt conveyors, pumps, or other methods. Protect concrete transported by conveyors from sun and wind to prevent loss of slump and workability. Shade or wrap with wet burlap pipes through which concrete is pumped as necessary to prevent loss of slump and workability. Arrange and use chutes, troughs, conveyors, or pipes so that the "a concrete ingredients will not be separated. When necessary to prevent segregation, terminate such equipment in vertical downspouts. Extend open troughs and chutes, if necessary, down inside the forms or through holes left in the forms. Keep all transporting equipment clean and free from hazdened ._ concrete coatings. Discharge water used for cleaning clear of the concrete. 5. Preparafion of Surfaces. Thoroughly wet all forms, prestressed "" concrete panels, T-beams, and concrete box beams on which concrete is to be placed before placing concrete on them. Remove any remaining puddles of excess water before placing concrete. "" Provide surfaces that are in a moist, saturated surface-dry condition when concrete is placed on them. Ensure that the subgracle or foundation is moist before placing concrete for bridge approach slabs or other concrete placed on grade. Lightly sprinkle the subgrade if dry. -- 6. Expansion Joints. Construct joints and devices to provide for expansion and contraction in accordance with plan details and the requirements of this Section and Item 454, "Bridge Expansion Joints." Prevent bridging of concrete or mortar around expansion joint material in bearings and expansion joints. ,~ Use forms adaptable to loosening or early removal in construction of all open joints and joints to be filled with expansion joint ,._ material. To avoid expansion or contraction damage to the adjacent concrete, loosen these forms as soon as possible after final concrete set to permit free movement of the span without requiring •_ full form removal. When the plans show a Type A joint, provide preformed fiber joint material in the vertical joints of the roadway slab, curb, median, or "' sidewalk, and fill the top 1 in. with the specified joint sealing material unless noted otherwise. Install the sealer in accordance 495 d2U.4 to 420.4 with Item 438, "Cleaning and Sealing Joints and Cracks (Rigid Pavement and Bridge Decks)," and the manufacturer's recommendations. Use light wire or nails to anchor any preformed fiber joint material ~- to the concrete on 1 side of the joint. Ensure that fmished joints conform to the plan details with the concrete sections completely separated by the specified opening or ~' joint material. Remove all concrete within the joint opening soon after form „_ removal and again where necessary after surface fmishing to ensure full effectiveness of the expansion joint. 7. Construction Joints. A construction joint is the joint formed by °- placing plastic concrete in duect contact with concrete that has attained its initial set. Monolithic placement means that the manner and sequence of concrete placing does not create a constmction '- joint. Make construction joints of the type and at the locations shown on the plans. Do not make joints in bridge slabs not shown on the plans unless approved. Additional joints in other members are not permitted without approval. Place authorized additional joints using details equivalent to those shown on the plans for joints in similaz locations. Unless otherwise required, make construction joints squaze and -- normal to the forms. Use bulkheads in the forms for all vertical joints. Thoroughly roughen the top surface of a concrete placement terminating aY a horizontal construction joint as soon as practical after initial set is attained. Thoroughly clean the hazdened concrete surface of all loose material, laitance, dirt, and foreign matter, and saturate it with water. Remove all free water and moisten the surface before _. concrete or bonding grout is placed against it. Draw forms tight against the existing concrete to avoid mortar loss and offsets at joints. Coat the joint surface with bonding mortar, grout, epoxy, or other material as indicated in the plans or other Items. Provide Type V epoxy per DMS-6100, `epoxies and Adhesives," for bonding fresh concrete to hazdened concrete. Place the bonding epoxy on a clean, 496 43.0.4 to 420.4 dry surface, and place the flesh concrete while the epoxy is still tacky. Place bonding mortaz or grout on a surface that is saturated ~' surface-dry, and place the concrete before the bonding mortar or grout dries. Place other bonding agents in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. S. Handling and Placing. Minimize segregation of the concrete and displacement of the reinforcement when handling and placing p- concrete. Produce a uniform dense compact mass. Do not allow concrete to free-fall more Than 5 ft. except in the case of drilled shafts, thin walls such as in culverts, or as allowed by other Items. Remove any hardened concrete splatter ahead of the plastic concrete. .~. Fill each part of the forms by depositing concrete as near its final position as possible. Do not deposit lazge quantities at 1 point and run or work the concrete along the forms. °° Deposit concrete in the forms in Iayers of suitable depth but not more than 36 in, deep unless otherwise permitted. Avoid cold joints in a monolithic placement. Sequence successive layers or adjacent portions of concrete so that they can be vibrated into a homogeneous mass with the previously placed concrete before it sets. When re-vibration of the concrete is shown on the plans, allow at most 1 hr. to elapse between adjacent or successive placements of concrete except as otherwise allowed by an ,,,_ approved placing procedure. Tlvs time limit may be extended by 1/2 hr. if the concrete contains at least a normal dosage of retazding admixture. -- Use an approved retazding agent to control stress cracks and cold joints in placements where differential settlement and setting Ume may induce cracking. 9. Consolidation. Carefully consolidate concrete and flush mortar to the form surfaces with immersion type vibrators. Do not use vibrators that operate by attachment to forms or reinforcement '" except where approved on steel forms. Vibrate the concrete immediately after deposit. Systematically space points of vibration to ensure complete consolidation and thorough working of the concrete around the reinforcement, embedded fixtures, and into the comers and angles of the forms. •.-~ Insert the vibrator vertically where possible except for slabs where it may be inserted in a sloping or horizontal position. Vibrate the 497 46.4 to 420.4 entire depth of each lift, allowing the vibrator to penetrate several inches into the preceding lift. Do not use the vibrator to move the concrete to other locations in the forms. Do not drag the vibrator through the concrete. Thoroughly consolidate concrete along ~. construction joints by operating the vibrator along and close to but not against the joint surface. Continue the vibration until the concrete surrounding reinforcements and fixtures is completely consolidated. Hand-spade or rod the concrete if necessary to ensure flushing of mortar to the surface of all forms. 10. Installation of Dowe-s and Anchor Bolts. Install dowels and °° anchor bolts by casting them in-place or by grouting with grout, epoxy, or epoxy mortar unless noted otherwise. Form or drill holes for grouting. Drill holes for anchor bolts to accommodate the bolt embedment required by the plans. Make holes for dowels at feast 12 in, deep unless otherwise shown on the plans. When using grout or epoxy mortaz, make the diameter of the hole at least twice the dowel or bolt diameter, but the hole need not exceed the dowel or bolt diameter plus 1-U2 in. When using epoxy, make the hole diameter 1 /16 to 1/4 in. greater than the dowel or bolt diameter. Thoroughly clean holes of all loose material, oil, grease, or other bond-breaking substance, and blow them clean with filtered compressed air. Ensure that holes aze in a surface dry condition when epoxy type material is used and in a surface moist condition w, when hydraulic cement grout is used. Develop and demonstrate for approval a procedure for cleaning and preparing the holes for installation of the dowels and anchor bolts. Completely fill the void between the hole and dowel or bolt with grouting material. Follow exactly the requirements for cleaning outlined in the product specifications for prepackaged systems. For cast-in-place or grouted systems, provide hydraulic cement grout in accordance with Section 421.2.F, "Mortar and Grout," m epoxy, epoxy mortar, or other prepackaged gouts as approved. Provide a Type III epoxy per DMS-6100, "Epoxies and Adhesives," when neat epoxy is used far anchor bolts or dowels. Provide Type VIII epoxy per DMS-6100 when an epoxy grout is used. Provide grout, epoxy, or epoxy mortaz as the binding agent unless otherwise indicated on the plans. Provide other anchor systems as required in the plans 498 420.4 to 420.4 ._ 11. Placing Concrete in Cold Weather. Protect concrete placed under weather conditions where weather may adversely affect results. Permission given by the Engineer for placing during cold ._ weather does not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for producing concrete equal in quality to that placed under normal conditions. If concrete placed under poor conditions is ~- unsatisfactory, remove and replace it as duected at Contractor's expense. Do not place concrete in contact with any material coated with "` frost or having a temperature of 32°F or lower. Do not place concrete when the ambient temperature in the shade is below 40°F and falling unless approved. Concrete may be placed when the _ ambient temperature in the shade is 35°F acid rising or above 40°F. Provide and install recording thermometers, maturity meters, or .., other suitable temperature measuring devices to verify that all concrete is effectively protected as follows: • Maintain the temperature of the top surface of bridge slabs and -., top slabs of direct-traffic culverts at 50°F or above for 72 hr. from the time of placement and above 40°F for an additional 72 hr. ._ . Maintain the temperature at all surfaces of concrete in bents, piers, culvert walls, retaining walls, pazapets, wingwalls, bottoms of bridge slab or culvert top slabs, and other similaz ._ formed concrete at 40°F or above for 72 hr. from the time of placement. • Maintain the temperature of all other concrete, including the d- bottom slabs (footings) of culverts; placed on or in the ground above 32°F for 72 hr. from the time of placement. Use additional covering, insulated farms, or other means and, if '-' necessary, supplement the covering with artificial heating. Avoid applying heat directly to concrete surfaces. Ctizre as specified in Section 420.4.7, "Curing Concrete," during this period until all requirements for curing have been satisfied. When impending weather conditions indicate the possible need for ._ temperature protection, have on hatid all necessary heafiug afld covering material, ready for use, before permission is granted to begin placement. '- 12. Placing Concrete in Hot Weather. Use an approved retarding agent in all concrete for superstructures and top slabs of direct- 499 420.4 to 420.4 .., traffic culverts, except concrete containing GGBF slag, when the temperature of the air is above 85°F unless otherwise directed. Keep the concrete at or below the maximum temperature at time of -~- placement as specified in Section 420.4.G.1, "Placing Temperature" Sprinkle and shade aggregate stockpiles or use ice, liquid nitrogen systems, or other approved methods as necessary to '° control the concrete temperature. 13. Placing Concrete in Water. Deposit concrete in water only when shown on the plans or with approval. Make forms or cofferdams tight enough to prevent any water current passing through the space in which the concrete is being deposited. Do not pump water ,_ during the concrete placing or until the concrete has set for at least 36 hr. Place the concrete with a tremie or pump, or use another approved -- method, and do not allow it to fall freely through the water or disturb it after it is placed Keep the concrete surface approximately level during placement. ~' Support the tremie or operate the pump so that it can be easily moved horizontally to cover all the work azea and vertically to control the concrete flow. Submerge the lower end of the tremie or pump hose in the concrete at all times. Use continuous placing operations until the work is complete. ..- For concrete to be placed under water, design the concrete mix in accordance with Item 421, "Hydraulic Cement Concrete," with a minimum cement content of 650 Ib. per cubic yard. Include an ~- anti-washout admixture in the mix design as necessary to produce a satisfactory finished product. 14. Mass Placements. Mass placements aze defined as placements '® with a least dimension greater than or equal to 5 ft., or designated on the plans. For monolithic mass placements, develop and obtain approval for a plan to ensure the following during the heat '~ dissipation period: • the temperature differential between the central core of the placement and the exposed concrete surface does not exceed 35°F and • the temperature at the central core of the placement does not _ exceed 160°F. Base this plan on the equations given in the Portland Cement Association's Decrgn and Control of Concrete Mixtures. Cease all 500 420.4 to 420.4 „_ mass placement operations and revise the plan as necessary if either of the above limitations is exceeded. Include a combination of the following elements in this plan: -- • selection of concrete ingredients including aggregates, gradation, and cement types, to minimize heat of hydration; • use of ice or other concrete cooling ingredients; °-` • use of liquid nitrogen dosing systems; • controlling rate or time of concrete placement; • use of insulation ar supplemental external heat to control heat "' loss; • use of supplementary cementing materials; or • use of a cooling system to control the core temperature. Furnish and insta112 sets of temperature recording devices, maturity meters, or other approved equivalent devices at designated lbcafioris. Use tliese devices to 8iiiiultarie6iisly measure the temperature of the concrete at the core and the surface. Maintain temperature control methods for 4 days unless otherwise approved. Maturity meters may not be used to predict strength of mass concrete. 15. Placing Concrete in Foundation and Substructure. Do not place concrete in footings until the depth and chazacter of the foundation has been inspected and permission has been given to proceed. Placing of concrete footings upon seal concrete is permitted after the cofferdams aze free from water and the seal concrete cleaned. Perform any necessary pumping or bailing during the concreting from a suitable sump located outside the forms. Construct or adjust all temporary wales or braces inside cofferdams as the work proceeds to prevent unauthorized r construction joints. When footings can be placed in a dry excavation without the use of cofferdams, omit fomrs if approved, and fill the enrire excavation "" with concrete to the elevation of the top of footing. Place concrete in columns monolithically between constmction joints unless otherwise directed. Columns and caps or tie beams supported on them may be placed in the same operation or separately. If placed in the same operation, allow for settlement o and shrinkage of the column concrete by placing it to the lower level of the cap or tie beam, and delay placement between 1 and 2 hr. before proceeding with the cap or tie beam placement. 501 ,~ 420.4 to 420.4 16. Placing Concrete in Box Culverts. Where the top slab and walls aze placed monolithically in culverts more than 4 ft. in clear height, allow between 1 and Z hr. to elapse before placing the top slab to allow for settlement and shrinkage in the wall concrete. Accurately fnish the footing slab at the proper rime to provide a smooth uniform surface. Finish top slabs that carry deed-traffic as "' specified in this Item. t'iive top slabs of fill type culverts a float finish. _, 17. Placing Concrete in Superstructure. Unless otherwise shown on the plans, place simple span bridge slabs without transverse construcfion joints by using either aself-propelled transverse ,,., finishing machine or a mechanical longitudinal screed. For small placements or for unusual conditions such as narrow widening variable cross-slopes, or transitions, use of manually operated „... screeding equipment may be permitted. Support the screed adequately on a header or rail system stable enough to withstand the longitudinal or lateral thrust of the equipment. Adjust the profile grade line as necessary to account for variations in beam camber and other factors to obtain the required slab thickness and concrete cover over the slab reinforcement. Set beams and verify .- their surface elevations in a sufficient number of spans so that when adjustment is necessary, the profile grade line can be adjusted over suitable increments to produce a smooth riding surface. Take dead load deflection into account in setting the grades of headers and rail systems. Use construction joints, when required or permitted for slab placements on steel or prestressed concrete beams, as shown on the plans. Before placing concrete on steel girder or truss spans, release falsework under the spans and swing the spans free on their permanent supports. Make 1 or more passes with the screed over the bridge slab segment before placing concrete on it to ensure proper operation and maintenance of grades and clearances. Use an approved system of checking to detect any vertical movement of the forms or falsework. Maintain fottns for the bottom surface of concrete slabs, girders, and overhangs to the required vertical alignment during concrete placing. Fog unformed surfaces of slab concrete in bridge slabs and in top ~- slabs of direct-traffic culverts from the time of initial strikeoff of the concrete until finishing is completed and required interim curing is in place. I5o not use fogging as a means to add finishing 502 42U.4 to 420.4 .,, water, and do not work moisture from the fog spray into the fresh concrete. For simple spans, retard the concrete only if necessary to complete °- finishing operations or as required by this Section. When filling curb forms, bring the top of curb and sidewalk section to the correct camber and alignment, and finish them as described in this ""' item. a. Transverse Screeding. Install rails for transverse fmishing ,,,, machines that are supported from the beams or girders so that the supports may be removed without damage to the slab. Prevent bonding between removable supports and the concrete _,,, in an acceptable manner. Do not allow rail support parts that remain embedded in the slab to project above the upper mat of reinforcing steel. Rail or screed supports attached to I-beams ,. or girders are subject to the requirements of this Item. Unless otherwise shown on the plans, for transverse screeding the minimum rate of concrete placement is 30 lineaz feet of bridge „.. slab per hour. Deposit concrete parallel to the skew of the bridge so that all girders are loaded uniformly along their length. Deposit slab concrete between the exterior beam and ._ the adjacent beam before placing concrete in the overhang portion of the slab. Furnish personnel and equipment capable of placing, finishing, and curing the slab at an acceptable rate ._ to ensure compliance with the specifications. Place concrete in transverse strips. On profile grades greater than 1-1/2%, start placement at the lowest end. "` b. Longitudinal Screeding. Unless otherwise shown on the plans, use of temporary intermediate headers will be permitted for placements over 50 8: long if the rate of placement is rapid enough to prevent a cold joint and if these headers are designed for easy removal to permit satisfactory consolidation and finish of the concrete at their locations. Deposit slab concrete between the exterior beam and the adjacent beam before placing concrete in the overhang portion of the slab. Place concrete in longitudinal strips starting at a point in the v center of the segment adjacent to I side except as this Section indicates, and complete the strip by placing uniformly in both directions toward the ends. For spans on a profile grade of ~~ 1-1/2% or more, start placing at the lowest end. Use strips wide enough that the concrete within each strip remains plastic until placement of the adjacent strip. Where monolithic curb 503 430.4 to 430.4 _ construction is specif ed, place the concrete in proper sequence to be monolithic with the adjacent longitudinal strips of the slabs. G Placements on Continuous Steel Units. Unless otherwise shown on the plans, place slabs on continuous steel units in a single continuous operation without transverse construction joints using aself-propelled transverse finishing machine or a mechanical longitudinal screed. Retazd the initial set of the concrete sufficiently to ensure that concrete remains plastic in ~- at least 3 spans immediately preceding the slab being placed. Use construction joints, when required far slab placements on steel beams or girders, as shown on the plans. When staged °- placement of a slab is required in the plans, ensure that the previously placed concrete attains a compressive strength of 3,000 psi before placing the next stage concrete. Multiple "' stages may be placed in a single day if approved. Where plans permit staged placing without specifying a particular order of placement, use an approved placing sequence that will not "'" overstress of any of the supporting members. d. Slab and Girder Units. Unless otherwise shown on the plans, place girders, slab, and curbs of slab and girder spans monolithically. Fill concrete girder stems first, and place the slab concrete within the time limits specified in this Item. If ,,,_ using a transverse screed, place concrete in the stems for a short distance and then place the concrete in transverse strips: If using a longitudinal screed, fill the outside girder stem first, ._ beginning at the low end or side, and continue placement in longitudinal strips. H. Treatment and Finishing of Horizontal Surfaces Other Than ~~ Bridge Slabs. Strike off to grade and fmish all unformed upper surfaces. Do not use mortar topping for surfaces constructed under this Section. __ After the concrete has been struck off, float the surface with a suitable float. Give bridge sidewalks a wood float or broom finish, or stripe them with a brush. Slightly slope the tops of caps and piers between bearing azeas from the center towazd the edge, and slope the tops of abutment and transition .- bent caps from the backwall to the edge, as directed, so that water drains from the surface. Give the concrete a smooth trowel finish. Construct bearing azeas for steel units in accordance with 504 d20.4 to 420.4 ,_ Section 441.3.x.5, "Bearing and Anchorage Devices." Give the bearing azea under the expansion ends of concrete slabs and slab and girder spans asteel-trowel finish to the exact grades required. Give bearing r_ azeas under elastomeric bearing pads or nonreinforced bearing seat buildups a textured, wood float finish. Do not allow the bearing area to vary from a level plane more than 1/16 in. in all directions. °- Cast bearing seat buildups or pedestals for concrete units integrally with the cap or with a construction joint. Provide alatex-based mortar, an epoxy mortaz, or an approved proprietary bearing mortaz for bearing " seat buildups cast with a construction joint. Mix mortazs in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Construct pedestals of Class C concrete, reinforced as shown on the plans or as indicated in `"" Figure 1 and Figure 2. Nonreinforced Reinforced Pedestal Benring Seat ~ for Heights Greater Build-up than 3 °- Minimum 1 112" ~ i ~ , yT-#4 Maximum 3" ~~t' at ~ Bzdm M. I I I I NY I I I I Permissible Construction Joint Figure 1 Section through bearing seat buildups. Bnrs 505 42U.4 to 420.4 Nanreinforced Bearing Seat , Build=up -~ ~r -r -~ Reinforced f Pedestal far Heights ~--~- - -• Granter than 3" ~II Figure 2 Plan view of bearing seat buildups. I. Finish of Bridge Slabs. Provide camber for specif ed vertical curvature and transverse slopes. ~- For concrete flat slab and concrete slab and girder spans cast in place on falsework, provide additional camber to offset the initial and final deflections of the span as indicated in the plans. For concrete slab and •-- girder spans using pan forms, provide camber of approximately 3/8 in. for 30-ft. spans and 1 /2 in. for 40-ft. spans to offset initial and final deflections unless otherwise directed. For concrete flat slab and •- concrete slab and girder spans not using pan forms, when dead load deflection is not shown on the plans, provide a camber of 1/8 in. per 10 fr. of span length but na mare than 112 in. ._ Provide a camber of 1/4 in. in addition to deflection for slabs without vertical curvature on steel or prestressed concrete beams. --- Use work bridges or other suitable facilities to perform all finishing operations and to provide access, if necessary, for the Engineer to check measurements for slab thickness and reinforcement cover. 506 430.4 to 420.4 _ As soon as the concrete has been placed and vibrated in a section wide enough to permit working, level, strike off, and screed the surface, carrying a slight excess of concrete ahead of the screed to fill all low spots. Move longitudinal screeds across the concrete with asaw-like motion while their ends rest on headers or templates set true to the roadway "' grade or on the adjacent finished slab. Move transverse screeds longitudinally approximately 1/5 of the drum length for each complete out-and-back pass of the carriage. Screed the surface of the concrete enough times and at intervals to produce a uniform surface true to grade and free of voids. -- Work the screeded surface to a smooth finish with along-handled wood or metal float or hand-float it from work bridges over the slab. Floating may not be necessary if the pan float attached to a transverse screed -- produces an acceptable finish. Avoid overworking the surface of the concrete. Avoid overuse of finish water. ... Perform sufficient checks, witnessed by the Engineer, with along- handled 16-ft. straightedge on the plastic concrete to ensure that the final surface will be within specified tolerances. Make the check with ._ the straightedge pazallel to the centerline. Lap each pass half over the preceding pass. Remove all high spots, and fill and float all depressions over 1116 in. deep with fresh concrete. Continue checking and floating until the surface is true to grade and free of depressions, high spots, voids, or rough spots. Fill screed-rail support holes with concrete, and finish them to match the top of the slab. ~- Finish the concrete surface to a uniform texture using a carpet drag, burlap drag, or broom finish. Finish the surface to a smooth sandy texture without blemishes, marks, or scratches deeper than 1/16 in. -~-- Apply the surface texturing using a work bridge or platform immediately after completing the straightedge checks. Draw the carpet or burlap drag longitudinally along the concrete surface, adjusting the --- surface contact area or pressure to provide a satisfactory coazsely textured surface. A broom finish may be performed using a fine bristle broom transversely. Coat the concrete surface immediately after the carpet or burlap drag, or broom finish with a single application of evaporation retazdant at a rate reconitiieafled by the ttiatiul'acttirer. Do trot allow titore than 10 min. to elapse between the texturing at any location and application of evaporation retardant. The evaporation retazdant may be applied 507 420.4 to 420.4 using the same work bridge used for surface texturing. Do not work the concrete surface once the evaporation retazdant has been applied. Apply interim and final curing in accordance with Section 420.4.J, '- "Curing Concrete." The Contractor is responsible for the ride quality of the fnished bridge slab. The Engineer will use a 10-ft. straightedge (1/8 in. in 10 ft.) to verify ride quality and to determine locations where corrections aze needed. If the Engineer determines that the ride quality is unacceptable, ._ submit a plan for approval to produce a ride of acceptable quality. Make all corrections for ride before saw-cutting grooves. Saw-cut grooves in the hardened concrete of bridge slabs, bridge approach slabs, and direct-traffic culverts to produce the final texturing after completion of the required curing period. Cut grooves perpendiculaz to the structure centerline. Cut grooves continuously ~- across the slab to within 18 in. of the barrier rail, curb, or median divider. At skewed metal expansion joints in bridge slabs, adjust groove cutting by using narrow-width cutting heads so that all grooves •- end within 6 in. of the joint, measured perpendiculaz to the centerline of the metal joint. Leave no ungrooved surface wider than 6 in. adjacent to either side of the joint. Ensure that the minimum distance to the first -°` groove, measured perpendicular to the edge of the concrete joint or from the junction between the concrete and the metal leg of the joint, is I in: Cut grooves continuously across constn~ction joints or other joints in the concrete that aze less than 1/2 in. wide. Apply the same procedure described above where bamer rails, curbs, or median dividers aze not pazallel to the structure centerline to maintain the 18-in. "' maximum dimension from the end of the grooves to the gutter line. Cut grooves continuously across formed concrete joints. _, When the plans call for a concrete overlay to be placed on the slab (new construction) or on prestressed concrete box beams or other precast elements; give a carpet drag, burlap drag, or broom finish to all a_ concrete surfaces to be overlaid. Saw-grooving is not required in this case. Provide an average texture depth for the finish of approximately 0.035 in. with no individual test falling below 0.020 in., unless r otherwise shown on the plans, when tested in accordance with Tex-436-A. If the texture depth falls below what is intended, revise finishing procedures to produce the desired texture. ~- When the plans require an asphalt seal, with or without overlay, on the slab (new construction), on prestressed concrete box beams, or on other precast elements, give all concrete surfaces to be covered a lightly 508 420.4 to 420.4 ,_ textured broom or carpet drag finish. Provide an average texture depth of approximately 0.025 in. when tested in acwrdance with Tex-436-A. J. Curing Concrete. Obtain approval of the proposed curing methods, '-' equipment, and materials before placing concrete. The Engineer may require the same curing methods for like portions of a single structure. Inadequate curing or facilities may delay all concrete placement on the "° job until remedial action is taken. A curing day is a calendaz day when the temperature, taken in the shade ,.., away from artifcial heat, is above 50°F for at least 19 hr. or, on colder days if the temperature of all surfaces of the concrete is maintained above 40°F, for the entire 24 hr. The required curing period begins when all concrete has attained its initial set. Tex-440-A may be used to determine when the concrete has attained its initial set. Cure all concrete for 4 consecutive days except as noted in Table 1. Table 1 Exceptions to 4-Dav Curing Description Type of Cement Required Curio Da s I or III 8 Upper surfaces of bridge II or UII 10 slabs, toll slab of direct-ttafHc All types wish culverts, and concrete overlays supplementary cementing 10 materials Concrete piling buildups All 6 °- For upper surfaces of bridge slabs, bridge approach slabs, median and sidewalk slabs, and culvert top slabs constructed using Class S concrete, apply interim curing using a Type 1-D curing compound as "` soon as possible after application of the evaporation retardant and after the water sheen has disappeazed, but no more than 45 min. after application of the evaporation retardant. Apply membrane interim curing using a work bridge or other approved apparatus to ensure a uniform application. Water-cure for final curing in accordance with this Section, starting as soap as possible without damaging the surface " finish. Maintain the water curing for the duration noted in Table 1. Place polyethylene sheeting, burlap-polyethylene blankets, laminated mats, or insulating curing mats in direct contact with the slab when the +` air temperahue is expected to drop below 40°F dr>ring the first 72 hr. of the curing period. Weigh down these curing materials with dry mats to maintain direct contact with the concrete and to provide insulation 509 420.4 to 420.4 against cold weather. Supplemental heating or insulation may be required in cold and wet weather if the insulating cotton mats become wet or if the concrete drops below the specified curing temperature. Avoid applying heat directly to concrete surfaces. For the top surface of any concrete unit upon which concrete is to be placed and bonded at a later interval (stub walls, risers, etc.) and other superstructure concrete (curbs, wingwalls, parapet walls, etc.), use only water curing in accordance with this Section. Cure all other concrete as specified in the pertinent Items. Use the r following methods for curing concrete, subject to the requirements of this Item. 1. Form Curing. When forms aze left in intimate contact with the concrete, other curing methods aze not required except for exposed surfaces and for cold weather protection. If forms aze removed -- before the 4-day required curing period, use another approved curing method. 2. Water Curing. Keep all exposed surfaces of the concrete wet continuously for the required curing time. Use water curing that meets the requirements for concrete mixing water in Section 421.2.D, "Water." Do not use seawater or water that stains "' or leaves an unsightly residue. a. Wet Mats. Keep the concrete continuously wet by ,_, maintaining wet cotton mats in direct contact with the concrete for the required curing time. If needed, place damp burlap blankets made from 3-oz. stock on the damp concrete surface for temporary protection before applying cotton mats. Then place the dry mats and wet them immediately after they are placed. Weight the mats adequately to provide continuous .~ contact with all concrete. Cover surfaces that cannot be cured by direct contact with mats, forming an enclosure well anchored to the forms or ground so that outside air cannot enter the enclosure. Provide sufficient moisture inside the enclosure to keep all surfaces of the concrete wet. b. Water Spray. Overlap sprays or sprinklers to keep all " unformed surfaces continuously wet. c. Ponding. Cover the surfaces with at least 2 in. of clean ,_ granulaz material, kept wet at all times, or at least 1 in. deep water. Use a dam to retain the water or saturated granular material. 510 420.4 to 420.4 3. Membrane Curing. Unless otherwise shown on the plans, choose either Type 1-D or Type 2membrane-curing compound when membrane curing is permitted. Type 1-D (Resin 1~ase Only} is ... required for interim curing bridge slabs and top slabs of direct- trafficculverts and all other surfaces that require a higher grade of surface finish. For substructure concrete provide only 1 type of curing compound on any 1 structure. Apply membrane curing just after free moisture has disappeared at a rate of approximately 1$0 sq. ft. per gallon. Oo not spray curing compound on projecting reinforcing steel or concrete that will later form a construction joint. Do not apply membrane curing to dry surfaces. Dampen formed surfaces and surfaces that have been "' given a first rub so that they are moist at the time of application of the membrane. e,., When membrane is used for complete curing, leave the film unbroken for the minimum curing period specified. Correct damaged membrane immediately by reapplication of membrane. _, Polyethylene sheeting, burlap-polyethylene mats, or laminated matsrn close contact with the concrete surfaces are equivalent to membrane curing. °- K. Removal of Forms and Falsework. Unless otherwise directed, forms for vertical surfaces may be removed after the concrete has aged 12 hr. after initial set provided the removal can be done without damage to the "` concrete. Keep forms for mass placements, defined in Section 420.4.G.14, "Mass Placements," in place for 4 days following concrete placement. w. Remove forms for inside curb faces and for bridge rails whenever removal can be done without damage to the curb or railing. Leave in place weight-supporting forms and falsework spanning more than 1 ft. for all bridge components and culvert slabs except as directed otherwise un61 the concrete has attained a compressive strength of 2,500 psi. Remove forms for other structural components as necessary. Remove inside forms (walls and top slabs) for box culverts and sewers after concrete has attained a compressive strength of 1,800 psi if an approved overhead support system is used to transfer the weight of the top slab to the walls of the box culvert or sewer before removal of the support provided by the forms. 511 420.4 to 420.4 Forms or parts of forms may be removed only if constructed to permit removal without disturbing forms or falsework required to be left in place for a longer period on other portions of the structure. - Remove all metal appliances used inside forms for alignment to a depth of at least I/2 in. from the concrete surface. Make the appliances so that metal may be removed without undue chipping or spelling of the °° concrete, and so that it leaves a smooth opening in the concrete surface when removed. Do not burn off rods, bolts, or ties. Remove all forms and falsework unless otherwise directed. L. Defective Work. Repair defective work as soon as possible. Remove and replace at the expense of the Contractor any defect that cannot be . _ repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer. M. Ordinary Surface Fiuish. Apply an ordinary surface finish to all concrete surfaces as follows: "" Chip away all loose or broken material to sound concrete where porous, spelled, or honeycombed azeas aze visible after form removal. "'~ Repair spells by saw-cutting and chipping at least I/2 in, deep, perpendicular to the surface to eliminate feather edges. Repair shallow cavities using a latex adhesive grout, cement mortar, or "`~ epoxy mortar as approved. Repair large azeas using concrete as directed or approved. • Clean and fill holes or spells caused by the removal of form ties, etc., with latex grout, cement grout, or epoxy grout as approved. Fill only the holes: Do not blend the patch with the surrounding concrete. On surfaces to receive a rub finish in accordance with Item 427, "Surface Finishes for Concrete," chip out exposed parts of metals chairs to a depth of 1/2 in. and repair the surface. • Remove all fms, runs, drips, or mortaz from surfaces that will be ~~ exposed. Smooth all form mazks and chamfer edges by grinding or dry-rubbing. • Ensure that all repairs aze dense, well bonded, and properly cured. Finish exposed lazge repairs to blend with the surrounding concrete where a higher class of finish is not specified. ~- Unless noted otherwise, apply an ordinary surface finish as the final finish to the following exposed surfaces: • inside and top of inlets, • inside and top of manholes, • inside of sewer appurtenances, • inside of culvert barrels, 512 420.5 to 420.5 „, bottom of bridge slabs between girders or beams, and • vertical and bottom surfaces of interior concrete beams or girders. Form marks and chamfer edges do not need to be smoothed for the "` inside of culvert ban•els and the bottom of bridge slabs between girders or beams. 420.5. Measurement. This Item will be measured by the cubic Yazd, square yazd, foot, squaze Foot, or by each structure. A. General Concrete quantities will be based on the dimensions shown on the plans or those established in writing by the Engineer. In determining quantities, no deductions will be made for chamfers less ... than 2 in. or for embedded portions of steel or prestressed concrete beams, piling, anchor bolts, reinforcing steel, drains, weep holes, junction boxes, electrical or telephone conduit, ducts and voids for ..- prestressed tendons, or embedded portions of light fixtures. For slab and girder spans using pan forms, a quantity will be included for the screed setting required to provide proper camber in the roadway ""' surface after form removal. For slabs on steel or prestressed concrete beams, an estimated quantity for the haunch between the slab and beams will be included. No measurement will be made during construction for variation in the amount of haunch concrete due to variations in camber of the beams. °- For cast-in-place slabs on slab beams, double-T beams, or box beams, the combination of span length, theoretical camber in beams, computed deflections, and plan vertical curve will be taken into account in •° determining the quantity for the slab. Additional concrete that may be required by an adjustment of the profile grade line during construction, to insure proper slab thickness, will not be measured for payment. Variation in concrete headwall quantity incurred when an alternate bid for pipe is permitted will not be cause for payment adjustment. Mass placements may be either a plans quantity item or measured in place as indicated. Quantities revised by a change in design, measured as specified, will be increased or decreased and included for payment. ~- B. Plans Quantity. Structure elements designated in Table 2 and measured by the cubic yazd are plans quantity measurement items. The quantity to be paid for plans quantity items is the quantity shown in the 51.3 d20.6 to 420.6 ,,. proposal unless modified by Article 9.2, "Plans Quantity Measurement." Additional measurements or calculations will be made if adjustments of quantities are required. °- No adjustment will be made for footings or other in-ground elements where the Contractor has been allowed to place concrete in an excavation without forms. Table 2, Plans Quantity Payment ~- (Cubic Yard Measurement 6nlvl Culverts and culvert win walls Abutments Headwalls for i e Slab and ~rder s ans an form Retainin walls Footin s Inlets and manholes Pile bent ca s Concrete wearing surface on pre-cast Sheaz key concrete for box and box beams, slab beams or double-T slab beams beams Brid e a oach slabs Cast-in- lace concrete slabs s Note: Other structure elements, including pier and bent concrete, maybe paid for as 'Mans quantity" when shown on the plans. -- C. Measured in Place. Items not paid for as "plans quantity" will be measured in place. 420.8. Payment. The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and measured as provided under "Measurement" will be paid far at the unit price bid for the various structure elements .-. specified of the various classes of concrete. Mass placements, as defined in Section 420.4.G.14, "Mass Placements," will be paid for sepazately for the various classes of concrete. This price is full compensation for famishing hauling; and mixing concrete materials; furnishing; bending; fabricating, splicing, welding and placing the required reinforcement; clips, blocks, metal spacers, ties, wire, or other materials used for fastening reinforcement -- in place; placing, finishing curing, and grooving concrete; applying ordinary surface finish; famishing and placing drains, metal flashing strips, and expansion joint material; excavation, subgrade preparation, and ~-- disposal of excavated material for bridge approach slabs; and forms and falsework, equipment, labor, tools, and incidentals. Diaphragm concrete will not be paid for directly but is subsidiary to the slab unless otherwise shown on the plans. 514 420.6 to 420.6 Design and installation of foundations for falsework is at the Contractor's expense. The following procedure will be used to evaluate concrete where 1 or more ~ project acceptance test specimens fail to meet the required design strength specified in Item 421, "Hydraulic Cement Concrete," or in the plans: • The concrete for a given placement will be considered structurally '~' adequate and accepted at full price if the average of all test results for specimens made at the time of placement meets the required design strength provided that no single test result is less than 85% of the required design strength. • The Engineer will perform a structural review of the concrete to determine its adequacy to remain in service if the average of all test results for specimens made at the time of placement is less than the required design strength or if any test results aze less than 85% of the required design strength: If cores aze required to determine the strength ~` of the in-situ concrete, take cores at locations designated by the Engineer in accordance with Tex-424-A. The coring and testing of the cores will be at the Contractor's expense. The Engineer will test the ~-' cores. • If all of the tested cores meet the required design strength, the concrete will be paid for at the full price. • If any of the tested cores do not meet the required design strength but the average strength attained is determined to be structurally adequate, the Engineer will determine the limits of the pay adjustment. The W average strength of the cores tested will be used in the pay adjustment formula. • Remove concrete that is not structurally adequate. • Concrete that has been determined to be structurally adequate may be accepted at an adjusted price based on the following formula: -- fl = O.IOBp + 0.75(Sa/Ss)` Bp where: A =Amount to be paid per unit of measure for the entire placement in question Sa =Actual strength from cylinders or cores. Use values from .~ cores, if taken. Ss =Minimum required strength (specified} Bp =Unit bid price. '"' • The decision to reject structurally inadequate concrete or to apply the pay adjustment will be made no later than 56 days after placement. 515 439.5 to 440.2 F. Concrete Surface Treatment. Apply concrete surface treatment to the overlay in accordance with Item 428, "Concrete Surface Treatment." 439.5. Measurement. The removal of deteriorated or delaminated concrete for slab repair will be measured by the square yard of surface azea, measured in place. -- Concrete overlay, dense concrete overlay, and latex-modified concrete overlay will be measured by the squaze Yazd of surface overlaid using the dimensions shown on the plans. Overlay is a plans quantity measurement item. The quantity to be paid is the quantity shown in the proposal, unless modified by Article 9.2, "Plans Quantity Measurement." Additional measurements or calculations will be made if adjustments of quantities aze '° required. 439.6. Payment. The work performed and materials furnished in •-- accordance with this Item and measured as provided under "Measurement" will be paid for at the unit price bid for "Slab Repair (Type 1)"and "Slab Repair (Type 2)" and for "Concrete Overlay," "Dense Concrete Overlay," ~- and "Latex-Modified Concrete Overlay" of the specified depth. Payment for "Slab Repair (Type 1)" and "Slab Repair (Type 2)" is full compensation for removal of deteriorated or clelaminated concrete below the top of scarified surface, cleaning and restoration of reinforcing steel, and replacement with concrete. ... Payment for "Concrete Overlay," "Dense Concrete Overlay," or "Latex- Modified Concrete Overlay" is full compensation for abrasion blasting of the surface; famishing and placing grout; reinforcing steel; and furnishing, placing, finishing and curing the concrete overlay. Scarifying will be paid for in accordance with Item 483, "Scarifying Concrete Bridge Slab "' These prices are full compensation for materials, tools, equipment, labor, "" and incidentals. ITEM 440 REINFORCING STEEL "-- 440.1. Descripfion. Furnish and place reinforcing steel of the sizes and details shown on the plans. ~-- 440.2. Materials. A. Approved Mills. Before furnishing steel, producing mills of reinforcing steel for the Department must be pre-approved in 643 440.2 to 440.2 .._ accordance with DMS-7320, "Qualification Procedure for Reinforcing Steel Mills," by the Construction Division, which maintains a list of approved producing mills. Reinforcing steel obtained from unapproved -- sources will not be accepted. B. Deformed Bar and Wire Reinforcement. Unless otherwise shown on the plans, reinforcing steel must be Grade 60, and bar reinforcement '° must be deformed. Reinforcing steel must conform to one of the following: • ASTM A 615, Grades 40 or 60; "' • ASTM A 996, Type A, Grades 40 or 60; • ASTM A 996, Type R, Grade 60, permitted in concrete pavement only (Furnish ASTM A 996, Type R bars as straight bars only and do not bend them. Bend tests are not required.); or • ASTM A 706. ._ The provisions of this Item take precedence over ASTM provisions. The nominal size, azea, and weight of reinforcing steel bars covered by this Item are shown in Table 1. Designate smooth bazs up to No. 4 by -"" size number and above No. 4 by diameter in inches. Table 1 Size, Area, and Weight of Reinforcing Steel Bars Bar Size Number in. Bar Size Number mm Diameter (in.) Area (Sq. in.) Weight per Ft. 3 10 0.375 0.11 0.376 4 13 0.500 0,20 0.668 5 16 0.625 0.31 1.043 6 19 0.750 0.44 1.502 7 22 0.875 0.60 2.044 8 25 1.000 0.79 2.670 9 29 1.128 1.00 3.400 10 32 1.270 1.27 4.303 _ ll 36 1.410 1.56 5.313 14 43 1.693 2.25 7.650 18 57 2.257 4.00 13.60 Note: Bar size numbers (in.) aze based on the number of eighths of an inch included in the nominal diameter of the bar. Bar size numbers (mm) approximate the number of millimeters included in the nominal diameter of the bar. C. Smooth Bar and Spiral Reinforcement. Smooth bars and dowels for concrete pavement must have a minimum yield strength of 60 ksi and 644 440.2 to 440.2 ._. meet ASTM A 615. For smooth bazs that aze lazger than No. 3, provide steel conforming to ASTM A 615 or meet the physical requirements of ASTM A 36. Spiral reinforcement may be smooth or deformed bazs or wire of the minimum size or gauge shown on the plans. Bazs for spiral reinforcement must comply with ASTM A 615, Grade 40; ASTM ~"' A 996, Type A, Grade 40; or ASTM A 675, Grade 80, meeting dimensional requirements of ASTM A 615. Smooth wire must comply with ASTM A 82, and deformed wire must comply with ASTM A 49b. ° D. Weldable Reinforcing Steel Reinforcing steel to be welded must comply with ASTM A 706 or have a carbon equivalent (C.E.) of at ,_ most 0.55%. A report of chemical analysis showing the percentages of elements necessary to establish C.E. is required for reinforcing steel that does not meet ASTM A 706 to be structurally welded. These ._, requirements do not pertain to miscellaneous welds on reinforcing steel as defined in Section 448.4.B.l.a, "Miscellaneous Welding Applications." Calculate C.E. using the following formula: %Mn %Cu %N[ %CY %Mo %V C.E. _ %C+++-+---- ° 6 40 20 10 50 10 E. Welded Wire Fabric. For fabric reinforcement, use wire that conforms to ASTM A 82 or A 496. Use wire fabric that conforms to ASTM A 185 or A 497. Observe the relations shown in Table 2 among size number, diameter in inches, and azea when ordering wire by size numbers, unless otherwise specified. Precede the size number for deformed wire with "D" and for smooth wire with "W °' Designate welded wire fabric as shown in the following example: ~-- 6 x 12 - W 16 x W8 (indicating 6-in. longitudinal wire spacing and 12-in. transverse wire spacing with smooth No. 16 wire longitudinally and smooth No. 8 wire transversely). 645 440.2 to 440.2 Table 2 Wire Size Number. Diameter, and Area Size Number in. Size Number mm Diameter (in.) Area (sq. in.) 31 200 0.628 0.310 30 194 0.618 0.300 28 181 0.597 0.280 26 168 0.575 0.260 24 155 0.553 0.240 22 142 0.529 0.220 20 129 0.505 0.200 18 116 0.479 0.180 16 103 0.451 0.160 14 90 0.422 0.140 12 77 0.391 0.120 10 65 0.357 __ 0.100 8 52 0.319 0.080 7 45 0.299 0.070 6 39 0.276 0.060 5.5 35 0.265 0.055 5 32 o:a52 0:050 4.5 29 0.239 0.045 4 26 0.226 0.040 3.5 23 0.211 0.035 2.9 19 0192 0.035 2.5 16 0.178 0.025 2 13 0.160 0.020 1.4 9 0.134 0.014 1.2 8 0.124 0.012 0.5 3 0.080 0.005 Note: Size numbers (in.) are the nominal cross-sectional area of the wire in hundredths of a square inch. Size numbers (mm) are the nominal cross-sectional area of the wire in square millimeters. Fractional sizes between the sizes listed above are also available and acceptable for use. F. Epoxy Coating. Epoxy coating will be required as shown on the plans. Before furnishing epoxy-coated reinforcing steel, an epoxy applicator must be pre-approved in accordance with DMS-7330, "Qualification ISrocedure for Reinforcing Steel Epoxy Coating Applicators." The """ Construction Division maintains a list of approved applicators. Coat reinforcing steel in accordance with Table 3. 646 440.3 to 440.3 Table 3 Epoxy Coating Requirements for Reinforcing Steel Material S ecificafion Baz ASTM A 775 or A 934 Wire or fabric ASTM A 884 Class A or B Mechanical cou lers As shown on the Tans Hardware As shown on the Tans Use epoxy coating material and coating repair material that complies .- with DMS-8130, "Epoxy Powder Coating for Reinforcing Stee] °' Do not patch more than 1/4 in. total length in any foot at the applicator's plant. Epoxy-coated reinforcement will be sampled and tested in accordance with Tex-739-I. ,,_ Maintain identification of all reinforcing throughout the coating and fabrication and until delivery to the project site. Famish 1 copy of a written certification that the coated reinforcing steel meets the requirements of this Item and 1 copy of the manufacturer's control tests. G. Mechanical Couplers. When mechanical splices in reinforcing steel M bazs are shown on the plans, use the following types of coupler: • sleeve-filler, • sleeve-threaded, - sleeve-swaged, or • sleeve-wedge. Famish only couplers that have been produced by a manufacturer that has been prequalified in accordance with DMS-4510, "Mechanical Couplers." Sleeve-wedge type couplers will not be permitted on coated - reinforcing. Couplers for use on individual projects must be sampled and tested in accordance with DMS-4510. Famish couplers only at locations shown on the plans. - 440.3. Construction. A. Bending. Cold-bend the reinforcement accurately to the shapes and °"' dimensions shown on the plans. Fabricate in the shop if possible. Field- fabricate, if permitted, using a method approved by the Engineer. Replace improperly fabricated, damaged, or broken bars at no "' additional expense to the Department. Repair damaged or broken bars embedded in a previous concrete placement using a method approved by the Engineer. 647 _„ 440.3 to 440.3 Unless otherwise shown on the plans, the inside diameter of baz bends, in terms of the nominal baz diameter (d), must be as shown in Table 4. Table 4 Minimum inside Diameter of Bar Bends Bar Size Bar Size Bend Number Number Diameter in, mm Bends of 90° and greater in 4, 5 3 10, 13, 16 4d stirrups, ties, and other , secondary bazs that enclose 6 7 8 19, 22 25 6d anather bar in the bend , , , Bends in main bars and in 3 throw 8 10 throw h 25 6d secondary bars not covered 9, 10, 11 29, 32, 36 8d above 14,18 43,57 _ lOd -- Note: Bar siae uumbers (iu,) are based on the number of eighths of ax+ inch included iu the nominal diameter of the baz. Baz size numbers (mm) approximate the number of millimeters included in the nominal diameter of the baz. Where bending No. 14 or No. 18 Grade 60 bars is required, bend-test representative specimens as described for smaller bars in the applicable ASTM specification. Make the required 90° bend around a pin with a '~ diameter of 10 times the nominal diameter of the baz. B. Tolerances. Fabrication tolerances for bazs are shown in Figure 1. 648 440.3 to 440.3 ±2" From end of bnr to any ~_ +1/2" +1/Z" Spiral or Circular Tie +0, -t/4" if 6" or less +0, -1/2" if over 6" I N r +1 Stirrup or Tie Figure 1 Fabricarion tolerances for bars. C. Storage. Store steel reinforcement above the ground on platforms, skids, or other supports, and protect it from damage and deterioration. Ensure that reinforcement is free from dirt, paint, grease, oil, and other foreign materials when it is placed in the work. Use reinforcement free 649 440.3 to 440.3 from defects such as cracks and delaminations. Rust, surface seams, surface irregularities, or mill scale will not be cause for rejection if the minimum cross-sectional area of a hand wire-brushed specimen meets ,_ the requirements for the size of steel specified. D. Splices. Lap-splice, weld-splice, or mechanically splice bazs as shown on the plans. Additional splices not shown on the plans will require °' approval. Splices not shown on the plans will be permitted in slabs 15 in. or less in thickness, columns, walls, and parapets. • Unless otherwise approved, splices will not be permitted in bars '° 30 ft. or less in plan length. For bars exceeding 30 ft. in plan length, the distance center-to-center of splices must be at least 30 ft. minus 1 splice length, with no more than 1 individual baz '° length less than 10 ft. Make lap splices not shown on the plans, but otherwise permitted, in accordance with Table 5. Maintain the specified concrete cover and spacing at splices, and place the lap- spliced bars in contact, securely tied together. Table 5 '"" Minimum La Re uirements for Bar Sizes throu h No. 11 Bar Size Number in. Bar Size Number mm Uncoated Lap Len h Coated Lap Len h 3 10 1 ft. 4 in. 2 ft. 0 in. 4 13 1 ft. 9 in. 2 ft. 8 in. 3 16 2 ft. 2 iii. 3 ft. 3 iti. 6 19 2 ft. 7 in. 3 ft. 11 in. 7 22 3 ft. 5 in. 5 ft. 2 in. 8 25 4 ft. 6 in. 6 ft. 9 in. 9 29 5 ft. 8 in. 8 ft. 6 in. 10 32 7 ft. 3 in. 10 ft. 11 in. 11 36 8 ft. 11 in. 13 ft. 5 in. Note: Baz size numbers (in.) aze based on the number of eighths of an inch included in the nominal diameter of the baz. Bar size numbers (mm) approximate the number of millimeters included in the nominal diameter of the baz. • Do not lap No. 14 or No. 18 bazs. • Lap spiral steel at least 1 turn. .~ • Splice welded wire fabric using a lap length that includes the overlap of at least 2 cross wires plus 2 in. on each sheet or roll. Splices using bars that develop equivalent strength and are lapped ... in accordance with Table 5 are permitted. 650 dd0.3 to ddU.3 ,,, • For box culvert extensions with less than 1 ft. of fill, lap the existing longitudinal bars with the new bars as shown in Table 3. For extensions with more than 1 ft. of fill, lap at least 1 ft. 0 in. ,., • Ensure that welded splices conform to the requirements of the plans and of Item 448, "Structural Field Welding." Field-prepare ends of reinforcing bars if they will be butt-welded. Delivered bazs _. must be long enough to permit weld preparation. • Install mechanical coupling devices in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations at locations shown on the plans. ,.. Protect threaded male or female connections, and make sure the threaded connections are clean when making the connection. Do not repair damaged threads. .» • Mechanical coupler alternate equivalent strength arrangements, to be accomplished by substituting lazger baz sizes or more bars, will be considered if approved in writing before fabrication of the systems. E. Placing. Unless otherwise shown on the plans, dimensions shown for reinforcement are to the centers of the bars. Place reinforcement as neaz "` as possible to the position shown on the plans. In the plane of the steel parallel to the nearest surface of concrete, bars must not vary from plan placement by more than 1/12 of the spacing between bazs: In the plane of the steel perpendicular to the nearest surface of concrete, bars must not vary from plan placement by more than 1/4 in. Cover of concrete to the nearest surface of steel must be at least 1 in. unless otherwise .. shown on the plans. For bridge slabs, the clear cover tolerance for the top mat of .._ reinforcement is -0, +1/2 in. Locate the reinforcement accurately in the forms, and hold it firmly in place before and during concrete placement by means of bar supports °"' that are adequate in strength and number to prevent displacement and to keep the steel at the proper distance from the forms. Support bars by standazd bar supports with plastic tips, approved plastic bar supports, or °"' precast mortar or concrete blocks when supports are in contact with removable or stay-in-place forms. Use bright basic bar supports to support reinforcing steel placed in slab overlays on concrete panels or "'" on existing concrete slabs. Bar supports in contact with soil or subgrade must be approved. ,_ For bar supports with plastic tips, the plastic protection must be at least 3/32 in. thick and extend upward on the wire to a point at least 1/2 in. above the formwork. 651 440.3 to 440.3 All accessories such as tie wires, baz chairs, supports, or clips used with epoxy-coated reinforcement must be of steel, fully coated with epoxy or plastic. Plastic supports approved by the Engineer may also be used ,_ with epoxy-coated reinforcement. Cast mortar or concrete blocks to uniform dimensions with adequate bearing azea. Provide a suitable tie wire in each block for anchoring to ~° the steel. Cast the blocks to the thickness required in approved molds. The surface placed adjacent to the form must be a true plane, free of surface imperfections. Cure the blocks by covering them with wet burlap or mats for a period of 72 hr. Mortaz for blocks should contain approximately 1 part hydraulic cement to 3 parts sand. Concrete for blocks should contain 8501b. of hydraulic cement per cubic yazd of "` concrete. Place individual bar supports in rows at 4-ft. maximum spacing in each direction. Place continuous type baz supports at 4-ft. maximum spacing. Use continuous baz supports with permanent metal deck forms. The exposure of the ends of longitudinals, stirrups, and spacers used to -- position the reinforcement in concrete pipe and in precast box culverts or storm drains is not cause for rejection. Tie reinforcing steel for bridge slabs, top slabs of direct traffic culverts, and top slabs of prestressed box beams at all intersections, except tie only alternate intersections where spacing is less than 1 ft. in each direction. For reinforcing steel cages for other structural members, tie "~ the steel at enough intersections to provide a rigid cage of steel. Fasten mats of wire fabric securely at the ends and edges. Before concrete placement, clean mortaz, mud, dirt, debris, oil, and other foreign material from the reinforcement. Do not place concrete until authorized. - If reinforcement is not adequately supported or tied to resist settlement, reinforcement is floating upwazd, truss bars aze overturning, or movement is detected in any direction during concrete placement, stop °" placement until corrective measures are taken. F. Handling, Placement, and Repair ofEpoxy-Coated Reinforcing „_ Steel. 1. Handling. Provide systems for handling coated reinforcement with padded contact areas. Pad bundling bands or use suitable banding ~- to prevent damage to the coating. Lift bundles of coated reinforcement with a sttongback, spreader baz, multiple supports, or a platform bridge. Transport the bundled reinforcement 652 440.4 to 441.1 „~ carefully, and store it on protective cribbing. Do not drop or drag the coated reinforcement. 2. Construction Methods. Do not flame-cut coated reinforcement. •°° Saw or shear-cut only when approved. Coat cut ends as specified in Section 440.3.F.3, "Repair of Coating." Do not weld or mechanically couple coated reinforcing steel except where specifically shown on the plans. Remove the epoxy coating at least 6 in. beyond the weld limits before welding and 2 in. beyond the limits of the coupler before assembly. After welding or coupling, clean the steel of oil, grease, moisture, dirt, welding contamination (slag or acid residue), and rust to a near- white finish. Check the existing epoxy for damage. Remove any damaged or loose epoxy back to sound epoxy coating. After cleaning, coat the splice area with epoxy repair material to a thickness of 7 to 17 mils after curing. Apply a second application of repair material to the bar and coupler interface to ensure complete sealing of the joint. 3. Repair of Coating. For repair of the coating, use material that complies with the requirements of this Item and ASTM D 3963. Make repairs in accordance with procedures recommended by the `~ manufacturer of the epoxy coating powder. For areas to be patched, apply at least the same coating thickness as required for the original coating. Repair all visible damage to the coating. Repair sawed and sheazed ends, cuts, breaks, and other damage promptly before additional oxidation occurs. Clean areas to be ._ repaired to ensure that they aze free from surface contaminants. Make repairs in the shop or in the field as required. _ 440.4. Measurement and Payment. The work performed, materials furnished, equipment, labor, tools, and incidentals will not be measured or paid for directly but will be considered subsidiary to pertinent Items. ITEM 441 -_ STEEL STRUCTURES 441.1. Description. Fabricate and erect structural steel and other metals ._, used for steel structures or for steel portions of structures. 653 461.5 to 462.2 ,_ Quantity Measurement" Additional measurements or calculations will be made if adjustments of quantities are required. 461.5. Payment. The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and measured as provided under "Measurement" will be paid for at the price bid for "Structural Plate Pipes," "Structural .,_ Plate Pipe Arches," "Structural Plate Underpasses," and "Structural Plate Box Culverts" of the size, gauge or minimum thickness, and material specified. This price is full compensation for furnishing, transporting, and _. erecting the structural plate structures; belts, nuts, washers, anchor bolts, and anchor channels or angles; aluminum alloy inverts, toe walls, footings, closure plates, and stiffeners; and equipment, labor, tools, and incidentals. °" Inverts, toe walls, footings, closure plates, elbows, skewed sections, and stiffeners will not be paid for directly but aze subsidiary to this Item. Protection methods for excavations greater than 5 ft. in depth will be measured and paid for as required under Item 402, "french Excavation Protection," or Item 403, "Temporary Special Shoring." Excavation, shaping, bedding, and bacl~ill will be paid for in accordance with Item 400, "Excavation and Backfill for Structures" -" ITEM 462 CONCRETE BOX CULVERTS AND STORM DRAINS 462.1. Description. Fumish, construct, and install concrete box culverts and storm drains. _. 462.2. Materials. A. General. Furnish materials in accordance with the following: .,. • Item 420, "Concrete Structures" • Item 421, "Hydraulic Cement Concrete" • Item 440, "Reinforcing Steel" .-. • Item 464, "Reinforced Concrete Pipe." Provide cast-in-place or precast, formed or machine-made, box culverts and storm drains. For culverts with overlay or a 1- to 2-course surface "" treatment or if the top slab is the fmal riding surface, use Class S concrete for top slabs ofcast-in-place concrete culverts unless otherwise shown on the plans. Use Class C concrete for the rest of the culvert and for all other cast-in-place boxes. Culverts with fill do not require Class S concrete. 765 .W 462.2 to 462.2 Furnish concrete for machine-made precast boxes in accordance with ASTM C 1433. When sulfate-resistant concrete is required, do not use Class C fly ash. B. Fabrication. 1. Cast-in-Place. Meet Item 420, "Concrete Structures." "" 2. Formed Precast. Meet Item 424, "Precast Concrete Structures (Fabrication)." .._ 3. Machine-Made Precast. Furnish machine-made precast boxes in accordance with ASTM C 1433. Ensure that concrete is placed uniformly in the forms. Compact by mechanical devices to ensure ._ dense concrete. Mix concrete in a central batch plant or other approved batching facility from which the quality and uniformity of the concrete can be ensured. Do not use transit-mixed concrete. "' C. Tesfing. 1. Cast-in-Place. Provide test specimens that meet Item 421, "Hydraulic Cement Concrete." 2. Formed Precast. Produce test specimens in accordance with Tex-704-I. 3. Machine-Made Precast. Make test specimens in test cylinders at the same time and in the same manner as the box sections they represent. Make a minimum of 4 test cylinders for each day's ""' production run and each mix design. Cure test cylinders in the same manner and for the same times as the boxes they represent. Test the specimens in accordance with Tex-704-I. 4. Testing Equipment. The producer must famish all equipment required for testing concrete for boxes produced in a precasting ,_ plant. D. Liffing Holes. For precast boxes, provide no more than 4 lifting holes in each section. Lifting holes maybe cast, cut into fresh concrete after form removal, or drilled. Provide lifting holes of sufficient size for adequate lifting devices based on the size and weight of the box section. Do not use lifting holes lazger than 3 in. in diameter. Do not cut more than 1 longitudinal wire or 2 circumferential wires per layer of reinforcing steel when locating lift holes. Repair spalled areas around lifting holes. E. Marking. Mazk precast boxes with the following: • name or trademazk of the producer; • date of manufacture; 766 462.2 to 462.2 -- • box size; • minimum and maximum fill heights; and • match mazks for proper installation, when required, under -~- Section 462.2.F, "Tolerances." For boxes without lifting holes, mazk 1 end of each box section on the inside and outside walls to indicate the top or bottom as it will be "~ installed. Indent mazkings into the box section or paint them on each box with .._ waterproof paint. F. Tolerances. Ensure that precast sections of either type meet the following requirements: "- • The inside vertical and horizontal dimensions do not vary from plan requirements by more than 112 in. or 1%, whichever is greater. ~' • The horizontal or vertical plane at each end of the box section does not vary from perpendiculaz by more than 1/2 in. or 1%, whichever is greater, measured on the inside faces of the section. "° • The sides of a section at each end do not vary from being perpendiculaz to the top and bottom by more than 1 /2 in. or 1 %, whichever is greater, when measured diagonally between opposite "" interior corners. Ensure that wall and slab thicknesses aze not less than shown on the plans except for occasional deficiencies not greater than 1/4 in. or 5%, whichever is greater. If proper jointing is not affected, thicknesses in excess bf plan re~uireitierits are acceptable. Deviations from the above tolerances will be acceptable if the sections can be fitted at the plant or job site and the joint opening at any point does not exceed 1 in. Use match marks for proper installation on sections that have been accepted in this manner. G. Defects and Repair. Fine cracks on the surface of the member that do not extend to the plane of the neazest reinforcement aze acceptable unless the cracks are numerous and extensive. Repair cracks that extend into the plane of the reinforcing steel in an approved manner. Excessive damage, honeycomb, or cracking will be subject to structural review. The Engineer may accept boxes with repairs that are sound, properly finished, and cured in conformance with pertinent specifications. When fine cracks on the surface indicate poor curing practices, discontinue further production of precast sections until corrections are made and proper curing is provided. 767 -~- 462.3 to 462.3 H. Storage and Shipment. Store precast sections on a level surface. Do not place any load on the sections until design strength is reached and curing is complete. Shipment of sections is permissible when the ~- design strength and curing requirements have been met. 462.3. Construcfion. "' A. Excavation, Shaping, Bedding, and Backfill. Excavate, shape, bed, and bacl~'ill in accordance with Item 400, "Excavation and Backfill for Structures," except where jacking, boring, or tunneling methods aze `~ shown on the plans or are permitted. Jack, bore, or tunnel in accordance with Item 476, "Jacking, Boring, or Tunneling Pipe or Box." For all box structures where joints consist of materials other than mortar, immediate backfilling is peruritted. Take precautions in placing and compacting the backfill to avoid any movement of the boxes or damage to the joints. Remove and replace boxes damaged by the Contractor at no expense to the Department. B. Placement of Boxes. When precast boxes aze used to form multiple ... barrel structures, place the box sections in conformance with the plans or as directed. Place material to be used between barrels as shown on the plait's or as directed. Unless 6theiivise aiithbrized, start the laying of ~- boxes on the bedding at the outlet end and proceed toward the inlet end with the abutting sections properly matched. Fit, match, and lay the boxes to fornr a smooth, uniform conduit true to the established lines ~- and grades. For trench installations, lower the box sections into the trench without damaging the box or disturbing the bedding and the sides of the trench. Cazefully clean the ends of the box before it is placed. Prevent the earth or bedding material from entering the box as it is laid: Remove and re-]ay, without extra compensation, boxes that aze not in alignment or that show excessive settlement after laying. Form --- and place cast-in-place boxes in accordance with Item 420, "Concrete Structures." C. Jointing. Unless otherwise shown on the plans, use any of the jointing J' materials in accordance with the jointing requirements specified in Item 464, "Reinforced Concrete Pipe" ._. D. Connections and Stub Ends. Make connections of boxes to existing boxes, pipes, storm drains, or storm drain appurtenances as shown on the plans. Mortar or concrete the bottom of existing structures if -- necessary to eliminate any drainage packets created by the connections. Connect boxes to any required headwalls, wingwalls, safety end treatments or riprap, or other structures as shown on the plans or as 768 462.4 to 462.5 -- directed. Repair any damage to the existing structure resulting from making the connections. Finish stub ends for connections to future work not shown on the plans by installing watertight plugs into the free •- end of the box. For precast boxes, fill lifting holes with mortar or concrete and cure. Precast concrete or mortaz plugs may be used. 462.4. Measurement. This Item will be measured by the foot. Measurement will be made between the ends of the culvert or storm drain """ along the flow line, not including safety end treatments. Safety end treatments will be measured in accordance with Item 467, "Safety End Treatment." Measurement of spurs, branches, or new connection box section will be made from the intersection of the flow line with the outside surface of the structure into which it connects. Where inlets, headwalls, wingwalls, catch basins, manholes, junction chambers, or other structures are included in lines of culverts or storm drains, the length of box section tying into the structure wall will be included for measurement, but no other portion of the structure length or width will be included. The measured length of multiple barrel structures will be the sum of the lengths of the Bartels. "" This is a plans quantity measurement Item. The quantity to be paid is the quantity shown in the proposal unless modif ed by Article 9.2, "Plans Quantity Measurement." Additional measurements or calculations will be °' made if adjustments of quantities aze required. 462.5. Payment. The work performed and materials famished in °- accordance with this Item and measured as provided under "Measurement" will be paid for at the unit price bid for "Concrete Box Culvert" of the size specified. This price is full compensation for constructing, famishing, and "` transporting sections; preparation and shaping of the bed; backfill material between box sections; jointing of sections; jointing material; cutting of sections on skew or slope; connections to new or existing structures; "' breaking back, removing and disposing of portions of the existing structure and replacing portions of the existing structure as required to make connections; concrete and reinforcing steel; and equipment, labor, materials, "" tools, and incidentals. Protection methods for excavations greater than 5 ft. deep will be measured and paid for as required under Item 402, "Trench Excavation Protection," or Item 403, "Temporary Special Shoring." Excavation, shaping, bedding, and backfill will be paid for in accordance with Item 400, "Excavation and _ Backfill for Structures" When jacking, boring, or tunneling is used at the 769 464.1 to 464.3 •-- Contractor's option, payment will be made under this Item. When jacking, boring, or tunneling is required, payment will be made under Item 476, "Jacking, Boring, or Tunneling Pipe or Box." ITEM 464 REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE 464.1. Description. Furnish and install reinforced concrete pipe, materials -- for precast concrete pipe culverts, or precast concrete storm drain mains, laterals, stubs, and inlet leads. 464.2. Materials. A. Fabricafion. Provide precast reinforced concrete pipe that conforms to the design shown on the plans and to the following: i • ASTM C 76 or ASTM C 655 unless otherwise shown on the plans for circular pipe, or • ASTM C 506 for arch pipe, or • ASTM C 507 far horizontal elliptical pipe. Provide precast concrete pipe that ismachine-made or cast by a process ,_ that will provide for uniform placement of the concrete in the form and compaction by mechanical devices that will assure a dense concrete. Mix concrete in a central batch plant or other approved batching facility where the quality and uniformity of the concrete is assured. Do not use transit-mixed concrete for precast concrete pipe. Wheel sull`ate-resistant concrete is required, do not use Class C fly ash. -- Do not place more than 2 holes for lifting and placing in the top section of precast pipe. Cast, cut, or drill the lifting holes in the wall of the pipe. The maximum hole diameter is 3 in. at the inside surface of the ° pipe wall and 4 in. at the outside surface. Do not cut more than 1 longitudinal wire or 2 circumferential wires per layer of reinforcing steel when locating lift holes. B. Design. 1. General. The class and D-load equivalents are shown in Table 1. .- Furnish arch pipe in accordance with ASTM C 506 and the dimensions shown in Table 2. Furnish horizontal elliptical pipe in accordance with ASTM C 507 and the dimensions shown in -- Table 3. For arch pipe and horizontal elliptical pipe the minimum height of cover required is 1 ft. 770 466.1 to 466.3 -_ A. Complete Manholes. Payment for complete manholes will be made at the unit price bid for "Manhole (Complete)" of the type specified. B. Complete Inlets. Payment for inlets will be made at the unit price bid """ for "Inlet (Complete)," of the type specified. C. Inlet Extensions. Payment for inlet extensions will be made at the unit ,_ price bid for "Inlet Extension" of the type specified. D. Manholes Stage I. Payment for Manholes, Stage I, will be made at the unit price bid for each "Manhole (Stage I)" of the type specified. - E. Manholes Stage II. Payment for Manholes, Stage II, will be made at the unit price bid for each "Manhole (Stage II)" of the type specified. ._ F. Inlets Stage I. Payment for Inlets, Stage I, will be made at the unit price bid for each "Inlet (Stage I)" of the type specified. G. Inlets Stage II. Payment for Inlets, Stage II, will be made at the unit "' price bid for each "Inlet (Stage II)" of the type specified. These price are full compensation for concrete, reinforcing steel, brick, - mortaz, aluminum and castings, frames, grates, rings and covers, excavation, and backfill and for all other materials, tools, equipment, labor, and incidentals. ITEM 466 HEADWALLS AND WINGWALLS 466.1. Description. Furnish, construct, and install concrete headwalls and - wingwalls for drainage strnctures and underpasses. 466.2. Materials. A. General. Furnish materials in accordance with the following: • Item 420, "Concrete Structures'' • Item 421, "Hydraulic Cement Concrete" .~ • Item 440, "Reinforcing Steel." Unless otherwise shown on the plans, use Class C concrete for cast-in- place and precast concrete units. Furnish cast-in-place or precast "' headwalls and wingwalls unless otherwise shown on the plans. B. Fabrication. - 1. General. Fabricate cast-in-place concrete units and precast units in accordance with Item 420, "Concrete Structures." For headwalls and wingwalls use the following definitions: 782 466.3 to 466.3 ~.- • "Headwalls" refers to all walls, including wings, at the ends of single-barrel and multiple-barrel pipe culvert structures. • "Wingwalls" refers to all walls at the ends of single-barrel or -- multiple-bazrel box culvert structures. 2. Lifting Holes. For precast units, provide no more than 4 lifting holes in each section. Lifting holes may be cast, cut into fresh "- concrete after form removal, or drilled. Provide lifting holes lazge enough for adequate lifting devices based on the size and weight of the section. The maximum hole diameter is 3 in. at the inside surface of the wall and 4 in. at the outside surface. Do not cut more than 1 longitudinal wire or 2 circumferential wires per layer of reinforcing steel when locating lift holes. Repair spalled azeas y azound lifting holes. 3. Marking. Before shipment from the casting or fabrication yard, a- clearly mazk the following on each precast unit: • the date of manufacture, • the tiame or trademark of the manufacturer, and -- • the type and size designation. 4. Storage and Shipment. Store precast units on a level surface. Do not place any loads on precast concrete units until design strength "' is reached. Do not ship units until design strength requirements have been met. ,,- 5. Causes for Rejection. Precast units may be rejected for not meeting any one of the specification requirements. Individual units may also be rejected for fractures or cracks passing through the ._ wall or surface defects indicating honeycombed or open texture surFaces. Remove rejected units from the project, and replace them with acceptable units meeting the requirements of this Item. •° 6. Defects and Repairs. Occasional imperfections in manufacture or accidental damage sustained during handling may be repaired. The repaired units will be acceptable if they conform to the "" requirements of this Item and the repairs aze sound, properly finished, and cured in conformance with pertinent specifications. °- 466.3. Construction. A. General. Remove portions of existing structures in accordance with Item 4303, "Construction." Drill, dowel, and grout in accordance with Item 420, "Concrete Structures." 783 __ d66.4 to 466.5 ... B. Excavation, Shaping, Bedding, and Baclrfill. Excavate, shape, bed, and bacl~ll in accordance with Item 400, "Excavation and Backfill for Structures." Take special precautions in placing and compacting the backfill to avoid any movement or damage to the units. Bed precast units on foundations of firm and stable material accurately shaped to conform to the bases of the units. C. Placement of Precast Units. Provide adequate means to lift and place the precast units. Fill lifting holes with mortaz or concrete and cure. Precast concrete or mortaz plugs may be used. ... D. Connections. Make connections to new or existing stmctures in accordance with the details shown on the plans. Furnish jointing .. material in accordance with Item 464, "Reinforced Concrete Pipe," or as shown on the plans. When removing existing headwalls, also remove a length of the existing pipe from the headwall to the joint as shown on the plans or as approved. Re-lay the removed pipe if approved, or famish and lay a length of new pipe. 466.4. Measurement. This is a plans quantity measurement item. The quantity to be paid is the quantity shown in the proposal unless modified by °- Article 9.2, "Plans Quantity Measurement." Additional measurements or calculations will be made if adjustments of quantities are required. A. Headwalls. Headwalls will be measured by each end of a structure. B. Wingwalls. Wingwalls will be measured by one of the following methods: °" 1. Square Foot. Wingwalls will be measured by the squaze foot of the front surface area of the wall o£ each type. Unless otherwise shown on the plans, the area will be measured from the top of the footing or apron to the top of the wall. If there is no footing or apron, then measurement is from the bottom of the wall. ,_ 2. Each. Wingwalls will be measured by each end of a struchure. 466.3. Payment. The work performed and materials furnished in w accordance with this Item and measured as provided under "Measurement" will be paid far at the price bid for "Headwalls" of the type and pipe size (diameter or design) specified, "Wingwalls" of the type specified when ,_ measurement is by the square foot, or "Wingwalls" of the type and wall height specified when measurement is by each. For payment purposes, the wingwall height will be rounded to the nearest foot. This price is full compensation for constructing, famishing, transporting, and installing the 784 466.5 to 467.2 headwalls or wingwahs; connecting to existing structure; breaking back, removing and disposing of portions of the existing structure, and replacing portions of the existing structure as required to make connections; excavation and backfill; and concrete, reinforcing steel, corrugated metal pipe or reinforced concrete pipe, equipment, labor, tools, and incidentals. Apron concrete or riprap between or azound the wingwalls of single- or "` multiple-barrel box culvert structures will be measured and paid for in accordance with Item 432, "Riprap." r The removal and re-laying of existing pipe or the furnishing of new pipe to replace existing pipe will not be paid for directly but will be considered subsidiary to this Item. ITEM 467 SAFETY END TREATMENT 467.1. Description. Furnish, construct, and install safety end treatments for drainage structures. 467.2. Materials. ._ A. General. Furnish materials in accordance with the following: • Item 420, "Concrete Structures" • Item 421, "Hydraulic Cement Concrete" .... • Item 432, "Riprap" • Item 440, "Reinforcing Steel" • Item 442, "Metal for Structures" ._ • Item 445, "Galvanizing" • Item 460, "Corrugated Metal Pipe" • Item 464, "Reinforced Concrete Pipe." "`" Unless otherwise shown on the plans, use Class C concrete for cast-in- place and precast concrete units. Furnish cast-in-place or precast safety end treatments unless otherwise shown on the plans. Furnish Class B "~` concrete for concrete riprap unless otherwise shown on the plans. Provide gaivatu~ed steel for prefabricated metal end sections in accordance with Item 460, "Corrugated Metal Pipe" Furnish pipe runners in accordance with the following: • ASTM A 53, Type E or S, Grade B; • ASTM A 500, Grade B; or • API SL, Grade X42. 785 504.3 to 506.2 M- 5. Type E Structure. Provide building as shown on plans. 504.3. Measurement and Payment. The work performed, materials ... famished, utilities and utility service (including phone when required), appurtenances (including computers, office equipment and Internet service), testing equipment, labor, tools, and incidentals will not be measured or paid for directly but will be subsidiary to pertinent Items. ITEM 506 TEMPORARY EROSION, SEDIMENTATION, AND ENVIRONMENTAL CdNTROL$ 506.1. Description. Install, maintain, and remove erosion, sedimentation, and environmental control devices. Remove accumulated sediment and debris. 506.2. Materials. '- A. Rock Filter Dams. 1. Aggregate. Furnish aggregate with hazdness, durability, cleanliness, and resistance to crumbling, flaking, and eroding acceptable to the Engineer. Provide the following: • Types 1, 2, and 4 hock Filter Dams. Use 3 to b in. aggregate. • Type 3 Rock Fitter Dams. Use 4 to 8 in. aggregate. 2. Wire. Provide minimum 20 gauge galvanized wire for the steel Fl- wire mesh and tie wires for Types 2 and 3 rock filter dams. Type 4 dams require: • adouble-twisted, hexagonal weave with a nominal mesh opening of 2-1/2 in. x 3-1/4 in.; • minimum 0.0866 in. steel wire for netting; • minimum 0.1063 in. steel wire for selvages and corners; and -- minimum 0.0866 in. for binding or tie wire. 3. Sandbag Material. Furnish sandbags meeting Section 506.2.I, "Sandbags," except that any gradation of aggregate maybe used to fill the sandbags. B. Temporary Pipe Slope Drains. Provide corrugated metal pipe, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipe, flexible tubing, watertight connection bands, grommet materials, prefabricated fittings, and flared entrance 820 ,_ 506.3 to 506.2 -- sections that conform to the plans. Recycled and other materials meeting these requirements aze allowed if approved. Furnish concrete in accordance with Item 432, "Riprap" ~~ C. Baled Hay. Provide hay bales weighing at least SO lb., composed entirely of vegetable matter, measuring 30 in. or longer, and bound with wire, nylon, or polypropylene string. D. Temporary Paved Flumes. Furnish asphalt concrete, hydraulic cement concrete, or other comparable non-erodible material that conforms to °-- the plans. Provide rock or rubble with a minimum diameter of 6 in. and a maximum volume of 1/2 cu. ft. for the construction of energy dissipaters. ,_ E. Construction Exits. Provide materials that meet the details shown on the plans and this Section. .-. I. Rock Construction Exit. Provide crushed aggregate for long and short-teen construction exits. Furnish aggregates that aze clean, hard, durable, and free from adherent coatings such as salt, alkali, dirt, clay, loam, shale, soft, or flaky materials and organic and injurious matter. Use 4- to 8-in. aggregate for Type I and 2- to 4- in. aggregate for Type 3. ~'"' 2. Timber Construction Exit. Furnish No. 2 quality or better railroad ties and timbers for long-term construction exits, free of large and loose knots and treated to control rot. Fasten timbers with ® nuts and bolts or lag bolts, of at least 1/2 in. diameter, unless otherwise shown on the plans or allowed. For short-term exits, provide plywood or pressed wafer board at least 1 /2 in. thick. 3. Foundation Course. Provide a foundation course consisting of flexible base, bituminous concrete, hydraulic cement concrete, or other materials as shown on the plans or directed. F. Embankment for Erosion Control. Provide rock, loam, clay, topsoil, or other earth materials that will form a stable embankment to meet the '- intended use. G. Pipe. Provide pipe outlet material in accordance with Item 556, "Pipe Underdrains," and details shown on the plans. H. Construction Perimeter Fence. 1. Posts. Provide essentially straight wood or steel posts that are at "' least 60 in. long. Furnish soft wood posts with a minimum diameter of 3 in. or use 2 x 4 boards. Furnish hardwood posts with 821 506.2 to 506.2 -- a minimum cross-section of 1-1/2 x 1-1/5 in. Furnish T- or L-shaped steel posts with a minimum weight of 1.31b, per foot. 2. Fence. Provide orange construction fencing as approved by the - Engineer. 3. Fence Wire. Provide 12-1/2 gauge or larger galvanized smooth or ... twisted wire. Providel6 gauge or larger tie wire. 4. Flagging. Provide brightly-colored flagging that isfade-resistant and at least 3/4 in. wide to provide maximum visibility both day "° and night. 5. Staples. Provide staples with a crown at least 1/2 in. wide and legs ,_ at least 1!2 in. long. 6. Used Materials. Previously used materials meeting the applicable requirements may be used if accepted by the Engineer. "- I. Sandbags. Provide sandbag material of polypropylene, polyethylene, or polyamide woven fabric with a minimum unit weight of 4 oz. per squaze yazd, a Mullen burst-strength exceeding 300 psi, and an ultraviolet stability exceeding 70%. Use natural coarse sand or manufactured sand meeting the gradation ...,. given in Table 1 to fill sandbags. Filled sandbags must be 24 to 30 in. long, 16 to 18 in. wide, and 6 to 8 in. thick. Table 1 Sand Gradation Sieve # Maximum Retained % b Wei ht 4 3"/° 100 80% 200 JS% J. Temporary Sediment Control Fence. Provide a ttet-reinforced fence using woven geo-textile fabric. Logos visible to the traveling public ... will not be allowed. 1. Fabric. Provide fabric materials in accordance with DMS-6230, "Temporary Sediment Control Fence Fabric" 2. Posts. Provide essentially straight wood or steel posts with a minimum length of 48 in., unless otherwise shown on the plans. Soft wood posts must be at least 3 in. in diameter or nominal 2 x 4 in. Hazdwood posts must have a minimum cross-section of 1-112 x 1-1/2 in. T- or L-shaped steel posts must have a minimum ,,., weight of 1.3 ib. per foot. 822 506.3 to 506.4 3. Net Reinforcement. Provide net reinforcement of at least 12-1/2 gauge galvanized welded wire mesh, with a maximum opening size of 2 x 4 in., at least 24 in. wide, unless otherwise shown on the plans. 4. Staples. Provide staples with a crown at least 3/4 in, wide and legs 1/2 in. long. 5. Used Materials. Use recycled material meeting the applicable requirements if accepted by the Engineer. 506.3. Equipment. Provide a backhoe, front end loader, blade, scraper, bulldozer, or other equipment as required when "Earthwork for Erosion e. Control" is specified on the plans as a bid item. 506.4. Construction. A. Contractor Responsibilities. Implement the Department's Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWP3) for the project site in accordance with the specific or general storm water permit •- requirements. Develop and implement an SWP3 for project-specific material supply plants within and outside of the Department's right of way in accordance with the specific or general storm water pemut requirements. Prevent water pollution from storm water associated with construction activity from entering any surface water ar private property on or adjacent to the project site. B. General. 1. Phasing. Implement control measures in the azea to be disturbed before beginning construction, or as directed. Limit the disturbance to the area shown on the plans or as directed. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, the Contractor cannot control soil erosion and sedimentation resulting from construction operations, the Engineer will limit the disturbed area to that which the Contractor is able to control. Minimize disturbance to vegetation. 2. Maintenance. Immediately correct ineffective control measures. Implement additional controls as directed. Remove excavated material within the time requirements specified in the applicable storm water permit. 3. Stabilization. Stabilize disturbed azeas where construction ,_ activities will be temporarily stopped in accordance with the applicable storm water permit. Establish a uniform vegetative cover. The project will not be accepted until a 70% density of .., existing adjacent undisturbed areas is obtained, unless otherwise 823 506.4 to 506.4 m shown on the plans. When shown on the plans, the Engineer may accept the project when adequate controls are in place that will control erosion, sedimentation, and water pollution until sufficient _.. vegetative cover can be established. 4. Finished Work. Upon acceptance of vegetative cover, remove and dispose of all temporary control measures, temporary "'- embanlanents, bridges, matting, falsework, piling, debris, or other obstructions placed during construction that aze not a part of the finished work, or as directed. 5. Restricted Activities. Do not locate disposal aeeas, stockpiles, or haul roads in any wetland, water body, or streambed. ~- Do not install temporary construction crossings in or across any water body without the prior approval of the appropriate resource agency and the Engineer. Restrict construction operations in any •- water body to the necessary areas as shown on the plans or applicable permit, or as duetted. Use temporary bridges, timber mats, or other structurally sound and non-eroding material For ~- stream crossings. Provide protected storage azea for paints, chemicals, solvents, and fertilizers at an approved location. Keep paints, chemicals, solvents, and fertilizers off bare ground and provide shelter for stored chemicals. .... C Installation, Maintenance, and Removal Work. Perform work in accordance with the specific or general storm water permit. Install and maintain the integrity of temporary erosion and sedimentation control ~--~ devices to accumulate silt and debris until earthwork construction and permanent erosion control features are in place or the disturbed area has been adequately stabilized as determined by the Engineer. If a device -- ceases to function as intended, repait or replace the device or portions thereof as necessary. Remove sediment, debris, and litter. When approved, sediments may be dispased of within embankments, or in the -- right of way in areas where the material will not contribute to further siltation. Dispose of removed material in accordance with federal, state, and local regiilations. Remove devices upon approval or when directed. Upon removal, finish-grade and dress the azea. Stabilize disturbed aeeas in accordance y with the permit, and as shown on the plans or directed. The Contractor retains ownership of stockpiled material and must remove it from the project when new installations or replacements are no longer required. 824 506.4 to 5U6.4 1. Rock Filter Dams for Erosion Control Remove trees, brush, stumps, and other objectionable material that may interfere with the construction of rock filter dams. Place sandbags as a foundation when required or at the Contractor's option. For Types 1, 2, 3, and 5, place the aggregate to the lines, height, and slopes specified, without undue voids. For Types 2 and 3, place the aggregate on the mesh and then fold the mesh at the upstream side over the aggregate and secure it to itself on the downstream side with wire ties, or hog rings, or as directed. Place rock filter dams perpendiculaz to the flow of the stream or channel unless otherwise duected. Construct filter dams according to the _ following criteria, unless otherwise shown on the plans: a. Type 1 (Non-reinforced). (1) Height. At least 18 in. measwed vertically from existing "' ground to top of filter dam. (2) Top Width. At least 2 ft. --- (3) Slopes. At most 2:1. b. Type 2 (Reinforced}. „_ (1) Height. At least 18 in. measwed vertically from existing ground to top of filter dam. (2) Top Width. At least 2 ft. (3) Slopes. At most 2:1. c. Type 3 (Reinforced). -- (1) Height. At least 36 in. measwed vertically from existing ground to top of filter dam. (2) Top Width. At least 2 ft. (3) Slopes. At most 2:1. d. Type 4 (Sack Gabions). Unfold sack gabions and smooth out kinks and bends. For vertical filling, connect the sides by lacing in a single loop-double loop pattern an 4- to 5-in. spacing. At one end, pull the end lacing rod unfil tight, wrap azound the end, and twist 4 times. At the filling end, fill with stone, pull the rod tight, cut the wire with approximately 6 in. remaining, and twist wires 4 times. For horizontal filling, place sack flat in a filling trough, fill with stone, and connect sides and secure ends as described above. 825 .. 506.4 to Sb6.4 Lift and place without damaging the gabion. Shape sack gabions to existing contows. e. Type 5. Provide rock filter dams as shown on the plans. 2. Temporary Pipe Slope Drains. Install pipe with a slope as shown on the plans or as directed. Construct embankment for the drainage ,,_ system in 8-in. lifts to the required elevations. Hand-tamp the soil around and under the entrance section to the top of the embankment as shown on the plans or as directed. Form the top of the embarilonent or earth dike over the pipe slope drain at least 1 ft. higher than the top of the inlet pipe at all points. Secure the pipe with hold-downs or hold-down grommets spaced a maximum of ._ 10 ft. on center. Construct the energy dissipators or sediment traps as shown on the plans ar as directed. Construct the sediment trap using concrete or rubble riprap in accordance with Item 432, .-- "Riprap," when designated on the plans. 3. Baled Hay for Erosion and Sedimentation Control Install hay bales at locations shown on the plans by embedding in the soil at "' least 4 in. and, where possible, approximately 1/2 the height of the bale, or as directed. Fill gaps between Bales with hay. ,_ 4. Temporary Paved Flumes. Construct paved flumes as shown on the plans or as directed. Provide excavation and embanlanent (including compaction of the subgrade) of material to the ,., dimensions shown on the plans, unless otherwise indicated. Install a rock or rubble riprap energy dissipater, constructed from the materials specified above to a minimum depth of 9 in. at the flume ..,, outlet to the limits shown on the plans or as directed. 5. Construction Exits. When tracking conditions exist, prevent traffic from crossing or exiting the construction site or moving directly onto a public roadway, alley, sidewalk, pazking area, or other right of way azeas other than at the location of construction exits. Construct exits for either long or short-term use. a. Long-Term. Place the exit over a foundation course, if necessary. Crrade the foundation course or compacted V. subgrade to direct runoff from the construction exits to a sediment trap as shown on the plans or as directed. Construct exits with a width of at least 14 ft. for one-way and 20 ft. for ,_ two-way traffic for the full width of the exit, or as directed. (1) Type 1. Construct to a depth of at least 8 in. using crushed aggregate as shown on the plans or as directed. 826 506.4 to 506.4 -- (2) Type 2. Construct using railroad ties and timbers as shown on the plans or as directed. b. Short-Term. (1) Type 3. Construct using crushed aggregate, plywood, or wafer board. This type of exit maybe used for daily operations where long-term exits are not practical. (2) Type 4. Construct as shown on the plans or as directed. 6. Earthwork for Erosion Control. Perform excavation and embanlanent operations to minimize erosion and to remove collected sediments from other erosion control devices. ~- a. Excavation and Embankment for Erosion Control Features. Place earth dikes, swales, or combinations of both along the low crown of daily lift placement, or as directed, to prevent runoff spillover. Place swales and dikes at other locations as shown on the plans or as directed to prevent runoff spillover or to divert runoff. Construct cuts with the low -- end blacked with undisturbed earth to prevent erasion of hillsides. Construct sediment traps at drainage structures in conjunction with other erosion control measures as shown on ~- the plans or as directed. Where required, create a sediment basin providing 3,600 cu. fl. of storage per acre drained, or equivalent control '~ measures for drainage locatiatis that serve art area with 10 dr more disturbed acres at one time, not including offsite areas. b. Excavation of Sediment and Debris. Remove sediment and debris when accumulation affects the performance of the devices, after a rain, and when directed. "" 7. Construction Perimeter Fence. Construct, align, and locate fencing as shown on the plans or as directed. a. Installation of Posts. Embed posts 18 in. deep or adequately anchor in rock, with a spacing of 8 to 10 ft. b. Wire Attachment. Attach the top wire to the posts at least -- 3 ft. from the ground. Attach the lower wire midway between the ground and the top wire. c. Flag Attachment. Attach flagging to both wire strands r midway between each post. Use flagging at least 18 in. long. Tie flagging to the wire using a square knot. 827 .- 506.4 to 506.4 a-- 8. Sandbags for Erosion Control. Construct a berm or dam of sandbags that will intercept sediment-laden storm water runoff from disturbed areas, create a retention pond, detain sediment, and release water in sheet flow. Fill each bag with sand so that at least the top 6 in. of the bag is unfilled to allow for proper tying of the open end. Place the sandbags with their tied ends in the same °- direction. Offset subsequent rows of sandbags U2 the length of the preceding row. Place a single layer of sandbags downstream as a secondary debris trap. Place additional sandbags as necessary or as °' directed for supplementary support to berms or dams of sandbags or earth. 9. Temporary Sediment-Control Fence. Provide temporary sediment-oontrol fence near the downstream perimeter of a disturbed azea to intercept sediment from sheet flow. Incorporate the fence into erasion-control measures used to control sediment in azeas of higher flow. Install the fence as shown on the plans, as specified in this Section, or as directed. a. Installation of Posts. Embed posts at least 18 in. deep, or adequately anchor, if in rock, with a spacing of 6 to 8 ft. and install on a slight angle towazd the run-0ff source. b. Fabric Anchoring. Dig trenches along the uphill side of the fence to anchor 6 to 8 in, of fabric. Provide a minimum trench cross-section of 6 x 6 in. Place the fabric against the side of '~ the trench and align approximately 2 in of fabric along the bottom in the upstream direction. Backfill the trench, then hand-tamp. c. Fabric and Net Reinforcement Attachment. Unless otherwise shown under the plans, attach the reinforcement to wooden posts with staples, or to steel posts with T-clips, in at least 4 places equally spaced. Sewn vertical pockets may be used to attached reinforcement to end posts. Fasten the fabric -- to the top strand of reinforcement by hog rings or cord every 15 in. or less. d. Fabric and Net Splices. Locate splices at a fence post with a minimum lap of 6 in. attached in at least 6 places equally spaced, unless otherwise shown under the plans. Do not locate splices in concentrated flow areas. Requirements for installation of used temporary sediment- control fence include the following: 828 506.5 to SOG.S • fabric with minimal or no visible signs of biodegradation (weak fibers), • fabric without excessive patching (more than 1 patch every 15 to 20 ft.), • posts without bends, and • backing without holes. 506.5. Measurement. A. Rock Filter Dams. Installation or removal of rock filter dams will be "° measured by the foot or by the cubic yazd. The measured volume will include sandbags, when used. 1. Linear Measurement. When rock filter dams are measured by the foot, measurement will be along the centerline of the top of the dam. ~-- 2. Volume Measurement. When rock filter dams aze measured by the cubic yard, measurement will be based on the volume of rock computed by the method of average end areas. a. Installation. Measurement will be made in final position. b. Removal. Measurement will be made at the point of removal. B. Temporary Pipe Slope Drains. Temporary pipe slope drains will be measured by the foot. C. Baled Hay. Baled hay will be measured by each bale. D. Temporary Paved Flumes. Temporary paved flumes will be measured by the squaze yazd of surface azea. The measured area will include the energy dissipater at the flume outlet. E. Construction Exits. Construction exits will be measured by the square yazd of surface azea. F. Earthwork for Erosion Control. i. Equipment. Equipment use will be measured by the actual number °- of hours the equipment is operated. 2. Volume Measurement. ._ a. In Place. (I) Excavation. Excavation will be measured by the cubic yard in its original position and the volume computed by the method of average end areas. (2) Embankment. Embankment will be measured by the ,_ cubic yazd in its final position by the method of average .~. 829 _ ~ 506.6 to 506.6 end areas. The volume of embankment will be determined between: • the original ground surfaces or the surface upon that the embanlanent is to be constructed for the feature and • the lines, grades and slopes of the accepted embankment for the feature. b. In Vehicles. Excavation and embankment quantities will be combined and paid for under `Earthwork (Erosion and "" Sediment Control, In Vehicles)." Excavation will be measured by the cubic yazd in vehicles at the point of removal. Embanlanent will be measured by the cubic yard in vehicles ~' measured at the point of delivery. Shrinkage or swelling factors will not be considered in determining the calculated _ quantities. G. Construction Perimeter Fence. Construction perimeter fence will be measured by the foot. "- H. Sandbags for Erosion Control Sandbags will be measured as each sandbag or by the foot along the top of sandbag berms or dams. r I. Temporary Sediment-Control Fence. Temporary sediment-control fence will be measured by the foot. 506.6. Payment. The following will not be paid for directly but are subsidiary to pertinent Items: • erosion-control measures for Contractor project-specific locations (PSLs) inside and outside the right of way (such as construction and haul roads, field offices, equipmerit and supply areas, plants, and material sources); • removal of litter; • repair to devices and features damaged by Contractor operations; • added measures and maintenance needed due to negligence, _. carelessness, lack of maintenance, and failwe to install permanent controls; • removal and reinstallation of devices and feahues needed for the convenience of the Contractor; • finish grading and dressing upon removal of the device; and • minor adjustments including but not limited to plumbing posts, .a, reattaching fabric, minor grading to maintain slopes on an erosion embankment feature, or moving small numbers of sandbags. 830 506.6 to 506.6 .- The Contractor will be reimbursed in accordance with pertinent Items or Article 9.5, "Force Account," for maintenance, repair, or reinstallation of devices and features when the need for additional control measures cannot •-- be amibuted to the above, as determined by the Engineer. Stabilization of disturbed areas will be paid for under pertinent items. Famishing and installing pipe for outfalls associated with sediment traps and ponds will not be paid for directly but is subsidiary to the excavation and embankment under this Item. ,._ A. Rock Filter Dams. The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and measured as provided under "Measurement" will be paid for at the unit price bid as follows: "' 1. Installafion. Installation will be paid for as "Rock Filter Dams (Install)" of the type specified. This price is full compensation for furnishing and operating equipment, finish backfill and grading, °" lacing, proper disposal, labor, materials, tools, and incidentals. 2. Removal. Removal will be paid for as "Rock Filter Dams (Remove)." This price is full compensation for furnishing and operating equipment, proper disposal, labor, materials, tools, and incidentals. -- When the Engineer duects that the rock filter dam installation or portions thereof be replaced, payment will be made at the unit price bid for "Rock Filter Dams (Remove)" and for "Rock Filter Dams (Install)" -- of the type specified. This price is full compensation for famishing and operating equipment, finish backfill and gading, lacing, proper disposal, labor, materials, tools, and incidentals B. Temporary Pipe Slope Drains. The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and measured as provided under "lvleasurement" will be paid for at the unit price bid for "Temporary Fipe Slope Drains" of the size specified. This price is full compensation for furnishing materials, removal and disposal, famishing and operating .~ equipment, Tabor, tools, and incidentals. Removal of temporary pipe slope drains will not be paid for directly but is subsidiary to the installation Item. When the Engineer directs that the pipe slope drain installation or portions thereof be replaced, payment will be made at the unit price bid for "Temporary pipe Slope Drains" of the size specified, which is full compensation for the removal and reinstallation of the pipe drain. 831 566.6 to 506.6 Earthwork required for the pipe slope drain installation, including construction of the sediment trap, will be measured and paid for under Section 506.S.F, "Earthwork for Erosion and Sediment Control." Riprap concrete or stone, when used as an energy dissipater or as a stabilized sediment trap, will be measured and paid for in accordance with Item 432, "Riprap." ... C. Baled Hay. The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and measured as provided under "Measurement" will be paid for at the unit price bid for `Baled Hay." 'T'his price is full compensation for furnishing and placing bales, excavating trenches, removal and disposal, equipment, labor, tools, and incidentals. When the Engineer directs that the baled hay installation (or portions thereof) be replaced, payment will be made at the unit price bid for `Baled Hay," which is full compensation for removal and reinstallation °" of the baled hay. D. Temporary Paved Flumes. The work performed and materials ,_ furnished in accordance with this Item and measured as provided under "Measurement" will be paid for at the unit price bid for "Temporary Paved Flume (Install)" or "Temporary Paved Flume (Remove)." This price is full compensation for furnishing and placing materials, removal and disposal, equipment, labor, tools, and incidentals. When the Engineer directs that the paved flume installation or portions -- thereof be replaced, payment will be made at the unit prices bid for "Temporary Paved Flume (Remove)" and "Temporary Paved Flume (Install)" These prices are full compensation for the removal and replacement of the paved flume and for equipment, labor, tools, and incidentals. Earthwork required for the paved flume installation, including construction of a sediment trap, will be measured and paid for under Section 506.S.F, "Earthwork for Erosion and Sediment Control." .... E. Construction Exits. Contractor-required construction exits from off right of way locations or on-right of way PSLs will not be paid for directly but are subsidiary to pertinent Items. '° The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and measured as provided under "Measurement" for construction exits needed on right of way access to work azeas required by the °' Department will be paid for at the unit price bid for "Construction Exits (Install)" of the type specified or "Construction Exits (Remove)." This price is full compensation for furnishing and placing materials, $32 Sd6.6 to 506.6 excavating, removal and disposal, cleaning vehicles, labor, tools, and incidentals. When the Engineer directs that a construction exit or portion thereof be "~ removed and replaced, payment will be made at the unit prices bid for "Construction Exit (Remove)" and "Construction Exit (Install)" of the type specified. These prices are full compensation for the removal and replacement of the construction exit and for equipment, labor, tools, and incidentals. Constmction of sediment traps used in conjunction with the construction exit will be measured and paid for under Section 506.S.F, "Earthwork for Erosion and Sediment Control" "' F. Earthwork for Erosion and Sediment Control. The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and measured as provided under "Measurement" will be paid for at the unit price bid for ""' "Excavation (Erosion and Sediment Control, In Place)," "Embankment (Erosion and Sediment Control, In Place)," "Earthwork (Erosion and Sediment Control, In Vehicles)," "Dragline Work (Erosion and Sediment Control)," "Backhoe Work (Erosion and Sediment Control)," "Excavator Work (Erosion and Sediment Control)," "Front End Loader Work (Erosion and Sediment Control)," "Blading Work (Erosion and -" Sediment Control)," "Scraper Work (Erosion and Sediment Control)," or "Bulldozer Work (Erosion and Sediment Control)." This price is full compensation for excavation including removal of accumulated sediment in various erosion control installations as directed, hauling, aiid disposal bfmaterial itdt used elsewRefe ofi the project; excavation for construction of erosion-control features; embankments including furnishing material from approved sources and construction of erosion-control features; sandbags; plywood; stage r construction for curb inlets involved in curb inlet sediment traps; and equipment, labor; tools, and incidentals. Earthwork needed to remove and obliterate of erosion-control features will not be paid for directly but is subsidiary to pertinent Items unless otherwise shown on the plans. ,,_ Sprinkling and rolling required by this Item will not be paid For directly, but will be subsidiary to this Item. G. Construction Perimeter Fence. The work performed and materials -- furnished in accordance with this Item and measured as provided under "Measurement" will be paid for at the unit price bid for "Construction Perimeter Fence." This price is full compensation for fiirnishing and 833 ~. 508.1 to Sb8.1 placing the fence; digging, fence posts, wire, and flagging; removal and disposal; and materials, equipment, labor, tools, and incidentals. Removal of construction perimeter fence will be not be paid for directly w but is subsidiary to the installation Item. When the Engineer directs that the perimeter fence installation or portions thereof be removed and replaced, payment will be made at the unit price bid for "Construction Perimeter Fence," which is full compensation for the removal and reinstallation of the construction perimeter fence. _. H. Sandbags for Erosion Control. Sandbags will be paid for at the unit price bid for "Sandbags For Erosion Control" (of the height specified when measurement is by the foot). This price is full compensation for r materials, placing sandbags, removal and disposal, equipment, labor, tools, and incidentals. Removal of sandbags will not be paid for directly but is subsidiary to the installation Item. When the Engineer directs that the sandbag installation or portions thereof be replaced, payment will be made at the unit price bid for "Sandbags for Erosion Control," which is full ~' compensation for the reinstallation of the sandbags. I. Temporary Sediment-Control Fence. The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and measured as provided under "Measurement" will be paid for at the unit price bid for "Temporary Sediment-Control Fence." This price is full compensation _, for furnishing and placing the fence; trenching, fence posts, fabric and backfill; removal and disposal; and equipment, labor, tools, and incidentals. °- Removal of temporary sediment-control fence will not be paid for drrectly but is subsidiary to the installation Item. When the Engineer directs that the temporary sedimentation control fence installation or portions thereof be replaced, payment will be made at the unit price bid for "Temporary Sediment-Control Fence," which is full compensation for the iemoval and reinstallation of the temporary sediment-ootitrol fence. ITEM 508 CONSTRUCTING DETOURS '- 508.1. Description. Construct and maintain detours. Remove detours when required. 834 -- 636.1 to 636.3 ~-- application of the background materials and messages to the sign panels; furnishing and fabricating frames, wind beams, stiffeners, or required joint backing strips; famishing bolts, rivets, screws, fasteners, clamps, brackets, and sign support connections; assembling and erecting the signs; preparing and cleaning the signs; and equipment, materials, labor, tools, and incidentals. B. Replacement. This price is full compensation for furnishing and installing new plywood signs and hardware; removal of existing signs; fabrication of sign panels; treatment of sign panels required before application of the background materials; application of the background materials and messages to the sign panels; furnishing and fabricating frames, wind beams, stiffeners, or required joint backing strips; famishing bolts, rivets, screws, fasteners, clamps, brackets, and sign support connections; assembling and erecting the signs; preparing and _, cleaning the signs; salvaging and disposal of unsalvageable material; and equipment, materials, labor, tools, and incidentals. C. Refurbishing. This price is full compensation for modifying existing --- sign messages; removing and replacing existing route markers, reflectorized legend, or supplemental "signs attached to the parent sign; preparing and cleaning the signs; furnishing sheeting and hardware; salvaging and disposal of unsalvageable material; and equipment, materials, labor, tools, and incidentals. ITEM 636 ALUMINUM SIGNS 636.1. Description. • Installation. Furnish, fabricate, and erect aluminum signs. Sign ~-- supports are provided for under other Items. • Replacement. Replace existing signs on existing sign supports. • Refurbishing. Refurbish existing aluminum signs on existing sign supports. 636.2. Materials. A. Sign Blanks. Furnish sign blank substrates in accordance with DMS-7110, "Aluminum Sign Blanks," and in accordance with the types shown on the plans. Use single-piece sheet-aluminum substrates for Type A (small) signs and extruded aluminum substrates for Type O (ground-mounted) or Type O (overhead-mounted) signs. 914 636.3 to 636.3 B. Sign Face Retlectorization. Reflectorize the sign faces with flat surface reflective sheeting. Fumish sheeting that meets DMS-8300, "Sign Face Materials °' Use reflective sheeting from the same •- manufacturer for the entire face of a sign. C. Sign Messages. Fabricate sign messages to the sizes, types, and colors shown on the plans. Use sign message material from the same "" manufacturer for the entire message of a sign. • Ensure that the screened messages have clean, sharp edges and exhibit uniform color and reflectivity. Prevent runs, sags, and voids. Furnish screen inks in accordance with DMS-8300. • Fabricate colored, teanspazent film legend and reflectorized sheeting legend from materials that meet DMS-8300. • Fabricate nonreflectorized-sheeting legend from materials that meet DMS-8300. • Furnish Type A aluminum signs required as part of a message in conformance with the plans and in accordance with this Item. D, Hardware. Use galvanized steel, stainless steel, or dichromate-sealed ~- aluminum for bolts, nuts, washers, lock washers, screws, and other sign assembly hazdwaze. Use plastic or nylon washers to avoid tearing the reflective sheeting. Furnish steel or aluminum products in accordance •-- with DMS=7120, "Sign Hardware." When dissimilaz metals are used, select or insulate metals to prevent dorrosion. E. Sampling. The Engineer will sample in accordance with Tex-726-I. 636.3. Construcfion. A. Fabrication. 1. Sign Blanks. Furnish sign blanks to the sizes and shapes shown on ~- the plans and that aze free of buckles, warps, burrs, dents, cockles, or other defects. Do not splice individual extruded aluminum panel. Complete the fabrication of sign blanks, including the cutting and drilling or punching of holes, before cleaning and degreasing. After cleaning and degreasing, ensure that the substrate does not come into contact with grease, oils, or other contaminants before the application of the reflective sheeting. _ 2. Sheeting Application. Apply sheeting to sign blanks in conformance with the recommended procedures of the sheeting 915 ~, 636.4 to 636.4 .... manufacturer. Clean and prepare the outside surface of extruded aluminum flanges in the same manner as the sign panel face. Minimize the number of splices in the sheeting. Overlap the lap- "' splices by at least 1/4 in. Use butt splices for Type D and Type E reflective sheeting. Firovide a 1-ft. minimum dimension for any piece of sheeting. Do not splice sheeting for signs fabricated with transparent screen inks or colored transparent films. 3. Sign Assembly. Assemble extruded aluminum signs in accordance ,_ with the details shown on the plans. Sign face surface variation must not exceed 1/8 in. per foot. Surface misalignment between panels in multi-panel signs must not exceed 1/lb in. at any point. - 4. Decals. Code and apply sign identification decals in accordance with Item 643, "Sign Identif cation Decals." B. Storage and Handling. Ship, handle, and store completed sign blanks and completed signs so that corners, edges, and faces are not damaged. Damage to the sign face that is not visible when viewed at a distance of 50 ft., night or day, will be acceptable. Replace unacceptable signs. Store all finished signs off the ground and in a vertical position until erected. Store finished signs 60 in. by 60 in. or smaller in a weatherproof building. Lazger signs may be stored outside. C. Cleaning. Before shop inspection, wash completed signs with a biodegradable cleaning solution acceptable to the manufacturers of the "" sheeting, colored transparent film, and screen ink to remove grease, oil, dirt, smears, streaks, finger marks, and other foreign material. Wash again before final inspection after erection. D. Installation. Install signs as shown on the plans or as directed. E. Replacement. Remove the existing signs from the existing supports - and replace with new signs, including mounting hazdwaze, as shown on the plans. - F. Refurbishing. Refurbish existing signs by providing and installing new messages and mounting hazdwaze. Install new reflectorized legend and supplemental signs as shown on the plans. ... G. Unsalvageable Material. Accept ownership of unsalvageable materials and dispose of in accordance with federal, state, and local regulations. ,,,_ 636.4. Measurement. Signs installed or replaced will be measured by the square foot of the sign face. Signs refurbished will be measured by each sigri. 916 636.5 to 636.5 -- This is a plans quantity measurement Item. The quantity to be paid is the quantity shown in the proposal, unless modified by Article 9.2, "Plans Ctuantity Measurement." Additional measurements or calculations will be •- made if adjustments of quantities are required. 636.5. Payment. The work performed and materials famished in -- accordance with this Item and measured as provided under "Measurement" will be paid for at the unit price bid for "Aluminum Signs," "Replacing Existing Aluminum Signs," or "Refurbishing Aluminum Signs," of the type •- specified. A. Installation. This price is full compensation for furnishing and installing new signs and hazdwaze; fabrication of sign panels; treatment of sign panels required before application of the background materials; application of the background materials and messages to the sign panels; furnishing and fabricating frames, wind beams, stiffeners, or required joint backing strips; furnishing bolts, rivets, screws, fasteners, clamps, brackets, and sign support connections; assembling and erecting the signs; preparing and cleaning the signs; and equipment, materials, labor, tools, and incidentals. B. Replacement. This price is full compensation for famishing and ... installing new aluminum signs and hazdwaze; removal of existing signs; fabrication of sign panels; treatment of sign panels required before application of the background materials; application of the background materials and messages to the sign panels; furnishing and fabricating frames, wind beams, stiffeners, or required joint backing strips; furnishing bolts, rivets, screws, fasteners, clamps, brackets, and -- sign support connections; assembling and erecting the signs; preparing and cleaning the signs; salvaging and disposing of unsalvageable material; and equipment, materials, labor, tools, and incidentals. "- C. Refurbishing. This price is full compensation for modifying existing sign messages; removing and replacing existing route markers, refiectorized legetsd, or suppleriiental Signs attached td ttie parefit sign; preparing and cleaning the signs; furnishing sheeting and hazdwaze; salvaging and disposing of unsalvageable material; and equipment, materials, labor, tools, and incidentals. 917 _ 644.1 to 644.3 ITEM 644 SMALL ROADSIDE SIGN SUPPORTS AND ASSEMBLIES 644.1. Description. • Installation. Furnish, fabricate, and erect small roadside sign assemblies consisting of the signs, sign supports, foundations, and associated mounting hardwaze. --~ • Relocation. Relocate existing small roadside sign assemblies, and famish and fabricate materials as required. • Removal. Remove existing small roadside sign assemblies. 644.2. Materials. Famish all materials unless otherwise shown on the plans. Furnish only new materials. Furnish and fabricate materials in accordance with the following Items and with details shown on the plans: ~~- . Item 421, "Hydraulic Cement Concrete" • Item 440, "Reinforcing Steel" • Item 441, "Steel Structures" • Item 442, "Metal for Structures" • Item 445, "Galvanizing" • Item 634, "Plywood Signs" • Item 636, "Aluminum Signs" ""' • Item 643, "Sign Identification Decals" • Item 656, "Foundations for Traffic Control Devices." Use galvanized steel, stainless steel, dichromate sealed aluminum, or other "° materials shown on the plans for pipe, bolts, nuts, washers, lock washers, screws, and other sign assembly hazdwaze. When dissimilar metals aze used, select or insulate the metals to prevent corrosion. 644.3. Construction. Install foundations in accordance with Item 656, "Foundations for Traffic Control Devices." Plumb sign supports. Do not spring or rake posts to secure proper alignment. Use established safety "" practices when working near underground or overhead utilities. Consult the appropriate utility company before beginning work. A. Fabrication. Fabricate sign supports in accordance with Item 441, '"' "Steel Structures" Ensure that all components fit properly. Verify the length of each post for each sign before fabrication to meet field conditions and sign-mounting heights shown on the plans. Galvanize fabricated parts in accordance with Item 445, "Galvanizing." Punch or drill any holes in steel parts or members before the parts or members aze galvanized. Repair any steel part or member on which the 920 644.3 to 644.3 galvanizing has been damaged during assembly, transit, erection, or welding in accordance with Section 445.3.D, "Repairs." B. Installation. Locate sign supports as shown on the plans, unless directed to shift the sign supports within design guidelines to secure a "~ more desirable location or to avoid conflict with utilities and underground appurtenances. Stake sign-support locations for verification by the Engineer. r Install stub posts of the type, spacing, orientation, and projection shown on the plans. Remove and replace posts damaged during installation at the Contractor's expense. "" Connect the upper post sections to the stub post sections as shown on the plans. Torque connection bolts as shown on the plans. Attach signs to support assemblies in accordance with the plans and " pertinent Items. C. Relocation. Unless otherwise shown on the plans, reuse the existing supports and shorten or lengthen them as required. Obtain approval before lengthening existing supports. Furnish and install new breakaway stub posts in new foundations for relocated signs. Erect the supports on the new breakaway stub posts, and attach the signs to the Y supports. Attach signs to support assemblies in accordance with the plans and pertinent Items. Remove existing foundations to be abandoned in accordance with Section 644.3.D, "Removal." D. Removal. Remove existing concrete foundations that are to be abandoned to 2 ft. below finish grade. Backfill the remaining hole with material equal in composition and density to the swrounding area. Replace any surfacing with like material to equivalent condition. E. Handling and Storage. Handle and store existing signs or portions of signs removed so that they are not damaged. Prevent any damage to the various sign assembly components. Replace any portion of the sign damaged by the Contractor designated for reuse or salvage, including messages removed. Stockpile all removed sign components that will be reused or that °" become the property of the Department at designated locations. Accept ownership of unsalvageable materials, and dispose of them in accordance with federal, state, and local regulations. °'° F. Cleaning. After the sign has been installed, wash the entire sign with a biodegradable cleaning solution acceptable to the sheeting and screen ink manufacturers to remove dirt, grease, oil smears, streaks, finger ._ marks, and other foreign materials. 921 ~_ 644.4 to 647.1 644.4. Measurement. This Item will be measured as each small roadside assembly installed, removed, or relocated. 644.5. Payment. The work performed and materials famished in ... accordance with this Item and measured as provided under "Measurement" will be paid for at the unit price bid for "Install Small Roadside Sign Supports and Assemblies" of the type specified, "Relocate Small Roadside Sign Supports and Assemblies" of the type specified, or "Remove Small Roadside Sign Supports and Assemblies." A. Installafion. This price is full compensation for furnishing, fabricating, galvanizing, and erecting the supports; constructing foundations including concrete (when required); famishing complete signs including sign connections and all hardware; attaching the signs to the supports; washing and cleaning the signs; and equipment, materials, labor, tools, and incidentals. B. Relocation. This price is full compensation for furnishing and installing new breakaway stubs and new sign supports (when required); constructing foundations including concrete (when required); removing existing signs and related materials; new signs (when required); modifying existing sign supports; reinstallation of signs and sign assemblies; prepazing and cleaning; salvaging; disposal of unsalvageable material; hauling, excavating, backfilling, and surface placement; new hardware; and equipment, materials, labor, tools, and incidentals. C. Removal. This price is full compensation for removing existing sign assemblies and related materials; salvaging; disposal of unsalvageable material; hauling, excavating, backfilling, and surface placement; and equipment, materials, labor, tools, and incidentals. TTEM 647 LARGE ROADSIDE SIGN SUPPORTS AND ASSEMBLIES 647.1. Description. "° Installation. Furnish, fabricate, and erect steel supports for large roadside signs. • Relocation. Relocate existing lazge roadside sign assemblies, and furnish and fabricate materials as required. • Removal. Remove existing large roadside sign assemblies. 922 662.4 to 666.2 ..., this Item during the 30-day period, remove and replace them at the Contractor's expense. The 30-calendar day performance requirement will begin again after replacement of the mazkings. The daytime and nighttime reflected color of the mazkings must be distinctly white or yellow. The markings must exhibit uniform retroreflective characteristics. 662.4. Measurement. This Item will be measured by the foot or by each word, shape, symbol, or temporary flexible reflective roadway marker tab. -- Each stripe will be measured separately. Raised pavement mazkers used to simulate a mazking will be measured by the foot of mazking or by each raised pavement marker. _. This is a plans quantity measurement Item. The quantity to be paid is the quantity shown in the proposal, unless modified by Article 9.2, "Plans Quantity Measurement "Additional measurements or calculations will be made if adjustments of quantities are required. 662.5. Payment. The wark performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and measured as provided under "Measurement" will be paid for at the unit price bid for "Work Zone Pavement Markings" y of the type and color specified and the shape, width, and size specified as applicable. This price is full compensation for furnishing, placing, maintaining, and removing work zone pavement markings and For materials, equipment, labor, tools, and incidentals. Elimination of nonremovable mazkings will be paid for under Item 677, "Eliminating Existing Pavement Markings and Markers.°' Removal of short= term and removable mazkings will not be paid for directly, but will be subsidiary to this Item. Type II work zone pavement markings (paint and beads) used as a sealer for '"~ 'T'ype I pavement markings (therrtioplastio) will $e paid for under this Item. ~- ITEM 666 REFLECTORIZED PAVEMENT MARHINGS °' 666.1. Description. Furnish and place reflectorized pavement markings. 666.2. Materials. A. Type I Marking Materials. Furnish in accordance with DMS-8220, "Hot Applied Thermoplastic." 939 666.3 to 666.3 -. B. Type II Marking Materials. Furnish in accordance with DMS-8200, "Traffic Paint." C. Glass Traffic Beads. Furnish drop-on glass beads conforming to ~"' DMS-8290, "Glass Traffic Beads "' 1. Type I Markings. Furnish Type III drop-on glass beads. Furnish Type II or double-drop of Type II and Type III drop-on glass beads where each type bead is applied separately in equal portions (by weight), only when specified in the plans. When furnishing a ~~ double-drop system, apply the Type ITT beads before applying the Type II beads. 2. Type II Markings. Furnish Type III drop-on glass beads or other °" beads specified on the plans. D. Labeling. Use clearly mazked containers that indicate color, mass, material type, manufacturer, and batch number. 666.3. Equipment. A. General Requirements. Use equipment that: • is maintained in satisfactory condition, • meets or exceeds the requirements of the National Boazd of Fire .~ Underwriters and the RRC for this application, • uses an automatic bead dispenser attached to the pavement marking equipment, and ._ • can provide continuous mixing and agitation of the pavement marking material. Provide ahand-held thermometer capable of measuring the temperature " of the marking material when applying Type 1 material. B. Material Placement Requirements. Use equipment that can place: • at least 40,000 ft. of 4-in. solid or broken markings per day at the specified thickness; • linear markings up to $ in. wide in a single pass; • mazkings other than solid or broken lines; • a center-line and no-passing barrier-line configuration consisting of 1 broken line with 2 solid lines at the same time to the alignment, spacing, and thickness shown on the plans, for 3-line application; • white line from both sides; „_ • lines with clean edges, uniform cross section and thickness, and reasonably square ends; 940 666.d to 6GG.4 • skip lines between 10 and 10-1/2 ft., an approximate stripe-to-gap ratio of 1 to 3, and astripe-gap cycle between 39-1/2 ft. and 40-1/2 fr., automatically; • beads uniformly and almost instantly on the mazking as the marking is being applied; • beads uniformly during the application of all lines (each line must have an equivalent bead yield rate and embedment); and • double-drop bead applications using both Type II and Type III beads from sepazate independent bead applicatars, if double=drop bead application is used. 666.4. Construcfion. Place mazkings before opening to traffic unless short- --- term or work zone markings are allowed. A. General. Obtain approval for the sequence of work and estimated daily production. On roadways already open to traffic, place mazkings with "` minimal interference to the operations of that roadway. Use traffic control as shown on the plans or as approved. Protect all mazkings placed under open-traffic conditions from traffic damage and '"- disfigurement. Establish guides to mazk the lateral location of pavement mazkings as ... shown on the plans or as directed, and have guide locations verified. Use material for guides that will not leave a permanent mazk on the roadway. Apply mazkings on pavement that is completely dry and passes the following tests: • Type I Marking Application-Place a sample of Type I marking "- material on a piece of tarpaper placed on the pavement. Allow the material to cool to ambient temperature, and then inspect the underside of the tarpaper in contact with the pavement. Pavement " will be considered dry if there is no condensation on the tarpaper. • Type II Marking Application-Place a 1-sq. ft. piece of clear plastic on the pavement, and weight down the edges. The """ pavement is considered dry if, when inspected after 15 min., no condensation has occurred on the underside of the plasric. ,_, Apply mazkings: that meet the i`equitemenls of Tez-828-B, • using widths and colors shown on the plans, „_ • at locations shown on the plans, 941 .. 6dd.4 to dd6.4 -- • in proper alignment with the guides without deviating from the alignment more than 1 in. per 200 ft. of roadway or more than 2 in. maximum, • without abrupt deviations, • free of blisters and with no more than 5% by azea of hales or voids, • with uniform cross section and thickness, ~-- with clean and reasonably square ends, • that are reflectorized, and • using personnel skilled and experienced with installation of -` pavement markings. Remove all applied iiiarkiiigs that ate riot in aligdttient or sequence as stated in the plans or as stated in the specifications at the Contractor's expense in accordance with Item 677, "Eliminating Existing Pavement Mazkings and Markers," except for measurement and payment. ... B. Surface Preparation. Unless otherwise shown on the plans, prepaze surfaces in accordance with this section. I. Cleaning for New Asphalt Surfaces and Retracing of All Surfaces. For new asphalt surfaces (less than 3 yeazs old) and retracing of all surfaces, air-blast or broom the pavement surface to remove loose material, unless otherwise shown on the plans. A ""' sealer" for Type I markings is not required unless otherwise shown on the plans. ,_ 2. Cleaning for Old Asphalt and Concrete Surfaces (Excludes Retracing). For old asphalt surfaces (more than 3 years old) and all concrete surfaces, clean in accordance with Item 678, r "Pavement Surface Prepazation for Mazkings," to remove curing membrane, dirt, grease, loose and flaking existing construction mazkings, and other forms of contamination. 3. Sealer for Type I Markings. For asphalt surfaces more than 3 years old or for concrete, apply a pavement sealer before placing Type I mazkings on locations that do not have existing markings, "" unless otherwise approved. The pavement sealer maybe either a Type II mazking or an acrylic or epoxy sealer unless otherwise shown on the plans. Follow the manufacturer's directions for "" application of acrylic or epoxy sealers. When the sealer becomes dirty after placement, clean by washing or in accordance with Section 666.4.B.1, "Cleaning for New Asphalt Surfaces and '- Retracing of All Surfaces," as directed. Place the sealer in the same configuration and color (unless clear) as the Type I markings unless otherwise shown on the plans. 942 666.4 to 666.4 a. C. Application. Apply markings during good weather unless otherwise directed. If markings are placed at Contractor option when inclement weather is impending and the mazkings aze damaged by subsequent -- precipitation, the Contractor is responsible for all costs associated with replacing the markings ifrequired. 1. Type I Markings. Place the Type I mazking after the sealer cures. Apply within the temperature limits recommended by the material manufacturer. If during a spray application, operations cease for 5 min. or longer, flush the spray head by spraying mazking material into a pan or similaz container until the material being applied is at the recommended temperature. Apply on clean, dry pavements passing the moisture test described in Section 666.4.A, "General," and with a surface temperature above 50°F when measured in accordance with Tex-829-B. Apply Type I markings with a minimum thickness of: • 0.100 in. (100 mils) for new mazkings and retracing water- based mazkings on surface treatments involving Item 31b, "~ "Surface Treatments," or Item 318, "Hot Asphalt-Rubber Surface Treatments," • 0.060 in. (60 mils) for retracing on thermoplastic pavement °"' markings, ar • 0.090 in. (90 mils) for all other Type I markings. ,.,, The maximum thickness for Type 1 mazkings is 0.180 in. (180 mils). Measure thickness for mazkings in accordance with Tex-854-B using the tape method. °- 2. Type II Markings. Apply on surfaces with a minimum surface temperature of 50°F. Apply at least 20 gal. per mile on concrete and asphalt surfaces and at ]east 22 gal. per mile on surface •- treatments for a solid 4-in. line. Adjust application rates proportionally for other widths. When Type II markings are used as a sealer for Type I markings, apply at least 15 gal. per mile "" using Type II drop-on beads. 3. Bead Coverage. For Type I and Type II markings, provide a uniform distribution of beads across the surface of the stripe, with 40 to b0% bead embedment. D. Performance Period. All markings and replacement markings must "- meet the requirements of Tex-828-B for at least 30 calendaz days after installation. Unless otherwise directed, remove pavement markings that 943 _.., 666.5 to 668.1 ._ fail to meet requirements, and replace at the Contractor's expense. Replace failing mazkings within 30 days of notification. 666.5. Measurement. This Item will be measured by the foot; by each word, symbol, or shape; or by any other unit shown on the plans. Each stripe will be measured sepazately. -- This is a plans quantity measurement Item. The quantity to be paid is the quantity shown in the proposal unless modified by Article 9.2, "Plans Quantity Measurement" Additional measurements or calculations will be -` made if adjustments of quantities aze required. Acrylic or epoxy sealer, or Type II markings when used as a sealer for Type I markings, will be measured by the foot; by each word, symbol, or shape; or by any other unit shown on the plans. 666.6. Payment. The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and measured as provided under "Measurement" will be paid for at the unit price bid for "Pavement Sealer" of the size ~,.. specified or "Reflectorized Pavement Markings" of the type and color specified and the shape, width, size, and thickness (Type i markings only) specified as applicable. This price is full compensation for materials, r application of pavement markings, equipment, labor, tools, and incidentals. Surface preparation of new concrete and asphalt concrete pavements more than 3 yeazs old, where no stripe exists, will be paid for under Item 678, "Pavement Surface Prepazation for Mazkings." Surface prepazation of all other asphalt and old concrete pavement, except for sealing, will not be paid for directly but is subsidiary to this Item. '" Work-zone pavement mazkings (Type II, paint and beads) used as a sealer for Type I markings (thermoplastic) will be paid for under Item 662, "Work Zone Pavement Mazkings." .r If the Engineer requires that mazkings be placed in inclement weather, repair or replacement of markings damaged by the inclement weather will ,_ be paid for in addition to the original plans quantity. ITEM 668 PREFABRICATED PAVEMENT MARHINGS ,_ 668.1. Description. Furnish and place prefabricated pavement markings. 944 668.2 to 66$.3 ,~ 668.2. Materials. Furnish prefabricated pavement mazking materials meeting the requirements of DMS-8240, "Permanent Prefabricated Pavement Mazkings." Store all materials in a weatherproof enclosure and prevent damage during storage. 668.3. Construction. A. General. Obtain approval for the sequence of work and estimated daily production. Before the end of each working day, remove all waste "~ generated from the jobsite. Establish guides to mazk the lateral location of pavement markings as ._. shown on the plans or as directed, and have guide locations verified. Use guide material that will not leave a permanent mark on the roadway. Place pavement mazkings in alignment with the guides without deviating from the alignment more than 1 in. per 200 ft. of roadway or more than 2 in. maximum and with no abrupt deviations. B. Placement Limitations. Do not place pavement-mazking materials between September 30 and March 1 unless otherwise permitted. ~- 1. Moisture. Apply material to pavement that is completely dry. Pavement will be considered dry if, on a sunny day after 15 min., no condensation occurs on the underside of a 1-ft: square piece of -- cleaz plastic that has been placed on the pavement and weighted on the edges. 2. Temperature. Follow pavement and ambient air temperature requirements recommended by the material manufacturer. If the material manufacturer establishes no temperature requirements, do not place material if the pavement temperature is below 60°F or above 120°F. C. Dimensions. Place mazkings in accordance with the color, length, ._ width, shape, and configuration shown on the plans. Locate alignment as shown on the plans or as directed. D. Methods. Place all material in accordance with the material "` manufacturer's instructions, unless otherwise directed. In addition to the manufacturer's instructions, place materialsin accordance with the surface condition, moisture, and temperature requirements of this Item. E. Surface Preparation. Frepaze surface by any approved cleaning method that effectively removes contaminants, loose materials, and 945 ,.~ 668.4 to 668.5 ,_ conditions deleterious to proper adhesion. Abrasive or water-blast cleaning is not required unless shown on the plans. Blast-clean, when required, in accordance with Item b7$, "Pavement Surface Preparation ... for Mazkings." Prepaze surfaces further after cleaning by sealing or priming as recommended by the pavement marking material manufactwer or as directed. Use adhesive, when required, of the type ®- and quality recommended by the pavement marking material manufacturer. Do not clean concrete pavement surfaces by grinding. F. Performance Requirements. 1. Adhesion. Mazkings do not lift, shift, smear, spread, flow, or teaz by traff c action. •- 2. Appearance. Markings present a neat, uniform appeazance that is free of excessive adhesive, ragged edges, and irregulaz lines or contows. ~~ 3. Visibility. Mazkings have uniform and distinctive retroreflectance when inspected in accordance with Tex-828-B. G. Performance Period. All markings and replacement markings must meet the requirements of this Item for at least 15 calendaz days after installation. Remove all pavement markings that fail to meet ~. requirements and replace at the Contractor's expense. Replace failing markings within 30 days of notification. ._ 668.4. Measurement. This Item will be measwed by the foot or by each word, shape, or symbol. This is a plans quantity measwement Item. The quantity to be paid is the quantity shown in the proposal, unless modified by Article 9.2, "Plans Quantity Measurement." Additional measurements or calculations will be made if adjustments of quantities aze required. 668.5. Payment. The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and measwed as provided under "Measurement" -• will be paid for at the unit price bid for °`Prefabricated Pavement Markings" of the type and color specified and the shape, width, and size specified as applicable. This price is full compensation for cleaning the pavement by a any means other than required abrasive or water-blast cleaning or milling; furnishing and placing materials; and equipment, labor, foals, and incidentals. Abrasive or water-blast cleaning and milling, when shown on the plans, will be paid for under Item 678, "Pavement Surface Prepazation for Mazkings." 946 PLANS B~ 3 R EK CROSSING' #2 TOWN CRE BRIDGE IMPROVEMENTS KERR CO., TEXAS GENERAL NOTES'. Io lmpr°vemenn liable lee a ^t 9°r r IFe workdle. t_ (he cantmd^r shall mesa o s1NCflan ome and °Ynb;e% amn9 '^° oar m mown en .utgMUa ,.,aenae °f for u,uce% mar exist ena a.el°al e e ai%wmonfoe. me arawin9'. Tho ite'mum. Ps^°r tO ^p%9roun °umie%. A% ,nog a nee a a aenain caning Ibe umber t-000-zes-bx sl M iheb9enerd work rea. °Inllie% underground ~Yilll°° ° m the xissenc of underground nrtzo<'on%~ tuber will on a confihOt suhscribe t° a °l eFwor4 09 II ~n ue ru netl by c°m otFer%under9r°urd ifiliflesr is tuliliilei ° m The o trocbor shalt nofTY ai the Inter fio per(°nd ° coPTnsholl e e110) drvY% l^ advonm ~n writing w iteded ° Te n°^ice shall be ~ be iumrsFea to Me c° fr°ctln9 officer. %nmi nos M+amP` m detei nos Iocaraneae m s. The aamrarwr Mte^s ° ansubea it 1 ns WFlla eaeE gi^eer h°14 been ~epa a\thesel P~ ^8 dad cbVU. th a1 al. elarlilca0ans a e ^ sh°II verity Me Ions{rvc and eevv0ons canir4l°r inninw°rk ied. to iM1e ex Tfia W'lll'ms Prmr fo Leg shall be bmugM Isiing 4. c°onio°,n [~s~ e.°nimmeal°\elr~ in„r (aq atteni'an i n 10 iM1e En9i^eer }wanly' r Ted 5 the conlmd°r sh°ll orztruclion. cc Fou s p°ricr b begi^oll9imure proper drainu e• Leo esh°1V °beP s 6. rF1 I s radtn9 efi r dh9 is comPl$tad, \h metntainetl uni'u wish toP IL Once 9 ° a larger ih°~ tsn reve9el°led with hydr°mulicf 90%h iihO I° ore iM1Ofre%teetminPll ° ease axe °s1a iwnsirudion shall sbe afx lM1et°'ed. s Inc mlent °f Ibas Pa sand Pe itiscadom ih sv ° nslall°tion toot i plate. All ]. 1 ^ cusiomarly included. ^ ento a om.°amr %hall p.eme nvalv~i °'d hems necess°rY• °%a eci is ftM sz zholl b pr°vldmurk used tone hisnPpgdl~°II co Ph wlin Inc mo 0. 1fie benchenl m°rklnsq% n Uni ore Traitle Confro,% 9. All P vem ai shear as Nanu°I o °vid by olhees. ena °f Ab+ar a nn9 s19ns 1 be pr Devw s. HEARN ENGINEERING INC. 2M1Ol North MaYS ~ 0.ound Ro[M, Texas 78bb4 ~ i5121316DV6 SHEET INDEX t -COVER p - VICINVTY MAP j _ PUN AND PROFILE q _ CROSS SECTIONS 5 _ DETAILS g - SCC-5&6 ~ - FW-S ~" C~ , ~~a~ ~i I ~~as \ \ \ ~, ~. i / ~ ~' ~ / ~ ~~ ~ ~r m ~. Y'•. ~ ~ '~ ', ~~ m ~ ~ ~ ~~{-_ ~ s ~"~ ~ o~ ~ ~ /J w~ ^ y' , __ ~_ ':q,~~ F~~~ ,av~ 4a, N e' ,~ .. __ a 0~ ~ ~ ~~ i =~ ~;.> /, X;} `\/~ e '- -D_{ m :tip ~ m. -~-~ ~,~ ~i k °~ ~'.. ,~ ~-,- ~ ~ fr ~' o J~~. ~ „- //~~~ ~,LS~~ ~ i _- ~ ' ~ \ ~! ~ ~ ~ ~ Leo: 4t ~~ ~J ~ ~ ~n ~ ~ ~ ~ -_ __ @a k ~~ z .x ~ nom ~ ~ ,~ n~~ ~.~ ~ ~ i _ _ /, ~ ' >> I ~ ~.'~, r k $p p,. ~~ ~` 1 ~~ ~-__~ c 4 ~ S jg ~ II r ~ ~Fo, ~'t ?' a ~ I 1~ ~ # ti~~IRT?~- ~l\ c ~ ~ ,~ mA, \ s, A ~.1. _--,pc..,o __ ~~ smxm er. Aevisiaxs os a HEARN ENGINEERING INC. TOWN CREEK CROSSING #2 1WX BY: N 2101 NORTH MAYS ORIDGE IMPROVEMENTS r. x ~ ROUNO ROCN, TFXAS ]8664 VICINItt MAP sc>¢E0e V PH (512) 310-0176 KERB CO., TEXAS FAX (512) 244]316 onre. i ~ c ,- f f m m 10 N ~ P m T PN m O m N _ A _ i 1 r m % .- % r ~ p 9 ~ ~ ,~ £. ~ I ~ 1 ~ 0 ~ / O 0 1649.10 9 \ ~ ~/ //~ BEGIN CONSTRUCTION ^- ~ \ I \\ \ r / ~ ~ r ~ L _ / ~ ~ i i/ 0 o 16480 PVI STA 0+49.0 ^~~ ' BVCS' 0+51.6 PVI ELEV = '.1647.9] o BVCE: 164].91 k /Y S I ` ~ / r( r ~TI sle ~ ~ ° ~ AV ~ ~ 1647 3] \ S . ~ ' boy h I. \ ~;N? ~ ~\ ~ 164] 2 O r _ C \ ~ ~ = ~ ro ~~ 00 . 1647.13 ELEV = 96.4].2 i.. ~ z BVC G99 ~ ,0;51. 'ot /. y?z° R +~ . ' „+j 1647.1 1647.04 II ~ ° n~ \ OZ Ay UI~11 s"1 / ./ y=x \ ,~.. f A ~ ~ ~ _ \ / Hm+ II I 1I, ~' /` _ YEN \ ~ ~~ ~ / + +m m NP / ~ za ' u 1647.2 1646.7] ~ m I , . 'OO / rs ° o ° 1 ' X °0+ -;' ~o ~ ' 164].5 164] 53 II w w '~.. \ \ ~ ~ \ o ci o _ ( \ ! u . P. v. c. P m ~ . ~ \ , _ iA ~ ~ \ BP ~ mD \ ° r m y 1648 0 ~ ~ ~ i . 1648.93 \ m k - ' ' 0 ~ \] EV E. 1648.00 ° ~ ~ I 1 x y n Y ~ s'~ ° 1 u cm ~ .°~ u 1~ ° n..Hm ~ ~\ l i o ~ ,. v ~ \-- 1 0 ~ Il r,, z,~ \ N ~I r ~ '.,, 1 1 . 'a:. ~ :D ELEV = fi6443 ~ o \ ~, X74. , ~~.~,~ ~ ~ i ~ 3 ~ \ p~, ~ \ \ ~. Z\. \ `... ` ~ . ~ ~ 1 ~ . ~ \ 0 1650.56 .\ __ ~_ ~~v ' \ \ . ~ o i \ ~ PVI STA = 3+13.1 ~ ~p \rc 1s' ~ ~~~? \ X021 ~ I ~ ~ PYI ELEV = 1650 69 ° ,. ~ ~ o ~ *aK + PVI STA = 3+26.9 ~ ~,',. ~ ~a Ya... '..? ,CY m ~ 1650.90 r PVI ELEV '= 1650.90 ° '~ ~ \ BEGIN CONSTRUCTION 1 ; ° \ q, ~0, ~ ~'~ p. , y \ ~ £f o` ~, no : ~ i c ~ ~y \ //\\ Z If ZN , 4 l l ~,~. ~ ~Z ~} 1 C4- :- nC..T~ i T ~' ',,. ~ra ' ' V ,. yn c II II II O 9 Nm< 1y a I m m X ONNa?I Vy nN'm0 A m D E ~ m O N P m 1 m O N A ' ° m r m oE=I~~m a. ~ A~.ISl4~= g ~ HEARN ENGINEERING INC. TOWN CREEK CROSSING #2 oanrr. er: W ^ F ~ n 2101 NORTH MAYS BRIDGE IMPROVEMENTS cxccrcco er: ~ ROUND ROCK, TFXAS ]8664 TE PuN a ~ V m PH (512) 310-01]6 SI - - scnM: ' ` FAX (5121244]316 KERA CO., TEXAS pA1E, vsooe L j0 ~ _ _ % BL U UL- %- %91 % BL Y YL- M- oV91 % OL 0 0 % YY91 OY91 U191 9Y94 133X5 %91 %91 YY9t --__ 9Y91 YY91 - YY9{ m _ _ f. ~.. O Z y Z N ' N> N l1 ~ ~ - ` '1~ i >'F m 1 /1 V LS9t %9{ BYBI ~,%9t O {~~ I ¢ ~ ~~TT ! L'~} i Y y.,. i,. L ~.. ..- -.~ / 2591 -_ _ .--- _ ZSBI I T -'v®'9591 IS91 ',. it9t O$+` ,s% ~ l 4 F, i. x ~ d~'~ OS+Z { a ~..y ,4a O9B1 % pL O OZ %- YY9l --.- ---- - I,. YY9l O I. ----. - ~'BSBI ;.. .' 9591 I 00+Z .--_ ---.. -. ___ w Z '' ',, § z fl _-.-----. - -_ A A - m ~ % az a of % -~ ~ ~ ~ ~ Z s ate' -: t~°Y ._ _. ,~. an ~.. i %94 ~. -_ ~ -- BMI N _ 2491 BKI %B{ 8 P a t -_-_ --_. - __.- . € o m a 00+£ ~ 2591 --- - - - -_- ZS91 m 4 ~ ~ LS91 $~+l L591 - 01 OZ 0 OL- SY- YY91 ~+ ~ YY91 ".. .~ 9591 -_-_-~ 8591 °m H iS9l -_- _•_ ~i _'- -•-----_ •- LS91 OY OZ 0 9Z- M- HSI YY91 %91 %9l 'b'\ ~ -W' 2594 '-. L%1 ~$+~ % OZ OE- %- YY91 Yryl $[+Q OI OL 9 OL- 09- %91 YY91 IY91 ~~ : . Q~+~ OY91 % OZ 0 OL % .,..0991 YMI -1Y91 -.r-. ~ i Q . ,.. ' .~9tP1 ~ ~,. %91 9K1 $Z+~ 5 3 3 F i $L+Z t` f - zo' r I i 4 PROPOSED FAV~NG SCRFAf,6nPE 0 dfA AL. OvERIAv 1) 1 ~I x--0 1 p6~f NATURAL SROUND :..• PR~-a' f P~ v0.DCtORM`+PEBGPAOE ~_ r0 eEX~RO~~aaLLeasEa~aP i0 PLAGEMENI O~ TYPICA ft0A0 SECTIO N.1.5. ~ ~ `~ ~. _ GAEJ. PON APE ~ ~~ ~~ 1 ~ 11 5 ~' o ~" e~19. `I 'tw ~.U S)~ 1~ e' ST AEP A EUGEE N.LS. SIGNS t0 0E 16 y~GN lyORDINO~JB gp 5 ppAMEL ANQ EiG. SNAbw.JiHER xAH~S µl-1H _ GO~OftS fi 50PTH ROL OEV' GJIDEUNES 5 5,G GON' _ OE OS RCf15 AN HiGNWAYS lyt3 " ~ FOP cMAOE to ~ IN 1 i Ra MAx ~ PROPOSGOUGE - 1~\ i s~APr /, ' ¢a' S5 a' ~ \ FLC% BASE AROVE i0 MA GH PPOPOASSB BC eo%Es ~I BE WIDE x 4TALL^ i 4 i GAGE SdA6 0 OD ~F~ ENAMEL ~~` 3 AAA W0UAA4~2ED PEY E~SfR iW0 cOAtS DF W BEE4`ENCLEO CALL SHALL I J 1 SHA0. NAME4. 50.E GAGE l LEfSEPM+ tHREE GA~V. ~1-BOEtS 1~5., BuGx EztEROa E sE An An+EO W! ,N o~AM~ER- '~ '1' RUAO//AY ~~~ - S ~~~ 't,~ ~ MARKING. S1A- 041 10 '..457 ~~~ ~ J O ~._ E96f 4PRf _ j'.1 A'iP RAP P ROPOSG AG_ J ~( L Wt_Bl livP.l E StAF~ J~ ._ NEAOwdI- ~'Sti P.1 i~RAOE i^ _ tG Bf 2 ~ ~ CPP~N MAY. __,."r nF_TAII- "1g' N'IOEI aI 'r~ ~~ EDGE OE PAGED E4t ~ `~- (. f..Pa ~ "vh° - V1~ ~ .~. ~ ~ K A pr r~ t~, .: ~ ~ f F GE ET AID - (/y'~~~ T~ AE SIGNP ~LL `i ' L4 N15. ~ I Z ill z ~ ~ s M w o ~ U 'v~ Z z O Z Y M1 O " W °f~b$ W Ft, r, N 4 V s r N ~ ~a~ W H W ~ x OF 0 SECTION s v DIMENSIONS w J s H T U 6, _0• q•-p•• T• i•• 6'-0" 9'-0" B" i" 6•-O• 4•_0• 9• B, • • • • 6 _0 5 -p T• i• 6'-0" 5'-0' e" T' - 6'-0' S'-0' 9' e' 6'-0' 6'-0' 1" T' ~ 6'-0° 6'-0' 0" i' ~^ca cx^ s€o 5~'~3 'f€o ~o~h - SF BILLS OF REINFORCING STEEL tFor Box Length 40 feet) OUANTITiES Bars B Bars C Bars D Bars E-sq ' Bars F sq I Bors F2-°< " Bors H Bars Per fool of Curb Total of IB Max at IR Max q'O4 R Bar rel Lengin We igh+ No. _ p Lenqth Weight '%' "Y' No. ._ n Length We'gM 'Y' "Z" No. Length W+ No. p Lengin W} Na. Lengtn Wt Length No. ~ Conc qei nF Conc _ a Ccnc flei of -. _ ~ ICYI ILb) (CYI L ~ ILYI ILbI 162 e6 6' T'- 1" 1, T24 162 v5 6' 6'- 0" I, I: 194 n5 5' 6'-I I" I, q00 I9q v4 5' i'- I" 9~ 194 u6 5" 6'-11" 2,015 162 a5 6' P- i" 1, 2f 162 a6 6" i'- 1" I,iN 162 as b" i'- 6" 1, 2' 194 e5 5" 6'-I I" t, 400 199 v4 5" 8'- ]' I, Of 194 x6 5" 6'-11" 2,015 162 e5 6" 6'- i" 1, q'. 194 x6 5' T'- 1' 2,069 162 a5 6" B'- B" 1, 4f I9q a5 5" 6'-11' 1,400 199 vq 5" 9'- 3" 1,15 I9q a6 5' 6'-11' 2,015 162 v5 6" 9'- T" L61 9" 6' ~ v ~ ~~~ I I %~ BARS K a4 BARS C ISpn I'-o' Wxl IL en9fh 4'-3"1 11 5 0 Permis6i ple~ Bars K Consi J1 (Typ1 F2 Ti.-- ~ aT F C 2' Tryw ~ 6 -E IiYPI z^_ F2 _~ _ (TYPI E m° J J"~ -C F2 B-' ~-B -canst Jt ITyp1 TYPICAL SECTION N~~ BARS 0 Bors B - Tpop 6 ! Boiidn 5 6 - Bars C - top 51 pp l Bars F2 ears o - emtom slap ears FI- rap slop only -' PLAN OF RE1NF STEEL 6" 5'-10' 986 3'- I" 2'- 9" 56 3'-0' 5" 5' - 0' 64B 2' -10' 2'- 2" 56 4'-0' 6" 5' - 9" 9i2 3' - I" 2'- 0" 56 9'-0" 6" 5' -10' 906 ]' - I" 2'- 9" 56 9'-0' 5" 5' - 0" 69B 2' -10" 2'- 2" 56 5'-0" 6" 5' - 9' 9i2 1' - 1" 2'- e" 56 5'-0' 6" 5' -10' 906 3' - I' 2'- 9" 56 5'-0" 5" 5' - 0' 646 2' -10" 2'- 2" 56 6'-0' 6" 5' - 9' 9T2 3' - I" 2'- 6" 56 6'-0" 3" Cn, (See 1 NOTES'. SECTION THRU CURB 0" m n io 5'-0' w Estlmptee cure neigms shOVm elseWher6 in the plan6. FOr sreumares wi mouf rm un9 pna curos roller man I'-0", refer to ECB taneare. Far structures Wi Th T6 pr iCge r0i 1, refer f0 T6-CM sianeorC. Lor structures wim nr'ege roil, orner }Han ib, refer 4o PAC s4pneare. 02 Lor ven is le safety, iha follOwinq reQW remaMs must es met: - For iructures wi mour pri Cqe roil, turps bn011 DrOl eCf np lmre tnan ]" agave fin isneC grpae. - For structures wim er'ege rail, turps bean pe f usn with f'misnea erase. mro netgm6 mall ee reeacea, if necessary, to meet 1ne agave repuiremen ts. No cnanges w,ll pe mme ,n puantities one no aeeironm ccegensat ion Wil be p lowee for in is work. QJ For cures less roan 1'-0" high, Tilt ears K reeuce ear ne ignf a net nary to ma miain For turps esss man 3" nigh, Dars K laivay oe amt»ea. ~q I'-0" tyD ico 1. 2'-0" wnen RAC stpnaora is referrea to elsewhere in +ne Plans. © For eacn eox s mom Fl I neigm mown snp 1 pe useo roe'aii ca rverrs wim less man 2'-0' of fill. 33 0. 40q 119.6 0.5 63 19.9 0.556 121.3 O.5 TO 22.1 0.903 104.4 0.5 63 19.6 0. 52T 1]].0 0.5 6J 21.6 0.605 126. 5 0. 5 TO 24. T 0.526 111.2 0.5 63 21.5 O. STO 140.8 0.5 6J 23.3 0.659 19L8 0.5 i0 26.T 0.569 110.0 0.5 63 2].] 0.613 148.6 0.5 63 25.0 O. i04 150.6 0.5 TO 20.i GENERAL NO cos: craee Be6ignea ac reinq m current AASNTO smnaara a,a Interim Slppel Spec if'cot ions. Oes ignee fo }ne max imm fill net gnt6 mown. All e, nforcinq steel snp I pe Grcee 60. All concrete shall ee Hasa c^ w,tn mere excePr ions: e class °s for too sme6 or cu roeris w,m overlay, Wim into-2 tours urface trearmen; or wim ine too sloe us me final rieingesurface. CIa66 'C' a Cf ete BM1OII nnVe a in mn, Canpre56iVe 6i rengm pf 3,600 p6 i. onC loss '6" concrete sno I nave a m,mmun compressive sirengin of 4,000 psi. Tne use of permanent Form6 ~s not of lowee. %einf0„es clears esn eYl pe aej ustee to prow tae c m,n mm of ine ~eottom eege of Vtne top slab 6noll pe cnanferee ] incnes at ine entrance. Con6truction joins 6nown at the flout line may pa rp isee a of b 'ncne6 Oi Yne Contractor's opption. IF Tb is oaf tan see, Bars E may pa cu} off or rO,see, ne Bars C onC o may ee re~ersee. see stpnaora 5[C-MB ror skewea enas, pnq le secr i ons one leng}neni n9 CetOils. HS20 LOADING ~f Texas DeNrlrreN o{ 7rortsporlalfon &Itlge ONlym SINGLE BOX CULVERTS CAST-IN-PLACE 0' TO 30' FILL SCC-5 & 6 oer T =_: TABLE OF oimensi ons W I % IMENSIONS & REINFORCING STEEL 7e for One Structure Entl> Vpr ipD le Esti m[ Rei nforc'nq aapnr Pnr fi Bars JI Bars Jx q Is Y Z w12-Wit _ SPO SpD ,Ae,~T, TABLE OF ESTIMATED CULVERT 70EWALL DUANTITIES 12'-0' 6'- 2' 3'- O' 2'- 6" 9" aT 13•-0. 6•_ 6. 3,- 3. 2•- y I1" vT Is-o" r- B" r- o' r- o" r- t" .o _ `o'ff I6'-0= 6'- 2" q'- 6" 3'- o" I'- 3' nq ov5 Finisnea Grotle o 3~Z B 10 x Ifl"aWVy Slopel ni `a~ R °s< 0 .v^~m ~I F JI r v aE m ~~~ 5k conforms r0 snipe verpena mu mr to Rawy~ ~~ I Toe cf Slope u utMCIYOI Urv IMLI:ULAILUNSt Formal ps: GII values are n Festl Hw H T T + C - 0.250' A IHw - 0.333' 1 {SLI B = IAI [tangent tB i t5'Il Lw Iql i [Cosine (0 + IS'1] For Cpsi-in-place culver}s: L iw[!N) 19 +INill llll]v ICOS ine O) For Premsi cu I*er+s: Ltw [INI 1211+ 51 IN - II 10.500'11 r ICOS'ne AI ipial Wingwpll Area ITwo Wings - iG.l (0.51 Mw + 0.333' 1 fLw + AI Hw Heigh of Wingwpll SL:I Si ee Slope Hvi'o IHOr izonivla Vertical) A LengTn of Shot} Wingwpll Lw LengTn of Lmq Wingwpll Liw = Culvert toewall LengTn N NurUer of Culvert Spans B Culvert Skew See ppplicOD le Dox culvert stpnaprp For H, 5, i ana a vm ues. __~ /A ~ v% ~GSµyW ~ ` <4 O ~ ~ `, Lenqtn of Wings O;` bcsetl on sL:l \\,\\\\ \ ~~ lope oneong / his li 5 ~`~. .. v ~F E~ PJ u~ INSIDE ELEVATION Isnow ing re"niorci ng~ Culvert onp Culvert toewall einfwcing t snown for cl ar iTy.) W PLAN (Showing tlimen6ions ma 30' Skew.l ~ S`' Pa 6 L- - -f 0 RL ,v + v / V- -JI FOOTING AND TOEWALL CORNER DETAILS ILUlaert ana mmerr toewall reinforcing not snown for cbr'ry.) Culvert Bottom 61CD Reinforcing SECTION 8-B O ~ 2'-0" ~ Extena Bars P l'-0' min inAm into bot tam slp0 of apx cu roerr. 0. Skew ~ O2 AeVUSt to f'T ob n ss[ry t0 mu inTVin I I/ " clear co er and 4" m'n'Iramebetween Dors. BARS DS 0 guani ifies shown a e Dosea on an average wing net qro for two wings lOnersrructure entl). i0 aetermina total {Snort Wi nql quantities for two wi ng6 w Tiply ine tObul atea values (~ DY 0.5 x IA ~LwI. :y Recemnentletl va ues of Slope are: 2: 1, 3: 1, 4: 1, & 6: 1. ~~'. -~~,~I OS Wnen shown elsewnere on me plans, v 5' aeep concrete 1115, o'prop snap De egn64rueiea. Unless arnerwi6e snawn n the pl ons r a'rectea py the Engi neeq Me ri p~pp snoll nave q 6' w'ae py I'-6" aeep r inforcetl concrete BARS DL toewall a onq all aages palpcem ro npmral erouna; ILOnq Wingl fne toew0 I shall De r infvrcea Dy extenai ng TYp~cpl n prop r 'nmrcinq into the tpewan; c natructi on ~"~ gf,f*owor6 Q0'veatenant6r "s'ineefull alstoncecOf Rne NTi~ fiprOp..st interv015 ofCaepprax lmgte ly 20'. Wnen sucn LI IXap prvv i0eao the culvert toewall snown in sECiI ON B-B will n t per Wired. Payment Tor r"prov snap De Os requ iretl Dy Item 932, "R iprDO © At Contractor's option, CW Vert Tpewall may pe enaea flusn wiiM1 Wingwall TvewO1L qaj ust rei nforc'ng frdn BARS RS tnor shown ps ec spry. 15ngrt Wingl O AOplicoD le va lue se"f pf Skew are: 15', 3g', wte a5•. 2'-0' O TYpi cOl w'ngwvll mgle for all skews. ~1 O 0" min to 5'-0' max. For T6 ar C6 Rail, see i6-CIA atvnaara for OaO it tonal aetal ls. For all OTner rail tacesa refer to the flAC simaar a. For urns wi thouT \_`~TS' r ~I ntl greater MOn t'-0" hi gn, see ECO atvnagrae \\Y lass for atltlit tonal aetc'IS. Esi imatee curb ne ign+s ar Skew snoxn el sewnere in Me pl Ona. 10 For venic le eofety~ curb neignts ana well ne i gmMs SM1011 De retlucea, if necessary, }o prov tae o xinpm BARS RL 3^ ~ojem ipn ooove fini6nea arpae. No cnaoges wi I aonq wingl Dell ee oiloweetff°fernana~ok eeitiongl camenspr tan ^' GENERAL NO `EoS: i Y+G' 'i3 ~ Oesigne0 al n9 Ta Cwreni AASHiO SivnaOra Ona l Interim snecif icvtions. All r i foroi nq steel snvll De Graae 60. BARS JI BARS V Au c rete shal I De ugss r ono snau nave a cednpress ive atrengM of 3600 psi. '. _^.. wl_~q" m~nil~r~nrorgi nq o°iear Hall De aaj usiee to prov tae IF==-il ~ o wnen structure is fwneea on sane rock, aeptn pf ~~ `oewa us rot culverts ono wmgaal is may De retlucea ~~ nr enminatea as eirecrea Dy me Engineer. see ecs sneer far aOai Tionpl aimansons ana i nformO}lan. ine quwtiR ies for Concrete ne rel nforcinq steel sU li ing frgn ine fOrmJ I D9 given On Tnie finest p for COni rgctor'6 InfOrmaiiOn Only, r0 BARS L BARS J2 ~ Texas OeyorifnmM d TronsQOrla/ffxr fl~ICge CNlslm CONCRETE WINGWALLS WiTH FLARED WiNGS FOR SKEWEO BOX CULVERTS F SECTION A-A WINUWALL